Yamaha Psr 550 Owners Manual

Psr-550-Owners-Manual yamaha-psr-550-owners-manual-132268

PSR-550 Owner's Manual PSR550E

Yamaha Corporation PSR-550 Owner's Manual psr550e Yamaha Corporation - PSR-550 - Owner's Manual

PSR-550 to the manual 076632ac-e71c-47ec-922c-c4971e41cab3

Yamaha Corporation PSR-550 Owner's Manual psr550e Yamaha Corporation - PSR-550 - Owner's Manual

: Yamaha Psr-550-Owners-Manual yamaha-psr-550-owners-manual-132268 pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 160 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2

This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply

(adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power sup-

ply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on

the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha.

This product should be used only with the components

supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by

Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety

markings and instructions that accompany the accessory

product.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The information contained in this manual is believed to be

correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves

the right to change or modify any of the specifications with-

out notice or obligation to update existing units.

This product, either alone or in combination with an ampli-

fier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of pro-

ducing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing

loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high

volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you expe-

rience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should

consult an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time

period before damage occurs.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relat-

ing to how a function or effect works (when the unit is oper-

ating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s

warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility.

Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer

before requesting service.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe

and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our

products and the production methods used to produce

them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and

the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the follow-

ing:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery

which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life

span of this type of battery is approximately five years.

When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified

service representative to perform the replacement.

This product may also use “household” type batteries.

Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the

battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the

charger is intended for the battery being charged.

When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or

with batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be in-

stalled correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may

result in overheating and battery case rupture.

Warning:

Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery.

Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used

batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your

area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type bat-

teries in your area for battery disposal information.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for

some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end,

please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that

relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batter-

ies, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you,

please contact Yamaha directly.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The name plate is located on the bottom of the product.

The model number, serial number, power requirements,

etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model

number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the

spaces provided below and retain this manual as a perma-

nent record of your purchase.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

92-BP (bottom)

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

3

1

• Do not use the instrument near other electrical products such as televisions,

radios, or speakers, since this might cause interference which can affect proper

operation of the other products.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally

fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners,

solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Also, do not

place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor

the panel or keyboard.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do

not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or

rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the

internal components or result in the instrument falling over.

• Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable

volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience

any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

■DATA BACK-UP AND STORAGE

• Yamaha recommends that you regularly save data using a floppy disk in a safe,

cool, dry place. YAMAHA CANNOT BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR THE

ACCIDENTAL LOSS OF IMPORTANT MUSIC DATA! Regarding the data you

have created, as long as fresh batteries are inserted in (or an AC power adaptor

is connected to) the instrument, the data will be retained, even when the power

is turned off. It will also be retained long enough to exchange an old set of

batteries for a new set. If you have important data in the instrument which you

don’t want to lose, please take care to keep fresh batteries inserted in (or keep

an AC power adaptor connected to) the instrument, and to regularly save data.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or

modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations.

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep these precautions in a safe place for future reference.

• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or

modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If

it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it

inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into

any openings.

• If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a

sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or

smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch,

disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected

by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

• Use the specified adaptor (PA-6 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha)

only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or

overheating.

• Before cleaning the instrument, always remove the electric plug from the outlet.

Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may

have accumulated on it.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the

instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators,

and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects

on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll

anything over it.

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold

the plug itself and not the cord.

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.

Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in

the outlet.

• Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical

storms.

• Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity

markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, fire, or battery fluid

leakage.

• Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries together

with old ones. Also, do not mix battery types, such as alkaline batteries with

manganese batteries, or batteries from different makers, or different types of

batteries from the same maker, since this can cause overheating, fire, or battery

fluid leakage.

• Do not dispose of batteries in fire.

• Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged.

• When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time,

remove the batteries from the instrument to prevent possible leakage of the

battery fluid.

• Keep batteries away from children.

• If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid

should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with

water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause

loss of sight or chemical burns.

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the

power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components,

set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all

components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls

while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold

or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to

prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal

components.

(4)-7

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock,

short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

4

2

Congratulations!

You are the proud owner of a fine electronic keyboard. The Yamaha PSR-550

PortaTone combines the most advanced tone generation technology with state-of-the-

art digital electronics and features to give you stunning sound quality with maximum

musical enjoyment. A large graphic display and easy-to-use interface also greatly

enhance the operability of this advanced instrument. In order to make the most of your

PortaTone’s features and extensive performance potential, we urge you to read the

manual thoroughly while trying out the various features described. Keep the manual in

a safe place for later reference.

Packing List

Please check that these items have been packed with your PSR-550.

• PSR-550 • Music Stand (page 9)

• PSR-550 Data Disk • Owner’s Manual

(Refer to “Included Data Disk”

on page 59, and “MIDI and TO

HOST Terminals” on page

107.)

5

3

How to use the manual

Setting Up page 12

Before going on to any other part of the manual, we strongly suggest

you read this section first. It shows you how to get started playing and

using your new PSR-550.

Important Features page 8

Once you’ve set up the PSR-550, you should read through this section

— and explore the relevant page references — to familiarize yourself

with the enormous variety of features and functions of the PSR-550.

Basic Operation page 17

This section introduces you to the basic operating conventions of the

PSR-550, such as editing values and changing settings, and shows

you how to use the convenient Help and Direct Access functions.

Contents page 6

All topics, features, functions and operations are listed here in the

order they appear in the manual, for easy reference.

Panel Controls page 10

Use this section to find out about all of the buttons and controls of the

PSR-550.

Panel Display Indications page 16

This section explains the display indications of the PSR-550 and how

to read them for optimum operation.

Function Tree page 22

This lists all functions of the PSR-550 according to their hierarchical

structure, letting you easily see the relationship of the various func-

tions and quickly locate desired information.

Appendix page 123

This contains various important lists such as the Voice list, Preset

Style list, Effect list, MIDI data format and MIDI implementation chart.

Troubleshooting page 135

If the PSR-550 does not function as expected or you have some

problem with the sound or operation, consult this section before calling

your Yamaha dealer or service center. Most common problems and

their solutions are covered here in a very simple and easy-to-under-

stand way.

Index page 153

This section alphabetically lists virtually all topics, features, functions

and operations with their respective page numbers, letting you quickly

and easily find the information you need.

The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional pur-

poses only, and may be different from your instrument.

6

4

Contents

Packing List 4

How to use the manual 5

Important Features 8

Panel logos ................................................... 9

Music stand ................................................ 10

Panel Controls and Terminals 10

FOOTSWITCH jack .................................... 10

PHONES/OUTPUT jack ............................. 10

Top Panel Controls................................................. 11

Rear Panel Controls............................................... 11

Setting Up 12

Power supply connections ..................................... 12

Demo Song Playback 13

Using the Music Database 14

Panel Display Indications 16

Basic Operation 17

Calling up the Operation Displays.......................... 17

How to Read the Menu/Message Display and

“Easy Navigator”............................................... 18

Menu Selection ...................................................... 19

Changing (Editing) Values ..................................... 20

Naming .................................................................. 21

Direct Access ......................................................... 21

Function Tree 22

Direct Access Chart 24

Mode 25

Style Mode ............................................................. 25

Song Mode ............................................................ 25

Record Mode ......................................................... 25

Disk Mode .............................................................. 25

Playing Voices 26

Selecting a Voice ................................................... 26

Playing Two Voices (R1, R2) Simultaneously......... 27

Playing Different Voices with

the Left (L) and Right (R1, R2) Hands ............. 28

Functions of the Keyboard ..................................... 29

Transpose .............................................................. 30

Pitch Bend Wheel .................................................. 30

Sustain ................................................................... 30

Keyboard Percussion ............................................. 31

Auto Accompaniment 32

Using Auto Accompaniment (rhythm track only) .... 32

Using Auto Accompaniment (all tracks) ................. 33

Accompaniment Sections ...................................... 34

Tempo/Tap ............................................................. 36

Accompaniment Track Muting ................................ 37

Accompaniment Volume Control ............................ 37

Chord Fingerings ................................................... 38

Accompaniment Split Point .................................... 40

Synchro Stop ......................................................... 41

One Touch Setting ................................................. 42

The Multi Pads 43

Playing the Multi Pads ........................................... 43

Chord Match .......................................................... 43

Selecting a Multi Pad Bank .................................... 44

Turning Chord Match On/Off .................................. 44

Multi Pad Bank List ..................................... 45

Digital Effects 46

Reverb ................................................................... 46

Chorus ................................................................... 48

DSP ....................................................................... 49

System Effects and Insertion Effects ..................... 50

Harmony/Echo ....................................................... 50

Registration Memory 54

Registering the Panel Settings .............................. 55

Recalling the Registered Panel Settings ............... 55

Selecting a Registration Bank................................ 56

Naming the Registration Banks ............................. 56

Disk Operations 57

Using the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and

Floppy Disks ......................................... 58

Included Data Disk................................................. 59

Format ................................................................... 60

Save ....................................................................... 60

Load ....................................................................... 62

Song Copy ............................................................. 64

Delete .................................................................... 67

7

5

Contents

Disk Song Playback 68

Song Playback ....................................................... 68

Song Track Muting ................................................. 70

Song Volume Control ............................................. 70

Playing from a Specified Measure ......................... 71

Repeat Play (A-B Repeat) ..................................... 72

Song Transpose ..................................................... 73

Part Settings 74

Voice Change ........................................................ 75

Mixer ...................................................................... 76

Song Recording 78

Quick Recording .................................................... 80

Multi Track Recording ............................................ 82

Re-recording — Punch In/Out and Start Measure . 84

Quantize ................................................................ 86

Editing Setup Data ................................................. 88

Naming User Songs............................................... 90

Clearing User Song Data ....................................... 91

Multi Pad Recording 92

Multi Pad Recording............................................... 92

Chord Match .......................................................... 94

Naming User Pads ................................................. 94

Clearing User Pad Data ......................................... 95

Style Recording 96

Style Recording — Rhythm Track .......................... 98

Style Recording —

Bass/Phrase/Pad/Chord Tracks...................... 100

Quantize .............................................................. 102

Naming User Styles ............................................. 104

Clearing User Style Data ..................................... 104

MIDI Functions 106

What’s MIDI? ....................................................... 106

What You Can Do With MIDI ................................ 108

MIDI Data Compatibility ....................................... 109

Connecting to a Personal Computer .................... 110

MIDI Template ...................................................... 112

MIDI Transmit Setting ........................................... 114

MIDI Receive Setting ........................................... 115

Local Control........................................................ 116

Clock .................................................................... 116

Initial Data Send .................................................. 117

Other Functions (Utility) 118

Metronome........................................................... 118

Upper Octave ....................................................... 119

Master Tuning ...................................................... 119

Scale Tuning ........................................................ 119

Split Point ............................................................. 120

Touch Sensitivity .................................................. 120

Voice Set.............................................................. 120

Footswitch ............................................................ 121

Pitch Bend Range ................................................ 122

Assignable ........................................................... 122

Backlight .............................................................. 122

Appendix 123

Voice List ............................................................. 123

Panel Voice List ........................................ 123

XG Voice List ............................................ 125

Drum Kit List ........................................................ 128

Style List .............................................................. 130

Music Database List ............................................ 131

About the Digital Effects (Reverb/Chorus/DSP)... 132

Reverb Type List ....................................... 133

Chorus Type List ....................................... 133

DSP Type List ........................................... 133

Harmony/Echo Type List ...................................... 134

Troubleshooting ................................................... 135

Data Backup & Initialization ................................. 136

Alert Message List ............................................... 137

MIDI Data Format ................................................ 139

MIDI Implementation Chart .................................. 151

Index .................................................................... 153

Specifications....................................................... 156

8

6

Important Features

Since the PSR-550 has such a wealth of advanced features and functions, you may be at a loss as to how to

explore its capabilities and how to best use them for your music. You needn’t worry. The PSR-550 is very easy

to play and use, and each function — no matter how advanced — can be mastered easily.

That’s what this section is designed for. It will help you master the PSR-550. It introduces you to the important

features of the PSR-550 with short explanations and page references. Read through the features you’re

interested in, then turn to the relevant pages in the manual for instructions and other details.

Basic operations

• The PSR-550 is packed with

sophisticated feature and

functions, yet it’s also exceptionally

easy to use. Using the panel controls is quick,

easy and intuitive — thanks to the Easy navigator

feature, which indicates the buttons you should

press, and the special backlit LCD, which changes

color according to the selected mode. (→ Pages

16, 18)

• A convenient Direct Access function lets you

instantly call up the specific menu or display you

need. (→ Page 21)

Auto accompaniment (styles)

• The auto accompaniment feature puts a full backing band

at your fingertips, with a total of 112 styles (rhythm and

accompaniment patterns). (→ Page 32)

• The One Touch Setting feature lets you instantly call up

the appropriate voice, effect and other settings for the

selected accompaniment style — with the touch of a

single button. (→ Page 42)

• You can also create your original accompaniment styles

by recording them directly from the keyboard. (→ Page

96)

Music Database

• The PSR-550’s built-in Music Database gives you a

convenient way to automatically select the style, voice,

and effect settings that best suit a particular type of music.

If you don’t know which style or voice would be appropri-

ate, the Music Database can help you out. (→ Page 14)

Multi Pads

• By simply pressing one of the Multi Pads, you can play

short rhythmic or melodic phrases. (→ Page 43)

• You can also create your original Multi Pad phrases by

recording them directly from the keyboard. (→ Page 92)

Registration Memory

• The convenient Registration Memory feature lets you save

virtually all panel settings to one of 128 Registration

Memory settings, and then instantly recall all your custom

panel settings by pressing a single button. (→ Page 54)

Song Recording

• Use the powerful song recording features create your own

complete, fully orchestrated compositions and save them

floppy disk as a User song. Each User song lets you

record up to sixteen independent tracks. (→ Page 78)

* To quickly and easily mold your musical ideas into

complete songs, use the Quick Recording method. (→

Page 80)

* To build up a song part-by-part and track-by-track, use

the Multi Track Recording method. (→ Page 82)

* You can also “fine tune” the recorded song data with the

PSR-550’s comprehensive song editing functions. (→

Pages 84-91)

Listening to the PSR-550

• The PSR-550 features a wide

variety of songs in various

musical genres. (→ Page 15)

• In addition, 10 songs are provided in

the included disk. (→ Page 59)

• The powerful auto accompaniment function gives

you a total of 112 styles (rhythm and accompani-

ment patterns), providing professional sounding

backing parts for your performance.

(→ Page 112)

•

Special Multi Pads let you instantly and easily play short

rhythmic and melodic sequences for adding impact and

variety to your performance. (→ Page 43)

Playing the PSR-550

• The PSR-550 keyboard has 61

keys with full touch-response

capability that lets you play with

extraordinary expressiveness and dynamic control.

(→ Page 26)

• The PSR-550 lets you perform with a huge variety

of musical instrument voices. (→ Page 26)

There are two different types of voices: panel

voices (the original PSR-550voices) and XG

voices.

* The PSR-550 features 219 panel voices, 14 drum kits

and 480 XG voices

• With the R1, R2 and L voices, you can play two

different voices in a layer, and even play two

different voices with your right and left hands.

(→ Pages 27, 28)

9

7

Important Features

GM System Level 1

“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard

which guarantees that any data conforming to the standard will

play accurately on any GM-compatible tone generator or

synthesizer from any manufacturer.

XG

XG is a new Yamaha MIDI specification which significantly

expands and improves on the GM System Level 1 standard

with greater voice handling capacity, expressive control and

effect capability while retaining full compatibility with GM.

By using the PSR-550’s XG voices, it is possible to record

XG-compatible song files.

DOC

The DOC voice allocation format provides data playback

compatibility with a wide range of Yamaha instruments and

MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series.

Style File Format

The Style File Format — SFF — is Yamaha’s original style

file format which uses a unique conversion system to provide

high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range

of chord types. The PSR-550 uses the SFF internally, reads

optional SFF style disks, and creates SFF styles using the

Style Recording feature.

Digital Effects

• A comprehensive set of professional-sounding digital

effects are built into the PSR-550, letting you enhance the

sound of your performance in a wide variety of ways.

These include Reverb, Chorus, DSP and Harmony/Echo.

(→ Page 46)

* Reverb recreates the rich spacial ambiance of various

performance environments, such as a concert hall or a

night club. (→ Page 46)

* Chorus enriches the voices by making them sound

warmer and thicker — as if several instruments were

playing together at the same time. (→ Page 48)

* The DSP effects let you process the sound in special,

unusual ways — such as applying distortion or tremolo

to a specific part. (→ Page 49)

* Harmony/Echo lets you enhance your right-hand

melodies with a variety of harmony and echo effects.

(→ Page 50)

Disk Drive

• The PSR-550 also features a built-in disk drive that lets

you save all your important original data (such as User

songs, User styles, User Multi Pads, Registration Memory,

etc.) to floppy disk for future recall. (→ Page 57)

MIDI

• MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a worldwide

standard interface that allows various electronic music

instruments, computers and other devices to communi-

cate with each other. The MIDI features let you

seamlessly integrate the PSR-550 into a variety of

systems and applications:

* Play other instruments from the PSR-550. (→ Page

108)

* Play the sounds of the PSR-550 (including the auto

accompaniment) from a connected keyboard. (→ Page

108)

* Connect the PSR-550 directly to a computer, for

advanced recording, editing and playing back of song

data. (→ Page 110)

* Use pre-programmed templates to instantly configure

the PSR-550 for your specific MIDI system/application.

(→ Page 112)

Panel logos

The logos printed on the PSR-550 panel indicate standards/

formats it supports and special features it includes.

Music stand

The PSR-550 is supplied with a music stand that can be attached

to the instrument by inserting it into the slot at the rear of the

control panel.

10

8

Panel Controls and Terminals

C1

CLICK

36 T37 S39

F1

41

R

G1

43

L

D2

50

M

E2

52

H

42 44

A1

45

L

B1

47

M

C2

48

H51

F2

L53

G2

H5554 56

A2

57

L

D3

62

H

B2

59

M

L

C3

60

M

H

58 61

C

1

A3

69

C

2

63

R

1

B3

71

R

2

E3

64

F3

65

R66

G3

67

S68 70

C4

72

H73

L

D4

74 75

H

E4

76

L

F4

77

H78

L

G4

79

H80

L

A4

81 82

B4

83

H

C5

84

L85

S87

D5

86

L

E5

88

H

F5

89

L M 90

G5

O91 92

D1

38

E1

40 46 49

CHORD

dim

mM6

7

augsus4

119

513

1

REC

2

REC

3

REC

4

REC

5

REC

6

REC

7

REC

8

REC

9

REC

10

REC

11

REC

12

REC

13

REC

14

REC

15

REC

16

REC

TRANSPOSE REGIST-

RATION TEMPO MEASURE BEAT

BACK NEXT

KEYBOARDSTART/STOP

/YES

TRACK(1~16)

PAR T DIAL

0~9

MUSIC DATABASE

SONG

STYLE

VOICE LR12

EASY

NAVIGATOR

001 Grand Piano

DSP(FAST)

SUSTAIN HARMONY

TOUCH

qe

#3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9

!4

!3

!2

!5 !6 !7 !8 !9 @0

$0

yi

u

r

o!0

!1

t

w

@1 @2 @3 @4 @5 @6

@7

@8

#0

@9

#1 #2

$1 $2

$4

$3

$7 $8 $9 $6 $5 %0

■ PHONES/OUTPUT jack

A standard pair of stereo headphones can be

plugged in here for private practice or late-night

playing. The internal stereo speaker system is

automatically shut off when a pair of head phones is

plugged into the PHONES/OUTPUT jack.

Do not listen with the headphones at high volume

for long periods of time. Doing so may cause

hearing loss.

CAUTION

•Connect the PSR-550 to external equipment only after

turning off power for all devices. To prevent damage to

the speakers, set the volume of the external devices at

the minimum setting before connecting them. Failure to

observe these cautions may result in electric shock or

equipment damage.

■ FOOTSWITCH jack

The sustain function lets you produce a natural

sustain as you play by pressing a footswitch. Plug

an optional Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitch into

this jack and use it to switch sustain on and off.

The footswitch connected to this jack can also be

set to replicate the functions of some panel buttons,

doing things like starting and stopping accompani-

ment (page 121).

•Be sure that you do not press the footswitch while turning the power

on. If you do, the ON/OFF status of the footswitch will be reversed.

•When the sustain or sostenuto pedal functions are being used

(page 121), some voices may sound continuously or have a long

decay after the notes have been released while the pedal is held.

11

9

Top Panel Controls

qSTANDBY/ON switch .................................13

wMASTER VOLUME control ........................13

eDEMO button .......................................13, 17

rRECORD button.................17, 25, 78, 92, 96

tDIRECT ACCESS button .....................21, 24

yDSP button.................................................49

uFAST/SLOW button ...................................49

iTOUCH button .........................................120

oSUSTAIN button ......................................... 30

!0 HARMONY/ECHO button ..........................50

!1 BACK button, NEXT button ........................17

!2 LCD display ................................................ 16

!3 VOICE CHANGE button.......................17, 75

MIXER button.......................................17, 76

!4 TRACK 1 - 16 buttons .......................... 37, 70

!5 SONG button..................................17, 25, 68

!6 STYLE button.................................17, 25, 32

!7 MUSIC DATABASE button ...................14, 17

!8 VOICE L button ....................................17, 28

!9 VOICE R1 button ................................. 17, 26

@0 VOICE R2 button ................................. 17, 27

@1 ACMP ON/OFF button .........................25, 33

@2 ACMP/SONG VOLUME button ...... 17, 37, 70

@3 TEMPO/TAP button .............................. 17, 36

@4 TRANSPOSE button ............................ 17, 30

@5 FUNCTION button..............................17, 118

@6 PART ON/OFF

VOICE L button .....................................28

VOICE R1 button .................................. 26

VOICE R2 button .................................. 27

@7 Number buttons

[1]-[0], [-/NO], [+/YES] ........................... 20

@8 EXIT button ................................................17

@9 Data dial ..................................................... 20

#0 DISK LOAD button ............................... 17, 62

#1 DISK SAVE button ...............................17, 60

#2 DISK UTILITY button .....................17, 64, 67

#3 SYNC STOP button ................................... 41

#4 SYNC START button .................................. 33

#5 START/STOP button ............................32, 69

#6 INTRO button ............................................. 34

#7 MAIN/AUTO FILL A button ......................... 34

#8 MAIN/AUTO FILL B button ......................... 34

#9 ENDING/rit. button .....................................34

$0 REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons ........... 54

$1 ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons ................42

$2 MULTI PAD buttons .................................... 43

$3 Disk Drive...................................................58

$4 PITCH BEND wheel ................................... 30

Panel Controls and Terminals

Rear Panel Controls

$5 PHONES/OUTPUT jack.............................10

$6 FOOTSWITCH jack .................................... 10

$7 TO HOST connector ................................ 107

$8 HOST SELECT switch .............................110

$9 MIDI IN/OUT connectors..........................107

%0 DC IN 10-12V jack .....................................12

A5

93 94

B5

95

C6

96

12

10

Setting Up

This section contains information about setting up your PSR-550 and preparing to play.

Be sure to go through this section carefully before turning the power on.

CAUTION

•Never interrupt the power

supply (e.g. remove the

batteries or unplug the AC

adaptor) during any PSR-550

record operation! Doing so

can result in a loss of data.

Power supply connections

Although the PSR-550 will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of the

more environmentally safe AC adaptor. Follow the instructions below according to the power source you intend

to use.

■ Using An Optional AC Power Adaptor

WARNING

•Use ONLY a Yamaha PA-6 AC

Power Adaptor (or other

adaptor specifically recom-

mended by Yamaha) to power

your instrument from the AC

mains. The use of other

adaptors may result in

irreparable damage to both

the adaptor and the PSR-550.

•Unplug the AC Power Adaptor

when not using the PSR-550,

or during electrical storms.

■ Using Batteries

For battery operation the PSR-550 requires six 1.5V “D” size, R20P (LR20) or

equivalent batteries. When the batteries need to be replaced, “Battery Low” may

appear on top of the display, the volume may be reduced, the sound may be

distorted, and other problems may occur. When this happens, turn the power off

and replace the batteries.

Replace the batteries as follows:

CAUTION

•When the batteries run down,

replace them with a complete

set of six new batteries.

NEVER mix old and new

batteries.

•Do not use different kinds of

batteries (e.g. alkaline and

manganese) at the same time.

•If the instrument is not to be

in use for a long time, remove

the batteries from it, in order

to prevent possible fluid

leakage from the battery.

•Plugging or unplugging the

AC power adaptor while the

batteries are installed will

reset the PSR-550 to the

defaults.

3

Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet.

When turning the power OFF, simply reverse

the procedure.

1

Open the battery compartment

cover located on the instrument’s

bottom panel.

2

Insert the six new batteries, being

careful to follow the polarity

markings on the inside of the

compartment.

3

Replace the compartment cover,

making sure that it locks firmly in

place.

1

Make sure that the STANDBY/ON switch

of the PSR-550 is set to STANDBY.

2

Connect the AC adaptor (PA-6 or other

adaptor specifically recommended by

Yamaha) to the power supply jack.

Important Notes on Battery Use

•Since the PSR-550 consumes a considerable amount of power,

Yamaha recommends the use of an AC power adaptor rather than

batteries. The batteries should be considered an auxiliary power

source for data backup.

•The floppy disk drive, in particular, uses a large amount of power, so

it is important to always use an AC power adaptor when performing

disk-intensive operations such as song recording/playback or data

load/save. If you attempt to use battery power for these operations

and the batteries do fail, you will lose not only the data you’re

recording or saving, but also other data in internal memory including

user styles, user pads, registration memory, etc.

•Taking the above precautions into consideration, always use an AC

power adaptor when using the PSR-550 for an important perfor-

mance or when creating important data.

13

11

Demo Song Playback

Once you’ve set up your PSR-550, try listening to the pre-programmed demonstration songs. A total of 9

demo songs are provided. As the song plays back, the backlit LCD of the PSR-550 changes color.

CAUTION

•Even when the switch is in

the “STANDBY” position,

electricity is still flowing to

the instrument at the

minimum level. When you

are not using the PSR-550

for a long time, make sure

you unplug the AC power

adaptor from the wall AC

outlet, and/or remove the

batteries from the

instrument.

2

Press the [DEMO] button to start demo playback.

•If you play the PSR-550 with

the volume at its maximum

level when the batteries are

used, the life of the batteries

will be shorter.

3

Set a volume level with the [MASTER VOLUME] control.

4

Skip to the beginning of a different demo song.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the number buttons

[1]-[0].

5

Press the [DEMO] button again to stop the demo song.

1

Turn the power ON by pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch.

Press the [STANDBY/ON] switch again to turn the power OFF.

CHORD

dim

mM

6

7

augsus4

119

513

1

REC

2

REC

3

REC

4

REC

5

REC

6

REC

7

REC

8

REC

9

REC

10

REC

11

REC

12

REC

13

REC

14

REC

15

REC

16

REC

TRANSPOSE REGIST-

RATION TEMPO MEASURE BEAT

BACK NEXT

KEYBOARD

START/STOP

/YES

TRACK(1~16)

PART DIAL

0~9

SONG

STYLE

VOICE LR12

EASY

NAVIGATOR

001 Grand Piano

DSP(FAST)

SUSTAIN HARMONY

TOUCH

MUSIC DATABASE

1 Sweet Tenor

2 SweetTrumpet

•The LCD changes color

during Demo song playback

only if the Backlight mode is

set to “Auto” (page 122).

14

Using the Music Database

If you want to play in a certain genre of music but don’t know which style (page 32) and voice (page 26)

settings would be appropriate, simply select the desired genre from the Music Database. The PSR-550

automatically makes all appropriate panel settings to let you play in that music style!

2

Select a ‘‘Music Database.’’

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the number buttons

[1]-[0].

1

Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.

The MUSIC DATABASE menu appears in the display.

CHORD

dim

mM

6

7

augsus4

119

513

BEAT

BACK NEXT

KEYBOARDSTART/STOP

/YES

TRACK(1~16)

PART DIAL

0~9

M

U

S

IC DA

T

A

B

A

S

E

SONG

STYLE

VOICE LR12

EASY

NAVIGATOR

001 Alive Fever

CHORD

dim

mM6

7augsus4

119

513

BEAT

BACK NEXT

KEYBOARDSTART/STOP /YES

TRACK(1~16)

PART DIAL

0~9

M

U

S

IC DA

T

A

B

A

S

E

SONG

STYLE

VOICE LR12

EASY

NAVIGATOR

002 Alive Synth

•Press the [MUSIC

DATABASE] button to switch

into the Style mode, turn

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

on, and turn SYNCHRO-

NIZED START on. See page

25 for details.

•See pages 32 through 41 for

details about the Auto

Accompaniment.

The PSR-550 has 220 panel setups in the Music Database and they are divided

into eleven different categories. You can select different Music Database

categories in succession by using the Direct Access function.

To select the first Music Database of the next available category, first press the

[DIRECT ACCESS] button, then press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.

See page 21 for details about the Direct Access function.

In this example, we’ll select #220 “Xmas Night” and play the song “Silent

Night.” (The sheet music is provided on the next page.)

3

Play the chords with your left hand and the melody lines with

your right hand along with the music.

As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto accompaniment

starts.

For information on how to enter chords, see ‘‘Chord Fingerings’’ on page 38.

220 Xmas Night

Direct Access

029 Days of Sax

POP HITS

001 Alive Fever

002 Alive Synth

003 Croco Rock

028 YesterGuitar

SWING & JAZZ

029 Days of Sax

056 Wonderland

EVERGREEN

057 Black Forest

086 Wonder World

Music Database List

(page 131)

12

15

Using the Music Database

Data stored by the Music Database

Each of the Music Database settings has been specially programmed to match the selected style and each

features the best suited voice (or combination of voices), style, and other settings for that style. Pressing the

[MUSIC DATABASE] button and selecting a style lets you instantly reconfigure all relevant settings, conve-

niently allowing you to start playing in the desired genre with all the appropriate sounds — without having to

make each setting one by one. For each parameter, refer to the following pages.

■ VOICE PARAMETERS

• Part on/off (Voice R1/R2/L) ....................................................................... page 29

• Voice change setting (Voice R1/R2/L) ....................................................... page 75

• Mixer setting (Voice R1/R2/L) .................................................................... page 76

• DSP on/off, FIRST/SLOW on/off, DSP Type and Return Level ................. page 49

• HARMONY/ECHO on/off, type, volume, part ............................................ page 50

• Pitch Bend Range ................................................................................... page 122

• Upper Octave setting............................................................................... page 119

■ AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT PARAMETERS

• Auto accompaniment (ACMP) on/off ......................................................... page 33

• Synchro Start = ON* ................................................................................. page 33

• Style Number............................................................................................. page 32

• Main A/B section ....................................................................................... page 34

• Tempo ........................................................................................................ page 36

• Accompaniment Volume ............................................................................ page 37

• Track on/off ................................................................................................ page 37

• Voice Change setting................................................................................. page 75

• Mixer setting .............................................................................................. page 75

• Multi Pad Bank number ............................................................................. page 43

• Reverb setting ........................................................................................... page 46

• Chorus setting ........................................................................................... page 48

* Set only when the accompaniment is not playing.

4

When you reach the point in the music indicated by the arrow

above, press the [ENDING] button.

When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment automatically stops.

Auto Accompaniment

section

13

16

14

Panel Display Indications

The PSR-550 features a large multi-function display that shows all important settings for the instrument.

This backlit LCD also changes color depending on the selected mode, making operation even easier and

more intuitive. For details about the LCD’s Backlight mode, see page 122.

The section below briefly explains the various icons and indications in the display.

q Menu/message display

This shows the menu for each function of the PSR-550.

It also displays the relevant messages for the current

operation.

See the “Basic Operation” section (page 17) for details

on the menu/message display.

w Menu indication

This indicates the items shown in the menu display, and

the button to be pressed. Refer to “Basic Operation”

(page 17) for details.

e Easy Navigator

This indicates the buttons to be pressed. Refer to

“Basic Operation” (page 18) for details.

r Transpose

Shows the current transpose value (page 30).

t Registration bank-number

Shows the current selected registartion memory bank

and number (page 56).

y Tempo

Shows the current tempo of accompaniment/song

playback (page 36).

u Measure

Indicates the current

measure number during

song recording and

playback.

i Beat indicators

Flashes at the current tempo and indicates the current

beat during accompaniment and song playback.

o DSP (FAST)

“DSP” appears when the DSP effect is turned on (page

49).

“FAST” appears when the DSP FAST/SLOW effect is

turned on (page 49).

!0 TOUCH

Appears when the touch sensitivity is turned on (page

120).

!1 SUSTAIN

Appears when the sustain is turned on (page 30).

!2 HARMONY

Appears when the HARMONY effect is turned on

(page 50).

!3 Chord

Displays the current chord

name during AUTO ACCOM-

PANIMENT playback or

SONG recording/playback

(page 33).

!4 Song tracks / Accompaniment tracks

• In the Song mode (page 25) and the Demo Song

mode (page 15):

The icons of all tracks indicate the on/off status and

volume/velocity settimgs.

• In the Style mode (page 25):

The icons of tracks 9 - 16 indicate the on/off status

and volume/velocity settings for each of the eight

accompaniment tracks.

• In the Record mode (page 25):

The icons of all tracks indicate the on/off status and

volume/velocity settimgs. The “REC” marks

indicate the recording status.

Cm

Chord typeRoot

4/4 time 3/4 time

1st beat

2nd beat

3rd beat

4th beat

•If the power is left on

and the PSR-550

remains untouched for

three minutes or

longer, the LCD will

change color every

three seconds (when

Backlight mode is set

to “Auto”).

CHORD

dim

mM

6

7

augsus4

119

513

1

REC

2

REC

3

REC

4

REC

5

REC

6

REC

7

REC

8

REC

9

REC

10

REC

11

REC

12

REC

13

REC

14

REC

15

REC

16

REC

TRANSPOSE REGIST-

RATION TEMPO MEASURE BEAT

BACK NEXT

KEYBOARD

START/STOP /YES

TRACK(1~16)

PART DIAL

0~9

SONG

STYLE

VOICE LR12

EASY

NAVIGATOR

001 Grand Piano

DSP(FAST)

SUSTAIN HARMONY

TOUCH

M

USIC DATABASE

q Menu/message display

w Menu

indication

e Easy Navigator

o DSP (FAST)

!0 TOUCH

!1 SUSTAIN

!2 HARMONY

r Transpose

t Registration bank

and number

y Tempo u Measure i Beat indicators

!3 Chord

!4 Song tracks /

Accompaniment

tracks

17

15

Basic Operation

This section introduces you to the basic operations common to the various functions of the PSR-550.

In particular, you’ll learn how to use the menu/message display at the center of the front panel.

• Calling up the Operation Displays ..................................................................... page 17

• How to read the Menu/message display and the “Easy Navigator”................... page 18

• Menu Selection .................................................................................................. page 19

• Changing (Editing) Values ................................................................................. page 20

• Naming .............................................................................................................. page 21

• Direct Access..................................................................................................... page 21

Calling up the Operation Displays

Press the buttons listed below in order to call up the appropriate displays for the

various functions of the PSR-550.

Pressing one of these buttons instantly calls up the relevant display for the selected

function.

See the function tree chart for details (page 22).

If you’ve selected several different functions’ displays in succession, you can “retrace

your steps” and revisit each display by using the [BACK] and [NEXT] buttons at the

left side of the display. Of course you can also directly select the desired displays by

pressing the appropriate buttons (as listed above).

• DEMO button ...................................................... page 13

• RECORD button ............................. pages 25, 78, 92, 96

• SONG button ...................................................... page 25

• STYLE button.............................................. pages 25, 32

• MUSIC DATABASE button .................................. page 14

• VOICE L button ................................................... page 28

• VOICE R1 button ................................................ page 26

• VOICE R2 button ................................................ page 27

• VOICE CHANGE button...................................... page 75

• MIXER button...................................................... page 76

• ACMP/SONG VOL button ........................... pages 37, 70

• TEMPO/TAP button ............................................. page 36

• TRANSPOSE button ........................................... page 30

• FUNCTION button ............................................ page 118

• DISK LOAD button ............................................. page 62

• DISK SAVE button ............................................. page 60

• DISK UTILITY button ................................. pages 64, 67

How to leave the current display

As shown in the function tree chart (page 22), there is a wide varierty of functions on

the PSR-550, each with its own corresponding display. In order to leave the display of

each function press the [EXIT] button.

Since the PSR-550 has so many different displays, you may occasionally find yourself

confused as to which operation’s display is currently shown. If this happens, you can

return to “home base” by pressing the [EXIT] button several times. This returns the

PSR-550 to the default display — the same display that appears when the power is

turned on.

18

16

How to Read the Menu/Message Display and “Easy Navigator”

Depending on the selected function or operation, the PSR-550 shows a variety of

displays and indications. Included in these are “Easy Navigator” messages that guide

you through the various operations.

Let’s take a look at some examples:

● Voice

● Style

● Song

Basic Operation

CHORD

dim

mM

6

7

augsus4

119

513

BACK NEXT

KEYBOARD

START/STOP

/YES

TRACK(1~16)

PART DIAL

0~9

SONG

STYLE

VOICE LR12

EASY

NAVIGATOR

001 Grand Piano

MUSIC DATABASE

Press the [VOICE R1] button.

CHORD

dim

mM

6

7

augsus4

119

513

BACK NEXT

KEYBOARD

START/STOP

/YES

TRACK(1~16)

PART DIAL

0~9

SONG

STYLE

VOICE LR12

EASY

NAVIGATOR

001 8Beat 1

MUSIC DATABASE

Press the [STYLE] button.

This message means: “The current style (8Beat 1) is

shown at top. You can change this style by using the

data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the

number buttons [1]-[0].”

This message also means: “You can

start the accompaniment by pressing

the [START/STOP] button.”

CHORD

dim

mM

6

7

augsus4

119

513

BACK NEXT

KEYBOARD

START/STOP

/YES

TRACK(1~16)

PART DIAL

0~9

SONG

STYLE

VOICE LR12

EASY

NAVIGATOR

001 CLUB XG

_

MUSIC DATABASE

Insert the included data disk

into the disk drive.

This message means: “The current song (CLUB_XG)

is shown at top. You can change this song by using the

data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the

number buttons [1]-[0].”

This message also means: “You can

start the current song by pressing the

[START/STOP] button.”

This message means: “The current voice for voice R1

(Grand Piano) is shown at top. You can change this

voice by using the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the

[-/NO] button or the number buttons [1]-[0].”

19

17

● Disk

Menu Selection

For certain operations on the PSR-550 (such as selecting voices, demo songs and

styles), you’ll need to select different menus in the display.

For example, the display below (for selecting the function) appears when you press the

[FUNCTION] button.

In this case you can select the function by turning the data dial, or move the cursor by

pressing the [+/YES]/[-/NO] buttons.

The display below (for selecting voices) appears when you press the [VOICE R1]

button.

In this case you can also select the voice by using the data dial or the [+/YES]/[-/NO]

buttons as above; you can also input the voice number directly by using the number

buttons [1]-[0] (see the next page).

Basic Operation

CHORD

dim

mM

6

7

augsus4

119

513

BACK NEXT

KEYBOARD

START/STOP

/YES

TRACK(1~16)

PART DIAL

0~9

SONG

STYLE

VOICE LR12

EASY

NAVIGATOR

F1 Multi Pad

MUSIC DATABASE

CHORD

dim

mM

6

7

augsus4

119

513

BACK NEXT

KEYBOARD

START/STOP

/YES

TRACK(1~16)

PART DIAL

0~9

SONG

STYLE

VOICE LR12

EASY

NAVIGATOR

001 Grand Piano

MUSIC DATABASE

CHORD

dim

mM

6

7

augsus4

119

513

BACK NEXT

KEYBOARD

START/STOP

/YES

TRACK(1~16)

PART DIAL

0~9

SONG

STYLE

VOICE LR12

EASY

NAVIGATOR

F1 Multi Pad

CHORD

dim

mM

6

7

augsus4

119

513

BACK NEXT

KEYBOARD

START/STOP

/YES

TRACK(1~16)

PART DIAL

0~9

SONG

STYLE

VOICE LR12

EASY

NAVIGATOR

F2 Regist Memory

CHORD

dim

mM

6

7

augsus4

119

513

BACK NEXT

KEYBOARDSTART/STOP

/YES

TRACK(1~16)

PART DIAL

0~9

SONG

STYLE

VOICE LR12

EASY

NAVIGATOR

F3 DigitalEffect

MUSIC DATABASE

MUSIC DATABASE

MUSIC DATABASE

[+/YES] button [-/NO] button

CHORD

dim

mM6

7

augsus4

119

513 BACK NEXT

KEYBOARD

START/STOP /YES

TRACK(1~16)

PART DIAL

0~9

SONG

STYLE

VOICE LR12

EASY

NAVIGATOR

Format OK?

MUSIC DATABASE

This message means: “Press the [+/YES] button to

execute the Format operation.”

Insert an unformatted

disk into the disk drive.

[+/YES] button [-/NO] button

[+/YES] button [-/NO] button

20

18

Changing (Editing) Values

This section shows you how to set numeric values on the PSR-550, such as voice

number, song/style number and various parameters. Input the values by using the

number buttons [1]-[0] or the [+/YES]/[-/NO] buttons.

Numeric entry

•One- or two-digit numbers

can also be entered without

leading zeroes.

To select number “12”, for

example, simply press the [1]

button and then the [2]

button. The bars below the

number on the display will

flash for a few seconds, and

then disappear when the

selected number has been

recognized by the PSR-550.

• Entering three-digit numbers

The number buttons can be used to directly enter the number of the desired voice,

thereby immediately selecting that voice without having to step through a number of

other voices. To select number 106, for example, press the [1], [0] and [6] number

buttons in sequence.

Basic Operation

• Entering one- or two-digit numbers

One- or two-digit voice numbers can be entered with leading zeroes: e.g. “12” can be

entered as “012” by pressing the [0], [1] and [2] buttons in sequence.

Rotating the data dial

to the right (clockwise)

increases the value,

while rotating it to the

left (counter-clock-

wise) decreases it.

Number buttons [1]-[0]

described below.

Pressing the [+/YES] button increases the displayed

value by 1. Pressing the [-/NO] button decreases the

displayed value by 1. Pressing and holding either button

causes a continuous increase and decrease.

For items that have initial default values, pressing the [+/

YES] and the [-/NO] buttons together at the same time

will return the setting to the initial value.

The explanations here apply only to numbers that have a maximum of three digits,

such as those for voices and styles.

21

19

Naming

The allows you to create your own original data such as songs, styles and registration

memory settings. You can also freely name the data as desired.

The following data types can be named.

To enter an original name, use the keyboard.

Direct Access

By using the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, you can instantly call up the desired display.

For example, pressing the [DIRECT ACCESS] button and press the

[REGISTRARTION MEMORY] button automatically selects the display for input-

ting the Registration Memory bank name.

See page 24 for the Direct Access Chart.

• Disk files (User songs, etc) ............................... pages 61, 65, 66, 90

• User Styles ......................................................................... page 104

• User Pad banks .................................................................... page 94

• Registration Memory banks .................................................. page 56

The example display below appears when naming a song on a floppy disk (page 90).

Basic Operation

Entering a character Each key on the keyboard enters a different character, as

marked directly above the key.

Moving the cursor The A#5 and B5 keys move the cursor backward and

forward within the file name.

Entering a lower-case character The C1 key functions as a shift key that shifts between

lower- and upper-case characters: hold the Shift key

while pressing a character key to enter the lower-case

character.

Delete The Delete key (C6) deletes the character at the cursor

position.

Letters and charac-

ters are marked

above the corre-

sponding keys.

C1

–Nam=xxxxxxxx

Cursor

Direct Access

–RegName Regist01

•Lowercase letters cannot be

used for disk file names.

Cursor

22

20

Function Tree

Button Menu/message display Function See page

DEMO Sweet Tenor .................................... Demo song selection ........................................................................................ 13

VOICE R1 001 Grand Piano ............................ Voice R1 selection ............................................................................................ 26

VOICE R2 001 Grand Piano ............................ Voice R2 selection ............................................................................................ 27

VOICE L 001 Grand Piano ............................ Voice L selection .............................................................................................. 28

STYLE 001 8Beat 1 .................................... Accompaniment Style selection ........................................ 1 ................... 32

SONG 001 CLUB_XG................................ Song selection .................................................................................................. 68

SngMenu ........................................ Song menu selection........................................................................................ 69

PlayMode............................. Song play method selection .............................................. ...................... 69

Measure .............................. Song Measure from which to start playback .................................................... 71

AbRepeat ............................ Song repeat setting ........................................................... 2 ................... 72

S.Trans ................................ Song transpose setting ..................................................... 3 ................... 73

MUSIC DATABASE 001 Alive Fever ........................................................................................................................... 4 ................... 14

VOICE CHANGE R1=001 Grand Pno ........................ Voice selection of R1/R2/L/Style track/Song track ........................................... 75

MIXER Volume R1 ...................................... Volume adjustment of Voice R1/R2/L ................................ 5,6,7 ............. 76

Volume Ph1 .................................... Volume adjustment of the accompaniment track............... ...................... 76

Volume T01 .................................... Volume adjustment of the song track ................................ ...................... 76

Octave R1...................................... Octave setting of voice R1/R2/L ........................................ 8,9,10 ........... 77

Octave T01 .................................... Octave setting of song track ............................................................................. 77

Pan R1 .......................................... Pan setting of voice R1/R2/L ............................................................................ 77

Pan RhM ....................................... Pan setting of accompaniment track ................................................................ 77

Pan T01 ......................................... Pan setting of song track .................................................................................. 77

RevDepth R1 ................................. Reverb depth setting of voice R1/R2/L ............................. 27 ................. 77

RevDepth RhM .............................. Reverb depth setting of accompaniment track .................. 27 ................. 77

RevDepth T01 ............................... Reverb depth setting of song track .................................... 27 ................. 77

ChoDepth R1................................. Chorus depth setting of voice R1/R2/L ............................ 30 ................. 77

ChoDepth RhM.............................. Chorus depth setting of accompaniment track .................. 30 ................. 77

ChoDepth T01 ............................... Chorus depth setting of song track ................................... 30 ................. 77

DspDepth R1 ................................. DSP depth setting of voice R1/R2/L ................................. 33 ................. 77

DspDepth RhM .............................. DSP depth setting of accompaniment track ..................... 33 ................. 77

DspDepth T01 ............................... DSP depth setting of song track ....................................... 33 ................. 77

ACMP/SONG VOL Acmp Volume ................................. Accompaniment Volume setting ....................................................................... 37

Song Volume .................................. Song Volume setting ........................................................................................ 70

TRANSPOSE Transpose ....................................... Transpose setting ............................................................................................. 30

TEMPO/TAP Tempo ............................................. Tempo setting ................................................................................................... 36

DISK LOAD Ld ................................................... Loading data from a disk .................................................................................. 62

DISK SAVE Sv ................................................... Saving data to a disk ........................................................................................ 60

DISK UTILTY Menu

SongCopy ............................ Copying a song in a disk .................................................................................. 64

Delete .................................. Deleting a file in a disk ..................................................................................... 67

Format ................................. Formatting a disk ............................................................... 11 ................. 60

• The icon in the chart indicates that the relevant function or parameter can be called up via

the Direct Access function, and the numbers beside the icon correspond to the ones in the Direct

Access Chart on page 24. All functions indicated with this mark (other than Style selection,

Music Database selection, and Disk Format) can be user-assigned to the [+/YES] button, [-/NO]

button and the number buttons [1]-[0] — allowing you to instantly select the desired function/

parameter.

• When you call up the Mixer screens (other than Volume and Octave) via the Direct Access, the

previously edited part (page 74) will be displayed.

• Concerning 1 and 4, the screens that are called up actually are different from the ones

described at the left. See the Direct Access Chart on page 24.

23

21

Function Tree

Button Menu/message display Function See page

FUNCTION F1 Multi Pad

PBnk .................................. Multi pad bank selection .................................................... 12 ................. 44

CdMatch .............................. Chord match on/off setting ................................................ 13 ................. 43

F2 Regist Memory

RBnk .................................. Registration Memory bank selection ................................ 14 ................. 56

RegName ............................ Namimg Registration Memory bank ................................. 15 ................. 56

F3 DigitalEffect

Reverb

RevType .................... Reverb type selection ........................................................ 25 ................. 46

RevRetnLevel ........... Reverb return level setting ................................................ 26 ................. 47

Chorus

ChoType ................... Chorus type selction.......................................................... 28 ................. 48

ChoRetnLevel ........... Chorus return level setting ................................................ 29 ................. 48

Dsp

DspType .................... DSP type selection ............................................................ 16,31 ............ 49

DspRetnLevel ........... DSP return level setting..................................................... 32 ................. 49

Harmony

HTyp ......................... Harmony/Echo type selection ........................................... 17,34 ............ 50

Harmony Vol ............. Harmony /Echo volume setting ......................................... 24 ................. 52

HarmPart .................. Harmony part setting ......................................................... 35 ................. 53

F4 Midi

Template .............................. MIDI template vselection ................................................................................. 112

MidiTemplatLoad? .... Loading the selected MIDI template setting .................................................... 112

Transmit Ch ......................... MIDI transmit channel setting ............................................ ..................... 114

Recive Ch ............................ MIDI receive channel setting ............................................. ..................... 115

LocalContrl .......................... Local control on/off setting ................................................ ..................... 116

Clock .................................. External /Internal clock selection ...................................... ..................... 116

Init Send .............................. Initial data send ................................................................. ..................... 117

F5 Utility

Metronom ............................ Metronome on/off setting .................................................. 18 ................ 118

UpperOct ............................. Upper octave setting ......................................................... ..................... 119

Tuning .................................. Master tuning setting ......................................................... ..................... 119

SC.Tune ............................... Scale tuning setting ......................................................................................... 119

Template ................... Scale tuning template selection ...................................................................... 119

NoteEdit .................... Individual note tuning ........................................................ ..................... 119

Split .................................. Split point setting ............................................................... 19 ................ 120

Fingerng .............................. Fingering selection ............................................................ 20 ................. 38

TouchSns ............................. Touch sensitivity setting .................................................... 21 ................ 120

VoiceSet .............................. Voice set on/off setting ...................................................... 22 ................ 120

Pedal .................................. Selecting footswitch function ............................................. ..................... 121

PitchBnd .............................. Pitch bend range setting ................................................... ..................... 122

Assignbl ............................... Direct Access setting....................................................................................... 122

BackLigt ............................... LCD’s backlight color setting ............................................. 23 ................ 122

RECORD Song

QuickRec ............................. User Song Quick recording .............................................................................. 80

MultiRec .............................. User Song Multi track recording ....................................................................... 82

Punch In/Out............. Punch in/out setting.......................................................................................... 84

RecStart Mes ............ Measure from which to start playback.............................................................. 84

Edit

Quantize ................... Quantize ........................................................................................................... 86

Setup Dt.................... Setup data editing ............................................................................................ 88

Name ........................ Naming User Songs ......................................................................................... 90

Clear ......................... Clearing user song data ................................................................................... 91

Style

Record ................................. User Style recording ......................................................................................... 96

Edit

Quantize ................... Quantize .......................................................................................................... 102

Name ........................ Namimg User Styles ...................................................................................... 104

Clear ......................... Clearing user style data .................................................................................. 104

MultiPad

Record ................................. User Pad recording .......................................................................................... 92

Edit

ChdMatch ................. Chord match on/off setting ............................................................................... 94

Name ........................ Naming user pads ............................................................................................ 94

Clear ......................... Clearing user pad data ..................................................................................... 95

24

22

Various functions other than ones listed above can be accessed by assigning them to the [+/YES]

button, [-/NO] button and the number buttons [1]-[0].

The functions listed above are default settings.

See the Function Tree on pages 22 and 23 for the available functions.

See page 122 about how to assign the available functions.

Function Tree number/function Operation: + button listed below

1 Next style category selection [STYLE]

2 Song repeat setting [SONG]*

3 Song transpose setting [TRANSPOSE]*

4 Next Music database category selection [MUSIC DATABASE]

5 Volume adjustment of Voice R1 [VOICE R1]

6 Volume adjustment of Voice R2 [VOICE R2]

7 Volume adjustment of Voice L [VOICE L]

8 Octave setting of Voice R1 PART ON/OFF [VOICE R1]

9 Octave setting of Voice R2 PART ON/OFF [VOICE R2]

10 Octave setting of Voice L PART ON/OFF [VOICE L]

11 Formatting a disk [UTILITY]

12 Multi pad bank selection MULTI PAD [STOP]

13 Chord match on/off setting MULTI PAD [1]~[4]

14 Registration Memory bank selecton REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]~[4]

15 Naming Registration Memory bank REGISTRATION MEMORY [MEMORY]

16 DSP type selection [DSP] or [FAST/TAP]

17 Harmony/Echo type selection [HARMONY]

18 Metoronome on/off setting [TEMPO/TAP]

19 Split point settiong [SONG/ACMP VOLUME]

20 Fingering selection [ACMP ON/OFF]

21 Touch sensitivity setting [TOUCH]

22 Voice set on/off setting [FUNCTION]

23 LCD’s backlight color setting [DEMO]

24 Harmony/Echo volume setting Number button [0]

25 Reverb type selection Number button [1]

26 Reverb return level setting Number button [2]

27 Reverb depth setting Number button [3]

28 Chorus type selection Number button [4]

29 Chorus return level setting Number button [5]

30 Chorus depth setting Number button [6]

31 DSP type selection Number button [7]

32 DSP return level setting Number button [8]

33 DSP depth setting Number button [9]

34 Harmony/Echo type selection Number button [-/NO]

35 Harmony part setting Number button [+/YES]

Direct Access Chart

* Available only in the Song mode.

25

23

Mode

Depending on the panel operation used, the PSR-550 has several fundamentally different conditions (or

methods of operation). Each of these condition is called a mode. This section explains the main modes

of the instrument.

Style Mode page 32

Song Mode page 68

Select this mode by pressing the [STYLE] button or the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.

(This is the default mode when the power is turned on.)

The Style mode is used for playing the full keyboard normally, and when using the auto

accompaniment.

Styles are the rhythm/accompaniment pattterns which are played by the auto accompani-

ment feature.

In the Style mode, the backlight color is set to blue as the factory default.

Select this mode by pressing the [SONG] button or inserting the disk that contains song

data into the disk drive.

The Song mode is used for playing the full keyboard normally, and for playing back the

songs.

In the Song mode, the backlight color is set to purple as the factory default.

●Auto accompaniment (ACMP) on/off

..............................................page 33

The [ACMP ON/OFF] button

switches on and off.

When auto accompaniment

is on, the left side of the

keyboard is used for playing/

indicating chords.

●Synchronized Start standby

(SYNC START) on/off ................. page 33

The [SYNC START] button

switches on and off.

When Synchronized Start

standby is on, the auto

accompaniment starts as

soon as you play a key on

the keyboard.

Record Mode

Select this mode by pressing the [RECORD] button.

In the Record mode you can record your own original performances and songs, create

original styles and Multi Pad phrases.

In the Record mode, the backlight color is set to red as the factory default.

●Pad record mode ........................ page 92

• Rehearsal mode (Sync Start off)

• Record (Synchronized Start) standby

• Recording

When Record (Synchronized Start) standby is on, the recording starts as soon as you play

a key on the keyboard.

Disk Mode page 57

Select this mode by pressing the [LOAD] button, [SAVE] button or the [UTILITY]

button.

In the Disk mode you can save and load important data.

In the Disk mode, no panel operations can be executed (except for disk operations).

In the Disk mode, the backlight color is set to blue as the factory default.

●Song record mode .....................page 78

• Rehearsal mode (Sync Start off)

• Record (Synchronized Start) standby

• Recording

●Style record mode ...................... page 96

• Rehearsal mode (Sync Start off)

• Record (Synchronized Start) standby

• Recording

BEAT

26

Playing Voices

The PSR-550 has a huge selection of various musical instrument voices which you can play. Try out the

different voices referring to the voice list at the end of this manual (page 123).

Select and play the voices of different musical instruments

• Selecting a Voice............................................................................................ page 26

• Keyboard Percussion ..................................................................................... page 31

Assign three different voices to the keyboard and play them

• Playing Two Voices (R1, R2) Simultaneously ................................................. page 27

• Playing Different Voices with the Left (L) and Right (R1, R2) Hands ............. page 28

• Functions of the Keyboard ............................................................................. page 29

Other voice-related functions

• Pitch Bend Wheel .......................................................................................... page 30

• Transpose....................................................................................................... page 30

• Sustain ........................................................................................................... page 30

• Touch Sensitivity .......................................................................................... page 120

Selecting a Voice

1

Press the [VOICE R1] button.

•The voice selected here is

called voice R1 (RIGHT 1).

See page 29 for more

information on voice R1.

2

Select a voice.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the number buttons

[1]-[0].

Refer to the Voice List (page 123).

3

Play the keyboard and adjust the volume.

CHORD

dim

mM

6

7

augsus4

119

513

1

REC

2

REC

3

REC

4

REC

5

REC

6

REC

7

REC

8

REC

9

REC

10

REC

11

REC

12

REC

13

REC

14

REC

15

REC

16

REC

TRANSPOSE REGIST-

RATION TEMPO MEASURE BEAT

BACK NEXT

KEYBOARD

START/STOP

/YES

TRACK(1~16)

PART DIAL

0~9

SONG

STYLE

VOICE LR12

EASY

NAVIGATOR

001 Grand Piano

DSP(FAST)

SUSTAIN HARMONY

TOUCH

MUSIC DATABASE

002 Bright Piano

24

27

Playing Two Voices (R1, R2) Simultaneously

1

Press the [PART ON/OFF VOICE R2] button.

Selecting a voice for VOICE R2

2

Select a voice.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the number buttons

[1]-[0].

Refer to the Voice List (page 123).

The voices available for selection here (VOICE R2) are the same as those

available for VOICE R1 (selected on page 26).

3

Play the voice.

2

Play the voices.

Two different voices are sounded simultaneously in a layer.

Voice R1 (RIGHT 1) is the first voice of the layer and is meant to be played

with the right hand. The second voice is called voice R2 (RIGHT 2) and is also

played with the right hand.

Playing Voices

1

Press the [VOICE R2] button.

098 Slow Strings

25

28

Playing Different Voices with the Left (L) and Right (R1, R2) Hands

1

Press the [PART ON/OFF VOICE L] button.

2

Play the voices.

The notes you play with your right and left hands sound two different voices.

•The point on the keyboard

that separates voice L and

voice R1 is called the “split

point” (page 29).

Voice R1 (RIGHT 1) is meant to be played with the right hand. Voice L

(LEFT) is played with the left hand.

Selecting a voice for VOICE L

2

Select a voice.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the number buttons

[1]-[0].

Refer to the Voice List (page 123).

The voices available for selection here (VOICE L) are the same as those

available for VOICE R1 (selected on page 26).

3

Play the voices.

Playing Voices

1

Press the [VOICE L] button.

Split Point

Voice L Voice R1

095 String Ensbl

Split Point

Voice L Voice R1

26

29

Split Point

Functions of the Keyboard

As explained above, the keyboard of the PSR-550 can sound three different voices. Here’s a short summary of the

various ways of playing voices.

● Playing a Single Voice

● Playing Two Voices

● Playing Separate Voices

with the Right and Left

Hands

In addition, the keyboard of the PSR-550 has other important functions besides playing voices (as shown below).

● Auto Accompaniment Section

When the auto accompaniment is set to on (page 33), the key range of voice L becomes the range for playing/

indicating chords.

● Naming

The keyboard can also be used to name song files on a floppy disk, User Styles,

User Pad banks and Registration Memory banks (page 21).

Playing Voices

The point on the keyboard that separates voice L and voice R1/R2 is called the “split

point”.

The split point is set to F#2 at the factory setting, however you can set this to any key

you wish. Refer to page 120 for instructions on setting the split point.

•Each key has a note name;

for example, the lowest

(farthest left) key on the

keyboard corresponds to C1,

and the highest (farthest

right) key to C6. (See below

for details.)

Each key has a note name; for example, the lowest (farthest left) key on the keyboard corresponds to C1, and the

highest (farthest right) key to C6.

Voice L

Split Point (F#2)

Voice R1/R2

Voice R1 + R2

Voice R1

Voice R1 + R2

Voice L

Voice R1

Voice L

C1

C1 - B1

D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1

C#1D#1F#1G#1A#1

C2 - B2 C3 - B3 C4 - B4 C5 - B5 C6

Auto accompaniment

section

Split Point

Voice R1/R2

27

30

Transpose

This function allows the overall pitch of the PSR-550 to be transposed up or down by a

maximum of one octave in semitone increments. The transpose range is from -12 to

+12.

•The Transpose function

cannot be applied when a

drum kit is the selected voice

(page 31).

•Press the [+/YES] and [-/NO]

buttons simultaneously to

instantly reset the transpose

value to “0”.

•The new TRANSPOSE value

will take effect from the next

key played.

•Minus values can be entered

by using the number buttons

while holding the [-/NO]

button.

1

Press the [TRANSPOSE] button.

2

Set the transposition.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the number buttons

[1]-[0].

Pitch Bend Wheel

Use the PSR-550 pitch bend wheel to bend notes up (roll the wheel away from you) or

down (roll the wheel toward you) while playing the keyboard. The pitch bend wheel is

self-centering and will automatically return to nornal pitch when released.

•The maximum pitch bend

range can be set via the

Pitch Bend Range function in

the Utility function group

(page 122).

Sustain

When the Sustain features is ON, all notes played on the keyboard have a longer

sustain. Press the [SUSTAIN] button to turn the SUSTAIN effect ON or OFF.

Playing Voices

Transpose = 0

Transpose = 4

DSP(FAST)

SUSTAIN HARMONY

TOUCH

28

31

Keyboard Percussion

1

Press the [VOICE R1] button.

2

Select “StandardKit1”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the number buttons

[1]-[0].

3

Play the voice.

Refer to the illustration below and the drum kit list at the end of the manual

(page 128).

The drum and percussion instrument sounds for the standard kit (Std.Kit1) are

indicated by symbols printed below the keys.

•The Transpose function

cannot be applied when a

drum kit is the selected voice

(page 30).

•Each key has a note name;

for example, the lowest

(farthest left) key on the

keyboard corresponds to C1,

and the highest (farthest

right) key to C6. (See page

29 for details.)

Playing Voices

220 StandardKit1

[Standard Kit 1]

Seq Click H

Bell Tree

Jingle Bell

Triangle Open

Cuica Open

Wood Block L

Wood Block H

Guiro Long

Samba Whistle L

Samba Whistle H

Cabasa

Agogo H

Timbale H

Conga L

Conga H Mute

Bongo H

Ride Cymbal 2

Crash Cymbal 2

Splash Cymbal

Ride Cymbal Cup

Chinese Cymbal

High Tom

Mid Tom H

Mid Tom L

Low Tom

Floor Tom H

Floor Tom L

Snare Tight

Snare

Kick

Kick Tight

Kick Soft

Snare Soft

Snare Roll

Brush Tap Swirl

Brush Swirl

Brush Tap

Shaker

Triangle Mute

Cuica Mute

Claves

Guiro Short

Maracas

Agogo L

Timbale L

Conga H Open

Bongo L

Vibraslap

Cowbell

Tambourine

Ride Cymbal 1

Crash Cymbal 1

Hi-Hat Open

Hi-Hat Pedal

Hi-Hat Closed

Hand Clap

Side Stick

Open Rim Shot

Sticks

Castanet

Brush Slap

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6

29

32

Auto Accompaniment

The auto accompaniment feature puts a full backing band at your fingertips. To use it, all you have to do

is play the chords with your left hand as you perform, and the selected accompaniment style matching

your music will automatically play along, instantly following the chords you play. With auto accompani-

ment, even a solo performer can enjoy playing with the backing of an entire band or orchestra.

The PSR-550 features a total of 112 styles or accompaniment patterns (style numbers 1 - 112) in a

variety of different musical genres. Try selecting some of the different styles (page 130) and play with the

auto accompaniment.

Two ways to playback the auto accompaniment

• Using Auto Accompaniment (rhythm track only) .......................................... page 32

• Using Auto Accompaniment (all tracks) ....................................................... page 33

Additional functions for getting the most out of the auto accompaniment

• Accompaniment Sections ............................................................................ page 34

• Tempo / Tap .................................................................................................. page 36

• Accompaniment Track Muting ...................................................................... page 37

• Accompaniment Volume Control .................................................................. page 37

Auto accompaniment functions related to your left hand chord playing

• Chord Fingerings ......................................................................................... page 38

• Accompaniment Split Point .......................................................................... page 40

• Synchro Stop ............................................................................................... page 41

Automatic one-touch selection of a variety of specially programmed panel

settings to match the auto accompaniment style

• One Touch Setting........................................................................................ page 42

Using Auto Accompaniment (rhythm track only)

1

Press the [STYLE] button.

2

Select a style.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the number buttons

[1]-[0].

Refer to the Style List (page 130).

3

Press the [START/STOP] button to start the rhythm tracks of

the auto accompaniment, minus the bass and chord tracks.

4

Press the [START/STOP] button again to stop the accompani-

ment.

002 8 Beat 2

CHORD

dim

mM

6

7

augsus4

119

513

BACK NEXT

KEYBOARD

START/STOP

/YES

TRACK(1~16)

PART DIAL

0~9

SONG

STYLE

VOICE LR12

EASY

NAVIGATOR

001 8 Beat 1

MUSIC DATABASE

30

•You can select successive

Style categories by using the

Direct Access function. The

method is the same as for

selecting Music Database

categories. Refer to step #2

in “Using the Music

Database” on page 14. Also

refer to the Style categories

printed on the panel.

33

Using Auto Accompaniment (all tracks)

1

Press the [STYLE] button.

2

Select a style.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the number buttons

[1]-[0].

Refer to the Style List (page 130).

3

Turn AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT on.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] so that its indicator lights.

The specified left-hand section of the keyboard becomes the “Auto Accompani-

ment” section, and chords played in this section are automatically detected and

used as a basis for fully automatic accompaniment with the selected style.

4

Turn SYNCHRONIZED START on.

Press the [SYNC START] button so that its indicator lights.

The beat lamp also flashes in time with the tempo. This condition is called

synchronized start standby. Refer to page 25 for details.

5

As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto

accompaniment starts.

For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below).

6

Try playing other chords with your left hand.

For information on how to enter chords, see “Chord Fingerings” on page 38.

7

Press the [START/STOP] button again to stop the accompani-

ment.

Auto Accompaniment

•[ACMP] is the abbreviation of

[ACCOMPANIMENT] .

•[SYNC START] is the

abbreviation of [SYNCHRO-

NIZED START].

Auto Accompaniment

section

Split Point

BEAT

CHORD

dim

mM6

7augsus4

119

513

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment

section

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment

section

31

34

Auto Accompaniment

Accompaniment Sections

There are various types of Auto Accompaniment sections that allow you to vary the

arrangement of the accompaniment to match the song you are playing. They are: Intro,

Main A and B, Fill-in and Ending. By switching among them as you play, you can

easily produce the dynamic elements of a professional-sounding arrangement in your

performance.

1

Press the [STYLE] button.

2

Select a style (page 32).

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the number buttons

[1]-[0].

3

Turn AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT on (page 33).

4

Turn SYNCHRONIZED START on (page 33).

● INTRO Section

This is used for the beginning of the song. When the intro finishes playing, accompani-

ment shifts to the main section.

The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected style.

● MAIN Section

This is used for playing the main part of the song. It plays an accompaniment pattern of

several measures (2 - 4 measures), and repeats indefinitely until another section’s button

is pressed. There are two variations on the basic pattern, A - B, and the auto accompani-

ment changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left hand.

● FILL-IN Section

The fill-in sections let you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm of the

accompaniment, to make your performance sound even more professional. Simply press

one of the MAIN/AUTO FILL (A, B) buttons as you play, and the selected fill-in section

plays automatically (AUTO FILL), spicing up the auto accompaniment. When the fill-in is

finished, it leads smoothly into the selected main section (A, B).

● ENDING Section

This is used for the ending of the song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompani-

ment stops automatically. The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on

the selected style.

•[ACMP] is the abbreviation of

[ACCOMPANIMENT] and

[SYNC START] is that of

[SYNCHRONIZED START].

Auto Accompaniment

section

Split Point

BEAT

32

35

Auto Accompaniment

5

Press the [MAIN A] button.

6

Press the [INTRO] button.

7

As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto

accompaniment starts.

For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below).

For information on how to enter chords, see “Chord Fingerings” on page 38.

When the playback of the intro is finished, it automatically leads into main A

section.

•The indicator of the

destination section (MAIN A

or B) will flash while the

corresponding fill-in is

playing. During this time you

can change the destination

section by pressing the

appropriate MAIN/AUTO

FILL [A] or [B] button.

•You can use the intro section

even in the middle of the

song by pressing the

[INTRO] button during the

song.

•If the MAIN/AUTO FILL A/B

button is pressed after the

final half beat (eighth note) of

the measure, fill-in will begin

from the next measure.

8

Press the [MAIN B] button.

A fill-in plays, automatically followed by the main B section.

9

Press the MAIN buttons as desired during your performance.

The main section corresponding to the pressed button plays following an

automatic fill-in.

10

Press the [ENDING] button.

This switches to the ending section. When the ending is finished, the auto

accompaniment automatically stops.

You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the

[ENDING] button again while the ending is playing back.

•If you press the INTRO

button while the ending is

playing, the intro section will

begin playing after the

ending is finished.

•If you press a MAIN/AUTO

FILL button while the ending

is playing, the fill-in

accompaniment will

immediately start playing,

continuing with the main

section.

•If you press the [SYNC

START] button while the

accompaniment is playing,

the accompaniment will stop

and the PSR-550 will enter

Synchronized Start standby

status.

•You can begin the

accompaniment by using the

ending instead of the intro

section.

Split Point

33

36

Auto Accompaniment

Tempo/Tap

Each style of the PSR-550 has been programmed with a default or standard tempo;

however, this can be changed by using the [TEMPO/TAP] button.

You can change the tempo to any value between 32 and 280 beats per minute.

The following steps can be used even during playback.

1

Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button.

2

Change the tempo.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the number buttons

[1]-[0].

3

To restore the default tempo setting, press the [+/YES]/[-/NO]

buttons simultaneously.

Using the Tap function

The auto accompaniment starts automatically at the tempo you tapped the

button.

•The Tempo can also be

changed during playback by

tapping the TEMPO/TAP

button twice at the desired

tempo.

The auto accompaniment can be started at any tempo you desire by “tapping“ out the

tempo with the [TEMPO/TAP] button.

1

Press the [STYLE] button.

2

Select a style (page 32).

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the number buttons

[1]-[0].

3

Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button four times successively (in a

consistent rhythm).

•When you select a different

style while the accompani-

ment is not playing, the

“default” tempo for that style

is also selected. If the

accompaniment is playing,

the same tempo is

maintained even if you select

a different style.

Tempo =148

Tempo =124

Tempo =148

● When a 4-beat style is selected

Tap 4 times

34

* When a 3-beat style is selected,

tap 3 times.

37

Auto Accompaniment

Accompaniment Track Muting

The PSR-550 has eight accompaniment tracks — RHYTHM SUB, RHYTHM MAIN, BASS, CHORD 1, CHORD

2, PAD, PHRASE 1 and PHRASE 2 — that you can control to modify the “orchestration” and therefore the overall

sound of the accompaniment. When a style is selected, the icons corresponding to the tracks which contain data for

any section of that style will light.

Individual accompaniment tracks can be turned OFF (muted) or ON by pressing the TRACK buttons (9 - 16)

corresponding to the target tracks. The [M] icon will appear when a track is muted. By turning the tracks OFF and

ON in different combinations, you can create various arrangements from a single accompaniment style.

Accompaniment Volume Control

This separate volume control for the auto accompaniment lets you set the optimum

level balance between the accompaniment and your right hand performance.

The accompaniment volume range is from “0” (no sound) to “127” (maximum vol-

ume).

1

Start the accompaniment (page 33).

2

Press the [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] button.

Track contents

● RHYTHM SUB, RHYTHM MAIN

These are the main rhythm tracks. The RHYTHM tracks produce

the drum and percussion sounds.

● BASS

The BASS track always plays a bass line, but the voice will

change to fit the selected style … acoustic bass, synth bass,

tuba, etc.

● CHORD 1, CHORD 2

These tracks provide the rhythmic chordal accompaniment

required by each style. You’ll find guitar, piano and other chordal

instruments here.

● PAD

This track plays long chords where necessary, using sustained instruments such as

strings, organ, choir.

● PHRASE 1, PHRASE 2

This is where the musical embellishments reside.

The PHRASE tracks are used for punchy brass stabs, arpeggiated chords and other

extras that make the accompaniment more interesting.

3

Adjust the Accompaniment Volume.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the number buttons

[1]-[0].

Adjust the level as you play the keyboard with your right hand, listening to the

overall balance between the accompaniment and the keyboard-played voice.

•[ACMP] is the abbreviation of

[ACCOMPANIMENT] .

4

Stop the accompaniment (page 33).

9

REC

10

REC

11

REC

12

REC

13

REC

14

REC

15

REC

16

REC

13

Acmp Volume =100

35

38

Auto Accompaniment

Chord Fingerings

The way in which chords are played or indicated with your left hand (in the auto

accompaniment section of the keyboard) is referred to as “fingering”. There are 5

types of fingerings as described below.

• Multi Finger ................................................................................................ page 40

• Single Finger .............................................................................................. page 38

• Fingered 1 .................................................................................................. page 38

• Fingered 2 .................................................................................................. page 40

• Full Keyboard ............................................................................................. page 40

•The default fingering mode is

“Multi Finger”.

The Single Finger mode

Single-finger accompaniment makes it simple to produce beautifully orchestrated

accompaniment using major, seventh, minor and minor-seventh chords by pressing a

minimum number of keys on the Auto accompaniment section of the keyboard. The

following abbreviated chord fingerings are used:

The Fingered 1 mode

The Fingered 1 mode lets you finger your own chords on the Auto accompaniment

section of the keyboard (i.e. all keys to the left of and including the split-point key —

normally F#2) while the PSR-550 supplies appropriately orchestrated rhythm, bass and

chord accompaniment in the selected style.

The Fingered 1 mode recognizes the following chords:

Fingering =Singl

Fingering =F1

Cm

C

Cm

7

C

7

•For a major chord, press the root key only.

•For a minor chord, simultaneously press the

root key and a black key to its left.

•For a seventh chord, simultaneously press the

root key and a white key to its left.

•For a minor-seventh chord, simultaneously

press the root key and both a white and black

key to its left.

36

1

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

2

Select ‘‘Utility’’ by using the data dial, the [+/YES]

button or the [-/NO] button.

3

Press the [NEXT] button.

4

Select ‘‘Fingerng’’ by using the data dial, the [+/

YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

5

Press the [NEXT] button.

6

Select the way in which chords are played or

indicated (Fingering) by using the data dial, the [+/

YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

F5 Utility

F5 Util:Fingerng

Fingering =Multi

The operations for each function corresponding to step #6 are covered in the following

explanations.

39

Auto Accompaniment

C

Cm

7

C

( )

CM

( )

7

C

(9)

C

( )

(9)

6

Caug Cm

6

Cm

7

( )

Cm

b5

7

CmM

b5

7

Cm

( )

(9)

7

Cm

(9)

CmM

7

( )

CmM

(9)

7

( )

Cdim Cdim

7

C

(9)

7

( )

C

(13)

7

( )

C

(b9)

7

( )

C

(b13)

7

Csus

4

C

1+2+5

C

b5

7

C

6

( )

( )

CM

7(9) 7

CM

(#11)

( )

7

CM

b5

C

(b5)

( )

C

(#11)

7

C

(#9)

7

( )

C aug

7

Cm

7(11)

( )

( )

CM aug

7

( )

C sus

4

7

( )

● Example for “C” chords

•Notes in parentheses can be

omitted.

•If you play any three

adjacent keys (including

black keys), the chord sound

will be cancelled and only

the rhythm instruments will

continue playing (CHORD

CANCEL function).

•Playing a single key or two

same root keys in the

adjacent octaves produces

accompaniment based only

on the root.

•A perfect fifth (1 + 5)

produces accompaniment

based only on the root and

fifth which can be used with

both major and minor

chords.

•The chord fingerings listed

are all in “root” position, but

other inversions can be used

— with the following

exceptions:

m7, m7

b

5, 6, m6, sus4,

aug, dim7, 7

b

5, 6(9),

m7(11), 1+2+5.

•Inversion of the 7sus4 chord

are not recognized if the 5th

is omitted.

•The AUTO ACCOMPANI-

MENT will sometimes not

change when related chords

are played in sequence (e.g.

some minor chords followed

by the minor seventh).

•Two-note fingerings will

produce a chord based on

the previously played chord.

Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing

Major [M] 1 - 3 - 5

Add ninth [(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - 5

Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6

Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6

Major seventh [M7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or

1 - (3) - 5 - 7

Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7

Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or

1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7

Flatted fifth [(b5)] 1 - 3 - b5

Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7

Suspended fourth [sus4] 1 - 4 - 5

Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5

Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7

Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5

Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5

Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6

Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7

Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7

Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7)

Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7

Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7

Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7

Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - 7

Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5

Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6

Seventh [7] 1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or

1 - (3) - 5 - b7

Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7

Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7

Seventh ninth [7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7

Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or

1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7

Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7

Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7

Seventh flatted fifth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7

Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7

Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - (5) - b7

One plus two plus five [1+2+5] 1 - 2 - 5

Chord (C) Display

CC

C(9) C(9)

C6 C6

C6(9) C6(9)

CM7 CM7

CM7(9) CM7(9)

CM7(#11) CM7(#11)

C(b5) C(b5)

CM7b5 CM7b5

Csus4 Csus4

Caug Caug

CM7aug CM7aug

Cm Cm

Cm(9) Cm(9)

Cm6 Cm6

Cm7 Cm7

Cm7(9) Cm7(9)

Cm7(11) Cm7(11)

CmM7 CmM7

CmM7(9) CmM7(9)

Cm7b5 Cm7b5

CmM7b5 CmM7b5

Cdim Cdim

Cdim7 Cdim7

C7 C7

C7(b9) C7(b9)

C7(b13) C7(b13)

C7(9) C7(9)

C7(#11) C7(#11)

C7(13) C7(13)

C7(#9) C7(#9)

C7b5C7b5

C7aug C7aug

C7sus4 C7sus4

C1+2+5 C

37

40

Auto Accompaniment

The Fingered 2 mode

Accompaniment Split Point

The point on the keyboard that separates the auto accompaniment section and the right-

hand section of the keyboard is called the “split point”.

The initial setting (factory setting) of the split point is “F#2”; however, this can be set

to any key you wish. Refer to page 118 for instructions on how to set the split point.

This is essentially the same as the Fingered 1 mode, described above, except that the

Fingered 2 mode additionally allows you to specify the lowest note of each chord —

simply, the lowest note played in the Auto accompaniment section of the keyboard is

used as the accompaniment bass note. This means you can specify “on-bass” chords in

which the main bass note for the chord is not the root of the chord. For a C major

chord, for example, you could use E (the third) or G (the fifth) as the bass note rather

than C.

When the Full Keyboard Mode is selected, the PSR-550 will automatically create

appropriate accompaniment while you play just about anything using both hands,

anywhere on the keyboard. You do not have to worry about specifying the accompani-

ment chords. The name of the detected chord will appear in the display.

•When the Full Keyboard

mode is selected, the split

point setting (see below) for

the auto accompaniment will

be ignored.

The Multi Finger mode

This is the default accompaniment mode. The Multi Finger mode automatically detects

Single Finger or Fingered 1 chord fingerings, so you can use either type of fingering

without having to switch fingering modes.

•If you want to play minor,

seventh or minor seventh

chords using the Single

Finger operation in the Multi

Finger Mode, always press

the closest white/black key(s)

to the root of the chord.

The Full Keyboard mode

Fingering =F2

C C on E C on G

Fingering =Full

Fingering =Multi

Auto Accompaniment

section

Split Point (F#2)

38

41

Auto Accompaniment

Synchro Stop

When the Synchro Stop function is engaged, accompaniment playback will stop

completely when all keys in the auto-accompaniment section of the keyboard are

released. Accompaniment playback will start again as soon as a chord is played. The

BEAT indicators in the display will flash while the accompaniment is stopped.

•Synchro Stop cannot be set

to on when the fingering

mode is set to Full Keyboard

or the auto accompaniment

on the panel is set to off.

Also, Synchro Stop

automatically turns off when

Full Keyboard is selected for

the fingering mode or when

the auto accompaniment on

the panel is turned off.

•[SYNC STOP] is the

abbreviation of [SYNCHRO

STOP].

1

Press the [STYLE] button.

2

Turn AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT on (page 33).

3

Turn SYNCHRONIZED START on (page 33).

4

Turn SYNCHRONIZED STOP on.

Press the [SYNC STOP] button.

5

As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto

accompaniment starts.

For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below).

6

The auto accompaniment stops

when you release your left hand from

the keys.

7

Playing a chord with your left hand automatically restarts the

auto accompaniment.

To stop the auto accompaniment, simply release your left hand from the

keyboard.

8

Turn SYNCHRONIZED STOP off.

Press the [SYNC STOP] button.

When Synchronized Stop is off, the auto accompaniment does not stop when

you release your left hand from the keys.

9

Stop the accompaniment (page 33).

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment

section

39

42

Auto Accompaniment

One Touch Setting

One Touch Setting is a powerful and convenient function that lets you instantly

reconfigure virtually all auto-accompaniment-related panel settings with the touch of a

single button.

1

Press the round One Touch Setting button to call up the One

Touch Setting function.

•You can also try changing

the established One Touch

Setting data, making your

own original settings. To be

able to recall your original

settings anytime, save them

using the Registration

Memory function (page 54).

•When a User style (number

113-115) is selected, the

One Touch Setting cannot be

used.

2

Press one of the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] buttons [1]-[4].

Steps #3 - #4 of “Using Auto Accompaniment (all tracks)” (page 33) can be set

with just a single press of a [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button. In addition,

various panel settings (such as voices, effects, etc.) that match the selected style

can be instantly recalled with just a single button press (see below).

3

As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto

accompaniment starts.

For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below).

4

Stop the accompaniment.

• Part on/off (VOICE R1, R2).............................................................................. page 29

• Voice Change setting (VOICE R1, R2) ............................................................ page 75

• Mixer setting (VOICE R1, R2) .......................................................................... page 76

• Auto accompaniment = ON.............................................................................. page 33

• Synchro Start = ON* ........................................................................................ page 33

• HARMONY/ECHO on/off, type, volume, part ................................................... page 50

• DSP on/off, type, return level and FAST/SLOW............................................... page 49

• Multi Pad bank number .................................................................................... page 44

• Upper Octave setting ....................................................................................... page 119

* Set only when the accompaniment is not playing.

One Touch Setting parameter list

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment

section

The PSR-550 features four different One Touch Settings for each of the 112 auto

accompaniment styles built into the instrument. Each has been specially programmed

to match the selected style; each has the best suited voice (or combination of voices),

digital effects and other settings for that style. Simply pressing one of the [ONE

TOUCH SETTING] buttons lets you instantly reconfigure all relevant settings,

conveniently allowing you to start playing in a desired style with all the appropriate

sounds — without having to make each setting one by one.

40

43

The Multi Pads

The PSR-550 Multi Pads can be used to play a number of short pre-recorded rhythmic and melodic

sequences that can be used to add impact and variety to your keyboard performances. You can also

record your own Multi Pad phrases as described in “Multi Pad Recording” on page 92.

Some pad phrases simply play back as programmed, while others are “chord match” types which, if the

Chord Match function is turned on, are automatically transposed to match chords played using the PSR-

550 auto accompaniment feature.

• Playing the Multi Pads .................................... page 43

• Chord Match ................................................... page 43

• Selecting a Multi Pad Bank ............................. page 44

• Turning the Chord Match On/Off ..................... page 44

Playing the Multi Pads

Press any of the Multi Pads.

The corresponding phrase (in this case, for Pad 1) starts playing back in its

entirety as soon as the pad is pressed. To stop playback in the middle of the

phrase, press the [STOP] button.

•Simply tap any of the Multi

Pads at any time to play back

the corresponding phrase at

the currently set tempo.

•You can even play two, three

or four Multi Pads at the

same time.

•Pressing the pad during its

playback will stop playing

and begin playing from the

top again.

Chord Match

1

Press the [STYLE] button.

2

Turn AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT on (page 33).

3

Play a chord with your left hand.

For this example, play an F major chord (as shown below).

4

Press any of the Multi Pads.

In this example, the phrase for Pad 1 will be transposed into F major before

playing back. Try playing other chords and pressing the pads.

•The chord match on/off

status depends on the

selected Multi Pad. Refer to

the Multi Pad Bank list (page

45).

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment

section

41

40 banks

44

Selecting a Multi Pad Bank

1

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

3

Press the [NEXT] button to display the MULTI PAD BANK

screen.

2

Select “Multi Pad.”

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

4

Select a Bank.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the number buttons

[1]-[0].

Turning Chord Match On/Off

1

-

3

Use the same operation as in “Selecting a Multi Pad

Bank” above.

4

Press the [NEXT] button again.

•The chord match function

has no effect with pads that

contain percussion phrases.

• The chord match on/off

setting is restored to its

original status whenever a

preset Multi Pad Bank is

selected.

•When the chord match on/off

status of a user Multi Pad

Bank (see above) is

changed, the new status is

recorded with the Multi Pad

data.

5

Select the desired PAD.

Use the [NEXT]/[BACK] button.

6

Turn the CHORD MATCH function on or off.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

The Multi Pads

F1 Multi Pad

PBnk=01 Fanfare

CdMatch Pad1=On

CdMatch Pad2=On

42

45

•There are two types of Multi

Pad data: some of the data

will be played back once and

stop when it reaches to the

end. Others will be played

back repeatedly until you

press the [STOP] button.

The Multi Pads

43

● Multi Pad Bank List

No. Bank name Chord Match Repeat

Pad1 Pad2 Pad3 Pad4 Pad1 Pad2 Pad3 Pad4

1 Fanfare O O O –– –––

2 Crystal O O O O ––––

3 Gothic_V O O O O ––––

4 TechSyn1 O O O O O O O O

5 TechSyn2 O O O O O O O O

6 TechSyn3 O O ––OOOO

7 TechSyn4 O O ––OOOO

8 PianoSeq O O O O ––––

9 OrcheHit O O O O ––––

10 Traffic –– ––– –––

11 Chirp –– ––– –––

12 HorrorSE –– ––– –––

13 Noises –– ––– –––

14 WaterSE –– ––– –––

15 AnalgKit –– ––– –––

16 TechKit –– ––– –––

17 RockKit –– ––– –––

18 TomFlam –– ––– –––

19 LatPerc1 –– ––– –––

20 LatPerc2 –– ––– –––

21 Timbales –– ––– –––

22 ArabKit1 –– ––– –––

23 ArabKit2 –– ––– –––

24 Brassy1 O O O O ––––

25 Brassy2 O O O O ––––

26 Swingy O O O O ––––

27 SynBrass O O O O ––––

28 GtrPlay1 O O O O O O O O

29 GtrPlay2 O O O O O O O O

30 GtrPlay3 O O O O O O O O

31 GtrPlay4 O O O O O O O O

32 PianoMan O O O O O O O –

33 SalsaPno O O O O O O O O

34 SambaShw –– ––OOOO

35 Accrdion O O O O ––––

36 Arpeggio O O O O ––––

37 Classic O O O O ––––

38 Twinkle O O O O ––––

39 Xmas1 O O O –– ––O

40 Xmas2 –OO–– –––

O : available

46

Digital Effects

With the digital effects built into the PSR-550 you can add ambiance and depth to your music in a variety

of ways—such as adding reverb that makes you sound like you are playing in a concert hall or adding

harmony notes for a full, rich sound.

● Reverb .......................................................................................................page 46

You can create a reverb effect that makes you sound like you are playing in

places like a concert hall, or live in a club.

Reverb is always set to on for the PSR-550. A total of 24 different reverb types

are available.

•For details about using

Digital Effects (Reverb,

Chorus, DSP) (page 132).

● Chorus.......................................................................................................page 48

You can add a chorus effect that makes your playing sound as though multiple

parts were being played together at the same time.

Chorus is always set to on for the PSR-550. A total of 16 different chorus types

are available.

● DSP ............................................................................................................ page 49

In addition to the Reverb and Chorus

types, the PSR-550 has special DSP

effects, that include additional effects

usually used for a specific part, such as

distortion and tremolo.

A total of 74 DSP types are available.

The PSR-550 features one DSP system,

which can be turned on or off by a panel

button (page 49). The [FAST/SLOW]

button can switch between variations of the DSP effect. For example, this lets

you change the rotating speed (fast/slow) of the rotary speaker effect.

● Harmony/Echo ..........................................................................................page 50

You can add a variety of harmony notes

to your playing in the right-hand section

(page 29), as well as adding tremolo or

other effects.

Reverb

Selecting a reverb type

2

Select “Digital Effect”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

1

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

DSP(FAST)

SUSTAIN HARMONY

TOUCH

DSP(FAST)

SUSTAIN HARMONY

TOUCH

F3 DigitalEffect

44

47

Adjust the depth of the reverb.

3

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Digital Effect screen.

4

Select “Reverb”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

5

Press the [NEXT] button.

6

Select a reverb type.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

Refer to the Reverb Type List (page 133).

8

Press the [NEXT] button.

● Reverb Depth (send level) .................................................................................... page 74

Sets the reverb depth for the specified voice or track, and thus the amount of reverb effect

applied to that voice or track.

● Reverb Return Level .......................................................................................... see below

Sets the amount of reverb returned from the reverb effect stage, thus making it possible to

adjust the degree of reverb effect applied to the overall sound.

Digital Effects

The two parameters below affect the depth of the reverb.

D.Effect:Reverb

RevType=Hall1

9

Adjust the reverb return level.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the number buttons

[1]-[0].

The range is from 0 to 127. The higher the value, the greater the return level.

RevRetnLevel= 64

RevRetnLevel= 81

•When you select a different

style, the appropriate reverb

type will be selected

accordingly.

7

Play the keyboard.

Try out some of the other reverb types as well.

45

48

Chorus

Selecting a Chorus Type

5

Press the [NEXT] button.

6

Select a chorus type.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

Refer to the Chorus Type List (page 133).

Adjust the depth of the chorus.

● Chorus Depth (send level).................................................................................... page 74

Sets the chorus depth for the specified voice or track, and thus the amount of chorus

effect applied to that voice or track.

● Chorus Return Level .......................................................................................... see below

Sets the amount of chorus effect returned from the chorus effect stage, thus making it

possible to adjust the degree of chorus effect applied to the overall sound.

9

Adjust the chorus return level.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the number buttons

[1]-[0].

The range is from 0 to 127. The higher the value, the greater the return level.

8

Press the [NEXT] button.

Digital Effects

1

-

3

Use the same operation as in “Reverb” (page 46).

4

Select “Chorus”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

The two parameters below affect the depth of the chorus effect.

ChoType=Chorus2

D.Effect:Chorus

ChoRetnLevel= 64

•When you select a different

style, the appropriate chorus

type will be selected

accordingly.

7

Play the keyboard.

Try out some of the other chorus types as well.

46

49

•When the selected DSP type

is an Insertion Effect (pages

49, 133), the DSP effect

applies only to the Voice R1.

DSP

Applying the DSP effect

The DSP icon will light up and the

DSP effect will be turned on.

The effect will be applied when

you play the R1, R2 and L voices from the keyboard.

In addition, when the [FAST/SLOW] button is pressed, the FAST icon lights up

indicating that the variation of the DSP effect is selected. When the DSP effect

type is Rotary Speaker or Tremolo, the speed of the modulation becomes fast.

•When the Voice Set function

is ON (page 120), the DSP

effect and FAST/SLOW

settings may change

according to the selected R1

panel voice.

Selecting a DSP Type

6

Select a DSP type.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

Refer to the DSP Type List (page 133).

7

Play the keyboard.

Try out some of the other DSP types as well.

Adjust the depth of the DSP.

● DSP Depth (Send level)......................................................................................... page 74

Sets the DSP depth for the specified voice or track, and thus the amount of DSP effect

applied to that voice or track.

● DSP Return Level ............................................................................................... see below

Sets the amount of DSP effect returned from the DSP effect stage, thus making it

possible to adjust the degree of DSP effect applied to the overall sound.

•If DSP Insertion Effect is

selected (page 50), you

won’t be able to set the DSP

Return Level.

8

Press the [NEXT] button.

9

Adjust the DSP return level.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the number buttons

[1]-[0].

The range is from 0 to 127. The higher the value, the greater the return level.

Digital Effects

Press the [DSP] button.

1

-

3

Use the same operation as in “Reverb” (page 46).

4

Select “Dsp”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

5

Press the [NEXT] button.

The two parameters below affect the depth of the DSP effect.

DSP(FAST)

SUSTAIN HARMONY

TOUCH

DspType=Stage2

DspRetnLevel= 64

47

50

Digital Effects

F3 DigitalEffect

RETURNSEND

(Depth)

Insertion Effect

System Effect

Amplifier

Speaker

Mixer

System Effects and Insertion Effects

The reverb, chorus and DSP effects are divided into two different types or methods or

operation.

There are two types of digital effects: system effects and insertion effects.

Harmony/Echo

Selecting a Harmony/Echo type

2

Select “DigitalEffect”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

3

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Digital Effect screen.

● System Effects

Applies the effect to all of the parts input to the mixer. You can set the amount of effect

applied with the depth and return level parameters. Reverb and chorus are both system

effects.

● Insertion Effects

Applies the effect to only one designated part before inputting the signal to the mixer. You

can effectively use the digital effects by applying the desired effect to the specific part.

With the insertion effects, only the DSP depth can be set.

The illustration below with the various audio components (instruments, effect devices

and a mixer) represents the inner workings of the DSP effects of the PSR-550.

1

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

● Reverb ...... All types function as system effects.

● Chorus...... All types function as system effects.

● DSP .......... Depending on the selected type, this functions either as a system effect

or an insertion effect.

Refer to “About Digital Effects” (page 132) and the Type List.

48

51

Digital Effects

4

Select “Harmony”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

5

Press the [NEXT] button.

6

Select a Harmony/Echo type.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

Refer to the Harmony/Echo Type List (page 134).

•When the Voice Set function

is ON (page 120), the

Harmony/Echo type may

change according to the

selected R1 panel voice.

Applying the Harmony/Echo effect

4

Press the [HARMONY/ECHO] button.

5

Play some notes in the right-hand range of

the keyboard.

● When a Harmony type (Duet through Strum) is selected

This type automatically add one or more harmony notes to a single-note melody

played in the right hand.

● When an Echo type is selected

An echo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard at the currently set

tempo.

Steps #1 - #3 above are unnecessary for this type.

● When a Tremolo type is selected

A tremolo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard at the currently set

tempo.

Steps #1 - #3 above are unnecessary for this type.

● When a Trill type is selected

Two notes held on the keyboard are played alternately at the currently set tempo.

Steps #1 - #3 above are unnecessary for this type.

•Harmony/Echo cannot be

turned on when the Full

Keyboard (page 40) is

selected. Harmony/Echo will

be automatically turned off if

the Full Keyboard fingering

mode is selected while the

Harmony/Echo effect is on.

1

Press the [STYLE] button.

2

Turn AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT on (page 33).

3

Play a chord with your left hand.

For this example, play a C major chord.

HTyp=Duet

D.Effect:Harmony

CHORD

dim

mM6

7augsus4

119

513

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment

section

DSP(FAST)

SUSTAIN HARMONY

TOUCH

49

52

Digital Effects

Adjusting the Harmony/Echo volume

5

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Type Selection screen.

6

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Harmony/Echo Volume

screen.

•When the Voice Set function

is on (page 120), the

Harmony/Echo Volume may

change according to the

selected R1 panel voice.

•Changing the volume of the

harmony sound may not

produce audible effect for

some R1 voices (ex. organ

sounds) when you select

Harmony types “Duet”

through “Strum”.

7

Adjust the Harmony/Echo volume.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the number buttons

[1]-[0].

The volume range is from 0 (no sound) to 127 (maximum volume).

The volume of the Harmony/Echo sound in relation to the keyboard sound can be

adjusted as follows:

1

-

4

Use the same operation as in “Selecting a Harmony/Echo

Type” (page 50).

Harmony Vol =120

D.Effect:Harmony

Harmony Vol =113

50

53

Digital Effects

•When the Voice Set function

is on (page 120), the

Harmony/Echo part setting

may change according to the

selected R1 panel voice.

Changing the Part for the Harmony/Echo effect

5

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Type Selection screen.

6

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Harmony Volume

screen.

7

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Harmony Part setting

screen.

8

Set the part.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

● Auto .......... Harmony/Echo notes are automatically assigned to the R1 and R2

parts, in that order or priority.

● Right1 ....... Harmony/Echo is only applied to the Voice R1.

If Voice R1 is off, there will be no Harmony/Echo effect.

● Right2 ....... Harmony/Echo is only applied to the Voice R2.

If Voice R2 is off, there will be no Harmony/Echo effect.

This allows you to select the part which is used for the Harmony/Echo effect.

1

-

4

Use the same operation as in “Selecting a Harmony/Echo

Type” (page 50).

HarmoPart=Auto

D.Effect:Harmony

51

54

Registration Memory

Since the PSR-550 is such a sophisticated instrument with such a variety of controls and functions —

voice, style, auto accompaniment and effect settings, just to name a few — the Registration Memory

feature is one of the most convenient and powerful of the instrument. It allows you save virtually all panel

settings to a Registration Memory setting, and then instantly recall your custom panel settings by press-

ing a single button.

Registration Memory provides up to 128 complete control-panel setups (32 banks, 4 setups each) that

can be recalled instatly during your performance.

•The PSR-550’s initial

Registration Memory [1]–[4]

settings (when it shipped

from the factory) are the

same panel settings as when

the STANDBY switch is first

turned on.

• Registering the Panel Settings .................................................................... page 55

• Recalling the Registered Panel Settings ..................................................... page 55

• Selecting a Registration Bank ..................................................................... page 56

• Naming the Registration Banks ................................................................... page 56

32 banks

52

Data stored by the Registration Memory

■ VOICE PARAMETERS

• Part on/off (VOICE R1, R2, L) ..................................................................... page 29

• Voice Change setting (VOICE R1, R2, L) .................................................... page 75

• Mixer setting (VOICE R1, R2, L).................................................................. page 76

• Touch Sensitivity ........................................................................................ page 120

• DSP on/off, FAST/SLOW on/off, DSP Type and Return Level ..................... page 49

• HARMONY/ECHO on/off, type, volume, part .............................................. page 50

• TOUCH on/off ............................................................................................ page 120

• SUSTAIN on/off ........................................................................................... page 30

• Pitch Bend Range...................................................................................... page 122

• Scale Tuning .............................................................................................. page 119

• Footswitch function .................................................................................... page 121

• Transpose .................................................................................................... page 30

• Upper Octave setting ................................................................................. page 119

• Direct Access setting ................................................................................. page 122

• Backlight color setting................................................................................ page 122

■ ACCOMPANIMENT PARAMETERS

• Auto Accompaniment on/off ........................................................................ page 33

• Style number ............................................................................................... page 32

• Main A/B section.......................................................................................... page 34

• Tempo .......................................................................................................... page 36

• Fingering mode............................................................................................ page 38

• Split Point................................................................................................... page 120

• Accompaniment Volume .............................................................................. page 37

• Track on/off setting...................................................................................... page 37

• Voice Change setting ................................................................................... page 75

• Mixer setting ................................................................................................ page 75

• Multi Pad Bank number, Chord Match on/off ............................................... page 43

• Reverb setting.............................................................................................. page 46

• Chorus setting ............................................................................................. page 48

Registration Memory data can be saved to and loaded from floppy disk as needed (page 57).

•Material recorded data is

retained in memory even

when the STANDBY switch is

turned off if batteries are

installed or an AC adaptor is

connected (page 136). It is

nevertheless a good idea to

save important data to floppy

disk so that you can keep

them indefinitely and build up

your own data library (page

60).

55

Registering the Panel Settings

1

Set up the panel controls as required.

2

Press the round Registration Memory button to call up the

Registration Memory function.

•Any data that was previously

recorded in the Registration

Memory location you

selected will be erased and

replaced by the new settings.

•The Registration Memory

contents will be retained

even after turning the power

off. See page 136 for details.

A “Regist Memorized” message briefly appears in the display, indicating that

the panel settings have been memorized.

In this example, the panel settings are memorized to button number 3.

Recalling the Registered Panel Settings

Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons: [1]

through [4].

•Registration data cannot be

recalled when the One Touch

Setting function is on.

•Some parameters cannot be

recalled depending on the

selected mode. For example,

you cannot recall the Voice

R2/L voices in the Style

Record mode and Pad

Record mode even if you

press the Registration

Memory buttons, since only

the Voice R1 voice is used in

those modes.

In this example, the panel settings memorized to button number 3 are recalled.

•For details about Accompa-

niment parameters (page

54).

•The Freeze function will

automatically be turned on

when one of the following

modes, Song, Style Record

or Pad Record is engaged.

2

Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons: [1]

through [4].

In this example, only the voice parameter settings memorized to button number

3 are recalled.

3

While holding the [MEMORY] button, press one of the REGIS-

TRATION MEMORY buttons: [1] through [4].

Registration Memory

When the FREEZE function is engaged, selecting a different Registration Memory

setup will not change any of the accompaniment (all other parameters will change as

programmed). This allows you to use the auto accompaniment and select different

Registration Memory setups, without suddenly disturbing the flow of the accompani-

ment.

1

Press the [FREEZE] button.

The [FREEZE] lamp lights.

The Accompaniment Freeze function

53

56

Registration Memory

Selecting a Registration Bank

1

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

3

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Registration Memory

Bank screen.

4

Select a bank.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the number buttons

[1]-[0].

Naming the Registration Banks

1

-

3

Use the same operation as in “Selecting a Registration

Bank” (see above).

4

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Name screen.

5

Enter the desired name for the bank.

Use the keyboard to enter the name (page 21).

Up to eight letters or characters can be used.

F2 Regist Memory

RBnk=01 Regist01

RBnk=01 Regist01

2

Select “Regist Memory”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

54

–RegName=Regist01

Cursor

57

Disk Operations

Built into the PSR-550 is a disk drive. Simply insert a floppy disk and you’ve got access to a wide variety

of convenient functions, such as recording and playback of User songs (page 78), as well as saving and

loading of User styles (page 96), User pads (page 92) and Registration Memory data (page 54).

You can save any number of User styles, pads and registration data to floppy disks, create your own

song libraries or find many other ways to make playing and using the PSR-550 more efficient.

●The PSR-550 is capable of playing back songs contained on the included data

disk, as well as commercially available song data in the following formats,

indicated by the corresponding logos (page 9):

You can play back song files collected on these disks using the

voices defined in the GM standard.

You can play back songs using the XG format, an extension of the

GM standardthat allows for much higher sound quality.

You can play back song files collected on these disks using the

voices defined in Yamaha’s DOC format.

•Refer to page 9 for more

details on the logos.

●The PSR-550 is compatible with style data contained on the included data disk,

as well as commercially available disk styles in the following format, indicated by

the corresponding logo (page 9):

You can load and play with the style files collected on these disks.

●You can record your own performances to User songs and play them back (page

78).

•It may not be possible to

record the full 60 files to a

disk, depending on the

length of the recorded files.

●The PSR-550 features special User style, User pad and Registration Memory

functions. The data recorded with these functions can also be saved to disk

individually or in any combination. Likewise, data (files) saved to disks can be

loaded individually or in any combination to the PSR-550.

•The maximum number of

files may vary according to

the type and volume of the

saved files (page 61).

User data compatible with the PSR-550 is indicated in the chart below.

•When saving data, use a

floppy disk formatted on the

PSR-550.

•The three letters following

the file name (after the

period) are referred to as a

file “extension”. The

extension indicates the type

of file.

•Since the user songs are

directly recorded to the disk

as you play during recording

and read from the disk

during playback, the Save/

Load functions are not

available. The Copy and

Delete File operations

related to the user songs can

be executed.

●Other disk functions include:

• Format ............................................................... page 60

• Song Copy ......................................................... page 64

• Delete ................................................................ page 67

User Song

Record

Playback

(Direct save)

(Direct read) Maximum of 60 files

can be saved.

Floppy

Disk

Save

Load

Floppy

Disk

User Style

User Pad

Registration Memory

Save or load individually

or gathered together

Up to 32 All type files (page 61)

can be recorded on a 2HD disk.

Up to 13 All type files can be

recorded on a 2DD disk.

● Data that can be Saved or Loaded with the PSR-550

Data Type Extension Save Load

User song

(Standard MIDI format0) .MID ––

User style

(Style file format) .USR O O

User pad .USR O O

Registration Memory .USR O O

55

58

Disk Operations

Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with

care. Follow the important precautions below.

■ Compatible Disk Type

3.5" 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used.

■ Inserting/Ejecting Floppy Disks

●To insert a floppy disk into the disk drive:

•Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing

upward and the sliding

shutter is facing forward,

towards the disk slot.

Carefully insert the disk

into the slot, slowly

pushing it all the way in

until it clicks into place

and the eject button pops

out.

■

Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head

●Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument

employs a precision magnetic read/write head which,

after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of

magnetic particles from the disks used that will

eventually cause read and write errors.

●To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order

Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially-

available dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head

about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about

the availability of proper head-cleaning disks.

●Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk

drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk

drive or floppy disks.

■ About the Floppy Disks

●To handle floppy disks with care:

•Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or

apply pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep

floppy disks in their protective cases when they are

not in use.

•Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely

high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust

or liquids.

•Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the

exposed surface of the floppy disk inside.

•Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as

those produced by televisions, speakers, motors,

etc., since magnetic fields can partially or completely

erase data on the disk, rendering it unreadable.

•Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or

housing.

•Do not attach anything other than the provided

labels to a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels

are attached in the proper location.

●To protect your data (write-protect tab):

•To prevent accidental erasure of important data,

slide the disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect”

position (tab open).

Using the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks

•When the PSR-550 is turned on, the LED below the floppy disk

slot will be lit indicating that the Disk Drive is ready to use.

●To eject a floppy disk:

•Before ejecting the disk, be sure to confirm that the

FDD is stopped (check if the DISK IN USE lamp is

off). Press the eject button slowly as far as it will go;

the disk will automatically pop out. When the disk is

fully ejected, carefully remove it by hand.

•If the eject button is pressed too quickly, or if it is not

pressed in as far as it will go, the disk may not eject

properly. The eject button may become stuck in a

half-pressed position with the disk extending from

the drive slot by only a few millimeters. If this

happens, do not attempt to pull out the partially

ejected disk, since using force in this situation can

damage the disk drive mechanism or the floppy disk.

To remove a partially ejected disk, try pressing the

eject button once again or push the disk back into

the slot and then repeat the eject procedure.

●Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the power off

during recording, reading and playing back. Doing so

can damage the disk and possibly the disk drive.

●Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive

before turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the

drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and

dirt that can cause data read and write errors.

●Data backup

•For maximum data security Yamaha recommends

that you keep two copies of important data on

separate floppy disks. This gives you a backup if one

disk is lost or damaged.

Write protect tab

ON (locked or

write protected)

Write protect tab

OFF (unlocked or

write enabled)

DISK IN USE

This lamp lights

during disk read/

write operations,

such as when a

disk has been

inserted, during

recording,

playback,

formatting, etc.

This lamp is always on

when the power is on,

regardless of the disk

operation.

56

59

Disk Operations

Included Data Disk

Disk song playback

1

Insert the included data disk into the disk drive.

•If a disk has already been

inserted into the drive, press

the [SONG] button to call up

the Song display.

2

Select the desired song.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the number buttons

[1]-[0].

3

Press the [START/STOP] button to start the song.

4

Press the [START/STOP] button again to stop the song.

For details, see “Song Playback” (page 68).

CHORD

dim

mM6

7

augsus4

119

513

BACK NEXT

KEYBOARD

START/STOP

/YES

TRACK(1~16)

PART DIAL

0~9

SONG

STYLE

VOICE LR12

EASY

NAVIGATOR

001 CLUB XG

_

MUSIC DATABASE

002 TECHNO

1

REC

2

REC

3

REC

4

REC

5

REC

6

REC

7

REC

8

REC

9

REC

10

REC

11

REC

12

REC

13

REC

14

REC

15

REC

16

REC

TRANSPOSE REGIST-

RATION TEMPO MEASURE BEAT

002 TECHNO

DSP(FAST)

SUSTAIN HARMONY

TOUCH

CHORD

dim

mM

6

7

augsus4

119

513

BACK NEXT

KEYBOARD

START/STOP

/YES

TRACK(1~16)

PART DIAL

0~9

SONG

STYLE

VOICE LR12

EASY

NAVIGATOR

MUSIC DATABASE

57

60

Disk Operations

Format

Setting up commercially available floppy disks for use with PSR-550 is called format-

ting.

This function is useful for quickly deleting unnecessary files from an already formatted

disk. Be careful when using this operation, since it automatically deletes all data on

the disk.

•After formatting, the capacity

of a 2HD disk is 1 MB and

that of a 2DD disk is 720 KB.

1

Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive.

When a (new) blank disk or an incompatible disk is inserted “Unformatted

Disk” will be displayed on the screen. In this case, press the [EXIT] button to

show “Format OK?” and then simply follow the procedure 5 below.

2

Press the [UTILITY] button.

•When the floppy disk’s write-

protect tab is set to ON

(page 58) or the disk is a

purposely “copy-protected”

disk, an alert message

appears indicating that the

Format function is not

possible.

3

Select “Format”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

CAUTION

•If data is already saved on

the disk, be careful not to

format it. If you format the

disk, all the previously

recorded data will be

deleted.

•While formatting is in

progress, never eject the

disk or turn off the power

to the PSR-550.

•If a disk that cannot be

read by the PSR-550 is

inserted into the disk

drive, it will be treated the

same as an unformatted

floppy disk. Take care not

to erase important data by

accidentally formatting a

disk.

4

Press the [NEXT] button to display the FORMAT operation

screen.

5

Execute the Format operation.

Press the [+/YES] button to execute the Format operation.

Press the [-/NO] button to abort the Format operation.

Save

You can save PSR-550 User styles, User pad (banks 37-40) and Registration Memory

data (banks 01-16) to floppy disks.

•When the floppy disk’s write-

protect tab is set to ON

(page 58) or the disk is a

purposely “copy-protected”

disk, an alert message

appears indicating that the

Save function is not possible.

1

Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive.

2

Press the [SAVE] button.

Utility:Format

Format OK?

Sv Type:All

The Format operation is completed...

Formatting 49%

Completed

58

61

Disk Operations

3

Select the file type.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

Refer to the file type list below:

•Although all User Style, User

Pad and Registration

Memory data can be saved

together into one single file,

the data can be recalled

individually when loaded

back into the PSR-550.

4

Press the [NEXT] button to display the FILE SELECT screen.

•If you’ve selected a file that

already contains data and

you rename the file with the

intent of overwriting the data,

renaming the file will simply

copy that data to the new file

name and leave the original

data and file name intact.

5

Select the destination file.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

Select NEW when creating a new file.

6

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Name screen.

CAUTION

•While data is being saved,

never eject the floppy disk

or turn off power to the

PSR-550.

•If there isn’t enough space

on the disk, an alert

message appears and you

will not be able to save any

data. You can delete

unneeded files on the disk

(page 67), or replace the

disk with a new one and

repeat the Save operation.

•If a write error occurs during

a save operation, an alert

message appears. If the

error reoccurs after repeating

the Save operation, there

could be something wrong

with the disk. Insert a

different disk in the drive and

repeat the Save operation.

7

Enter the file name directly from the keyboard (page 21).

8

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Save operation

screen.

9

Execute the Save operation.

Press the [+/YES] button to execute the Save operation.

Press the [-/NO] button to abort the Save operation.

All Save all User Style (113-115), User Pad (bank 41-44), Registra-

tion Memory (bank 01-32) and all setup data into one single file.

Sty + Reg Save all User Style (113-115) and Registration Memory (bank 01-

32) data gathered together into one single file.

Style Save all User Style (113-115) data gathered together into one

single file.

Multi Pad Save all User Pad (bank 41-44) data gathered together into one

single file.

Regist Save all Registration Memory (bank 01-32) data gathered

together into one single file.

Sv =NEW

Sv Name=UF_00002

Save OK?

The Save operation is completed...

Executing 45%

Completed

59

62

Disk Operations

Load

After saving User style (107-109), User pad (banks 37-40) and Registration Memory

(bank 01-32) data to a floppy disk, you can reload them into the PSR-550.

1

Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive.

2

Press the [LOAD] button.

3

Select the file to be loaded.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

4

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Data Type Selection

screen.

5

Select the file type (data type) to be loaded.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

Please follow the steps as indicated in the chart above, since the actual opera-

tion differs depending on the selected file type.

Ld =ABCD .USR

Ld Type:All

File types that can be loaded

All To Step 10

Sty + Reg To Step 10

Style To Step 6

Multi Pad To Step 6

Regist To Step 6

60

63

Disk Operations

6

Press the [NEXT] button.

7

Select the data to be loaded.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

8

Press the [NEXT] button to display the destination selection

screen.

9

Select the destination.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

10

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Load operation

screen.

11

Execute the Load operation.

Press the [+/YES] button to execute the Load operation.

Press the [-/NO] button to abort the Load operation.

CAUTION

•When data is loaded from

a floppy disk to the PSR-

550, the data already in the

memory of the instrument

will be replaced by the

data on the disk. Save

important data into a disk

file before doing the Load

operation.

•While data is loading,

never eject the floppy disk

or turn the power off.

•An alert message may

appear on the display, if a

problem occurs that prevents

the data from being loaded.

(For example, the capacity of

the PSR-550 [RAM] may be

exceeded, something may

be wrong with the floppy

disk, or the data from the

disk may be corrupted, etc.)

Src=User8BeatPop

Dst=UserStyle1

Load OK?

The Load Operation is completed...

Executing 45%

Completed

61

64

Disk Operations

Song Copy

This operation allows you to make backup copies of your important Song data. Prima-

rily, this will come in handy when you are recording and editing song data. For

example, if you are quantizing the track of a song (page 86) — which makes perma-

nent changes to the track — making a backup copy of the song allows you to restore

the original song data in case you’re not satisfied with the results of the quantization.

Having a dedicated backup disk for every song you work on is a good idea. In this

way, you can save a new copy of the song each time you make an important edit to it.

Copying song data from one floppy disk to another

Prepare a backup disk by formatting it. One file can be copied at a time. As shown in

the illustration below, first copy the desired file on the disk to internal memory, then

copy it to the destination disk.

If the quantity of data is large, it may be necessary for the data to be copied in parts.

•When the destination disk’s

write-protect tab is set to ON

(page 58) or the disk is a

purposely “copy-protected”

disk, an alert message

appears indicating that the

Song Copy function is not

possible.

1

Insert the disk to be copied (source disk) into the disk drive.

2

Press the [UTILITY] button.

3

Select “SongCopy”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

4

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Copy Type selection

screen.

5

Select “OtherFD”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

6

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Song selection

screen.

Utility:SongCopy

CopyType:OtherFD

PSR-550

Internal Memory

copycopy

Source Destination

62

65

Disk Operations

7

Select the source song file.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

8

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Name screen.

9

Enter the destination song name directly from the keyboard

(page 21).

10

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Copy operation

screen.

11

Execute the Copy operation.

Press the [+/YES] button to execute the Copy operation.

Press the [-/NO] button to abort the Copy operation.

•If you insert a wrong disk,

different from the source or

destination disk, during the

Copy operation, an alert

message (page 137) will

appear on the display.

Src=Song_01

Copy OK?

Cursor

_–Dst=Song 01

Insert Target FD

Executing 20%

Executing 40%

Completed

Insert Source FD

While data is being copied, never

eject the floppy disk or turn the

power off.

If you want to cancel the Copy

function in this step, press the [EXIT]

button to cancel the operation.

While data is being copied, never

eject the floppy disk or turn the

power off.

If you want to cancel the Copy function in

this step, press the [EXIT] button to

cancel the operation.

The Copy operation

is completed...

Insert the

Source disk.

Copying the data from the

Source disk to Internal memory

Insert the

Destination disk.

Copying the data from Internal

memory to the Destination disk

CAUTION

CAUTION

If the quantity of

data is large, it

may be necessary

for the data to be

copied in parts.

63

66

Disk Operations

Copying data to another location on the same disk

1

-

4

Use the same operation as in “Copying data from one

floppy disk to another” (page 64).

5

Select “Same FD”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

6

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Song selection

screen.

7

Select the song source file.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

8

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Name screen.

9

Enter the destination file name directly from the keyboard

(page 21).

10

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Copy operation

screen.

11

Execute the Copy operation.

Press the [+/YES] button to execute the Copy operation.

Press the [-/NO] button to abort the Copy operation.

CAUTION

•While data is being copied,

never eject the floppy disk

or turn the power off.

CopyType:Same FD

Src=Song_01

Copy OK?

The Copy Operation is completed...

Executing 49%

Completed

64

Cursor

_–Dst=Song 01

67

Disk Operations

Delete

You can delete individual files (User songs, User styles, User pads or Registra-

tion Memory) from the floppy disk.

1

Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive.

3

Select “Delete”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

4

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Delete screen.

5

Select the file to be deleted.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

6

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Delete operation

screen.

7

Execute the Delete operation.

Press the [+/YES] button to execute the Delete operation.

Press the [-/NO] button to abort the Delete operation.

Utility:Delete

Del=ABCD .USR

Delete OK?

•When the floppy disk’s write-

protect tab is set to ON

(page 58) or the disk is a

purposely “copy-protected”

disk, an alert message

appears indicating that the

Delete function is not

possible.

2

Press the [UTILITY] button.

The Delete Operation is completed...

Executing 49%

Completed

CAUTION

•While the file is being

deleted, never eject the

floppy disk or turn the

power off.

65

68

Disk Song Playback

Song Playback

1

Insert the disk that contains song data into the disk drive.

PSR-550 will automatically switch into Song mode.

•If a disk has already been

inserted into the drive, press

the [SONG] button to call up

the Song display.

•Inserting a disk that does not

contain song data will not

automatically call up the

Song display.

2

Select the desired song.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the number buttons

[1]-[0].

3

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Song Menu screen.

You can playback a huge variety of songs on the PSR-550, including the preset demo songs, the songs

on the included data disk, the User songs that you record to a floppy disk and songs on commercially

available XG/GM song collection disks. Except for the preset demo songs, a floppy disk must be inserted

in the disk drive to playback a song.

You can play back song files collected on these disks using the

voices defined in the GM standard.

You can play back songs using the XG format, an extension of the

GM standardthat allows for much higher sound quality.

You can play back song files collected on these disks using the

voices defined in Yamaha’s DOC format.

●The following disks are compatible for playback on the PSR-550 (including the

data disk). Refer to page 9 for more details on the logos.

●Disk songs can be played back in five different ways: ..................... page 69

• SINGLE

• SINGLE REPEAT

• ALL

• ALL REPEAT

• RANDOM

●Additional song playback functions:

• Song Track Muting ................................................................. page 70

• Tempo/Tap ............................................................................. page 36

• Song Volume Control............................................................. page 70

• Song Transpose .................................................................... page 73

• Playing from a Specified Measure......................................... page 71

• Repeat Play ........................................................................... page 72

•Make sure to read the

section “Using the Floppy

Disk Drive (FDD) and

Floppy Disks” on page 58.

•The tempo setting of some

commercially available disk

songs is fixed. These songs

are called “free-tempo

software”. When playing

back free-tempo song data

on the PSR-550, the Tempo

display shows “- - -” and the

beat display does not flash.

Also, the measure number in

the display does not match

the actual measure number

of playback, and only gives

you an indication of how

much of the song has played

back.

CHORD

dim

mM

6

7

augsus4

119

513

BACK NEXT

KEYBOARD

START/STOP

/YES

TRACK(1~16)

PART DIAL

0~9

SONG

STYLE

VOICE LR12

EASY

NAVIGATOR

001 CLUB XG

_

MUSIC DATABASE

002 TECHNO

66

69

Disk Song Playback

4

Select “PlayMode”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

5

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Song Play Mode

screen.

6

Select the desired Play mode.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

● Single ................................... Play through the selected song, then stop.

● SglRepeat (Single Repeat) .. Play through the selected song repeatedly.

● All ......................................... Continue playback through all the songs on the floppy

disk.

● All Repeat ............................. Continue playback through all the songs on the floppy

disk repeatedly.

● Random ................................ Continue playback through all the songs at random.

7

Press the [START/STOP] button to start the song.

8

Press the [START/STOP] button again to stop the song.

SngMenu:PlayMode

PlayMd=Single

PlayMd=SglRepeat

1

REC

2

REC

3

REC

4

REC

5

REC

6

REC

7

REC

8

REC

9

REC

10

REC

11

REC

12

REC

13

REC

14

REC

15

REC

16

REC

TRANSPOSE REGIST-

RATION TEMPO MEASURE BEAT

002 TECHNO

DSP(FAST)

SUSTAIN HARMONY

TOUCH

CHORD

dim

mM

6

7

augsus4

119

513

BACK NEXT

KEYBOARD

START/STOP

/YES

TRACK(1~16)

PART DIAL

0~9

SONG

STYLE

VOICE LR12

EASY

NAVIGATOR

MUSIC DATABASE

67

70

Disk Song Playback

Song Track Muting

1

Press the [START/STOP] button to start the song.

2

Press one of the TRACK buttons below the display.

The [M] icon will appear and the selected track will be muted.

Pressing the same track button again enables output of the playback sound.

3

Press the [START/STOP] button again to stop the song.

Song Volume Control

1

Press the [START/STOP] to start the song.

2

Press the [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] button.

3

Adjust the Song Volume.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the number buttons

[1]-[0].

The range is from 0 to 127.

•The volume of the keyboard-

played voice(s) is not

affected by this operation.

4

Press the [START/STOP] button again to stop the song.

CHORD

dim

mM

6

7

augsus4

119

513

BACK NEXT

KEYBOARD

START/STOP

/YES

TRACK(1~16)

PART DIAL

0~9

SONG

STYLE

VOICE LR12

EASY

NAVIGATOR

Song Volume =120

MUSIC DATABASE

CHORD

dim

mM

6

7

augsus4

119

513

BACK NEXT

KEYBOARD

START/STOP

/YES

TRACK(1~16)

PART DIAL

0~9

SONG

STYLE

VOICE LR12

EASY

NAVIGATOR

Song Volume =108

MUSIC DATABASE

1

REC

2

REC

3

REC

4

REC

5

REC

6

REC

7

REC

8

REC

9

REC

10

REC

11

REC

12

REC

13

REC

14

REC

15

REC

16

REC

TRANSPOSE REGIST-

RATION TEMPO MEASURE BEAT

DSP(FAST)

SUSTAIN HARMONY

TOUCH

11

68

71

Disk Song Playback

Playing from a Specified Measure

1

Press the [SONG] button.

2

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Song Menu screen.

3

Select “Measure”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

4

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Song Start Measure

screen.

5

Specify the measure from which to begin playback.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the number buttons

[1]-[0].

6

Press the [START/STOP] to start the song from the specified

measure.

7

Press the [START/STOP] button again to stop the song.

StartMeasure= 1

SngMenu:Measure

StartMeasure= 12

69

72

Disk Song Playback

Repeat Play (A-B Repeat)

1

Press the [SONG] button.

2

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Song Menu screen.

3

Select “AbRepeat”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

4

Press the [NEXT] to display the Repeat screen.

5

Press the [START/STOP] button to start the song.

6

Press the [MAIN A] button or the [+/YES] button at the start-

ing point (A) to be repeated.

7

Press the [MAIN B] button or the [+/YES] button at the ending

point (B) to be repeated.

•If only the “A” repeat point is

specified, repeat playback

will occur between the “A”

point and the end of the

song.

Repeat playback is now set, and the selected section automatically repeats

indefinitely (until disabled or stopped in the steps below).

8

To cancel the repeat function and continue song playback,

press the [MAIN A] button again, or press the [-/NO] button.

9

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop the song.

•Repeat playback will be

cancelled if a different song

is selected.

A-B Repeat =Off

SngMenu:AbRepeat

A-B Repeat =A-

A-B Repeat =A-B

70

73

Disk Song Playback

Song Transpose

1

Press the [SONG] button.

2

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Song Menu screen.

•This operation does not

affect the pitch of the

keyboard-played voice(s)

•Changes made to the

transpose setting (on page

30) affect the entire sound of

the PSR-550, including the

song transpose setting.

•Enabling the record mode to

record a User song

automatically resets the song

transpose setting to “0”.

3

Select “S.Trans”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

4

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Song Transpose

screen.

5

Set the Transpose value.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the number buttons

[1]-[0].

The transpose range is from -12 to +12. Each step corresponds to one semitone,

allowing a maximum upward or downward transposition of one octave. A

setting of “0” produces normal pitch.

•Minus values can be entered

by using the number buttons

while holding the [-] button.

6

Press the [START/STOP] to start the song.

7

Press the [START/STOP] button again to stop the song.

•Steps #1 through #5 can be

executed during playback.

SongTranspos= 0

SngMenu:S.Trans

SongTranspos= 4

71

74

72

Part Settings

In addition to the keyboard-played voices, the PSR-550 features many different instrumental “parts,”

included with the auto accompaniment, and song playback.

Use the following functions to change the settings for each part:

● Voice Change ........................................................................................................................ page 75

This lets you change the voice for each part.

● Mixer...................................................................................................................................... page 76

This lets you change the following settings for each part:

• Volume

Determines the volume of the specified voice or track.

• Octave

Shifts the pitch of the specified voice or track up or down by one or two octaves.

A setting of “0” produces normal pitch.

• Pan

Positions the sound of the specified voice or track from left to right in the stereo

sound field. “-7” is full left, “7” is full right, “0” is center, and all other settings are

corresponding positions in between.

• Reverb depth

Sets the reverb depth for the specified voice or track, and thus the amount of

reverb effect applied to that voice or track.

• Chorus depth

Sets the chorus depth for the specified voice or track, and thus the amount of

chorus effect applied to that voice or track.

• DSP depth

Sets the DSP depth for the specified voice or track, and thus the amount of DSP

effect applied to that voice or track.

The parameters which can be set for each part are shown in the chart below.

● Style mode

Part

Keyboard VOICE R1

VOICE R2

VOICE L

Auto Accompaniment RHYTHM SUB

RHYTHM MAIN

BASS

CHORD1

CHORD2

PAD

PHRASE1

PHRASE2

● Song mode

Part

Keyboard VOICE R1

VOICE R2

VOICE L

Song TRACK1

TRACK2

TRACK3

TRACK4

:

TRACK15

TRACK16

● Parameters

Parameter Voice Style Song Range Function

R1, R2, L

Voice number O O O Refer to the Voice Voice Change

List (page 123)

Volume O O O 0 – 127 Mixer

Octave O – O -2 – 2 Mixer

Pan O O O -64 – 63 Mixer

Reverb depth O O O 0 – 127 Mixer

Chorus depth O O O 0 – 127 Mixer

DSP depth O O O 0 – 127 Mixer

O : available

75

73

● Voice R1, R2, L

•When one of the DSP types belonging to the Insertion Effect (page

50) is selected, the effect will be exclusively applied to the Voice R1

and not to the Voice R2/L. Therefore the DSP depth for the Voice R2/

L cannot be changed. Also, the DSP depth for the Voice R1 cannot be

altered depending on the selected Insertion Effect type.

•Save any part settings you want to keep to the PSR-550 Registration

Memory (page 54). The voice part settings are temporary and will be

lost if the power is turned off, a different R1 panel voice is selected

while the Voice Set function (page 120) is on, or a Registration

Memory is recalled.

● Song

•Make sure to first select the appropriate song for which you wish to

set the part before calling up the relevant display.

•Any part settings made for the song will be lost if you turn off the

power, select another song, or select the Style mode (after finishing

the part settings). To prevent this, make sure to select the Recording

mode and save the song data to disk (page 78).

● Auto Accompaniment

•Only drum kit voices (page 31) can be selected for the RHYTHM

MAIN track.

•When using auto accompaniment part settings for the RHYTHM SUB

track, any of the voices can be selected but no chord changes will

occur when using Auto Accompaniment.

•Make sure to first select the appropriate style for which you wish to

set the part before calling up the relevant display.

•Auto accompaniment part settings can even be set while an

accompaniment is playing.

•Auto accompaniment part settings affects all sections of the selected

style.

•Save any part settings you want to keep to the PSR-550 Registration

Memory (page 54). The Auto accompaniment part setting are

temporary and will be lost if the power is turned off, a different style is

selected while the Voice Set function (page 120) is on, or a

Registration Memory is recalled.

Voice Change

In addition to being able to change the voices played from the keyboard (R1, R2, L),

you can also change the voices for each track of the auto accompaniment and songs.

1

Press the [VOICE CHANGE] button.

The [VOICE CHANGE] lamp lights.

2

Select the part for which you want to change voices.

Parts can be selected from the following buttons (depending on the selected

mode: Style or Song):

● Voice ................................. PART ON/OFF [VOICE R1], [VOICE R2], [VOICE L]

buttons

● Accompaniment track ....... [TRACK9]-[TRACK16] buttons (Style mode)

● Song track ......................... [TRACK1]-[TRACK16] button (Song mode)

3

Select a voice.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the number buttons

[1]-[0].

Refer to the Voice List (page 123).

4

Repeat steps #2 and #3 as often as needed for other parts/

tracks.

5

Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Voice Change screen.

Part Settings

RhM=220 StndKit1

76

74

Mixer

1

Press the [MIXER] button so that its indicator lights.

2

Select the part for which you want to adjust the volume set-

ting or parameters.

Parts can be selected from the following buttons (depending on the selected

mode: Style or Song):

● Voice ................................. PART ON/OFF [VOICE R1], [VOICE R2], [VOICE L]

buttons

● Accompaniment track ....... [TRACK9] - [TRACK16] buttons (Style mode)

● Song track ......................... [TRACK1] - [TRACK16] button (Song mode)

Part Settings

● Style mode

Volume R1 =120

Volume R2 =120

Volume L =120

Volume RhS=120

Volume RhM=120

Volume Bas=120

Volume Cd1=120

Volume Cd2=120

Volume Pad=120

Volume Ph1=120

Volume Ph2=120

Volume R1 =120

Volume R2 =120

Volume L =120

Volume T01=120

Volume T02=120

Volume T16=120

● Song mode

PART ON/OFF [VOICE R1] Voice R1

PART ON/OFF [VOICE R2] Voice R2

PART ON/OFF [VOICE L] Voice L

[TRACK 9] Rhythm sub

PART ON/OFF [VOICE R1] Voice R1

PART ON/OFF [VOICE R2] Voice R2

PART ON/OFF [VOICE L] Voice L

[TRACK 10] Rhythm main

[TRACK 11] Bass

[TRACK 12] Chord 1

[TRACK 13] Chord 2

[TRACK 14] Pad

[TRACK 15] Phrase 1

[TRACK 16] Phrase 2

[TRACK 1] Song track 1

[TRACK 2] Song track 2

[TRACK 16] Song track 16

77

Volume R2 =108

Octave R2 = 2

Pan R2 = 40

RevDepth R2 =120

ChoDepth R2 =108

DspDepth R2 =112

[NEXT] button [BACK] button

75

3

Select the desired parameter by pressing the [NEXT]/[BACK]

button.

Part Settings

•The Octave parameter of

the style tracks cannot be

edited.

•Minus settings for the Octave

and Pan parameters can be

directly entered by pressing

the appropriate number

button while holding the

[-/NO] button.

4

Adjust the volume or parameters.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

The order of Steps 2 and 3 here can be reversed; you can also select the part

after selecting the parameter. (In step #2 above, the Volume parameter is

shown as an example; however, any of the other parameters shown in step #3

can be selected.)

5

Repeat steps 2 to 4, as necessary.

6

Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Mixer.

[NEXT] button [BACK] button

[NEXT] button [BACK] button

[NEXT] button [BACK] button

[NEXT] button [BACK] button

78

76

Song Recording

With the powerful and easy-to-use song recording features, you can record

your own keyboard performances to a floppy disk as a User song, and create

your own complete, fully orchestrated compositions.

Each User song lets you record up to sixteen independent tracks. These

include not only the voices for the keyboard performance (R1, R2, L), but also

the auto accompaniment parts.

The PSR-550 provides two different ways to record: Quick Recording and Multi Track Recording. In addition,

comprehensive editing functions let you “fine tune” the recorded song data.

● Quick Recording .................................................................................................................. page 80

With this method, you can quickly and easily record a song, without having to make

detailed settings.

● Multi Track Recording .......................................................................................................... page 82

With this method, you can record up to sixteen tracks independently, and even re-

record parts that have been previously recorded.

• Punch In/Out ...................................................................................................................... page 84

This function allows you to selectively re-record a portion of a song track (the

measures between the specified punch-in and punch-out points.

• Start Measure .................................................................................................................... page 84

This determines the measure at which recording starts. Set this when you

desire to start the recording in the middle of the song when re-recording. Keep

in mind that all previously recorded data from the starting measure is replaced.

● Editing ................................................................................................................................... page 86

The four editing features below allow you to edit already recorded song data.

• Quantize............................................................................................................................. page 86

This function aligns the timing of the recorded note data to a specified value.

• Editing Setup Data ............................................................................................................. page 88

This function allows you to change a variety of non-note settings.

• Naming User Songs ........................................................................................................... page 90

This function assigns a twelve-letter name to a recorded song.

• Clearing User Song Data ................................................................................................... page 91

This function lets you delete song data, either a specified part or the entire song.

After finishing your recording of a User song, you can play it back in the same way as one of the disk songs.

•User Songs are recorded on

floppy disks. They cannot be

recorded unless a floppy disk

is inserted into the disk drive.

■ Data that can be recorded to User songs

• Tempo ..................................................................................................... page 36

• Time signature ........................................................................................ page 16

• Accompaniment style number ................................................................ page 32

• Section changes and their timing ........................................................... page 34

• Chord changes and their timing ............................................................. page 33

• Accompaniment volume ......................................................................... page 37

• Note on/off (key press and release) ..................................................... page 107

• Velocity (strength of key press) ............................................................ page 107

• Pitch bend, pitch bend range ........................................................pages 30, 122

• Footswitch on/off .................................................................................. page 121

• Voice Change settings ............................................................................ page 75

• Mixer settings ......................................................................................... page 76

• Reverb type and settings........................................................................ page 46

• Chorus type and settings ....................................................................... page 48

• DSP (including FAST/SLOW) on/off and type ........................................ page 49

• Harmony/Echo on/off and type............................................................... page 50

• Scale tuning ......................................................................................... page 119

• Sustain on/off ......................................................................................... page 30

•Songs recorded by the PSR-

550 are saved as SMF

(format 0) files. See page

109 for information on the

SMF (format 0) format.

•Being able to record note on/

off and velocity means being

able to record forte or piano,

crescendo or diminuendo,

and other subtle elements of

expression from the

keyboard as you play them.

•Note ON (key press), note

OFF (key release), and

velocity (strength of key

press) are MIDI data events

(playing information) (page

107).

The maximum amount of song memory is 65,000 notes for 2DD disks and 130,000

notes for 2HD disks.

79

77

■ User Song Tracks

The tracks which can be recorded to the User songs are organized as shown in the

chart below.

The following notes and

cautions are important

points for you to keep in

mind as you record.

•Using the Metronome

function (page 118) can

make your recording

sessions much more

efficient.

•Using Registration Memory

(page 54) can make your

recording sessions much

more efficient, since various

settings (such as voices,

etc.) can be recalled by a

single button press.

When the record mode is

engaged, the Registration

Memory Freeze function will

be turned on (it cannot be

turned off while the record

mode is engaged).

•When the record mode is

engaged, the Synchro Stop

function will be turned off (it

cannot be turned on while

the record mode is

engaged).

•Whenever you record, any

previously recorded material

in the same track will be

erased.

•Song files on commercially

available disks which are not

write-protected can be

selected and recorded to

(edited) on the PSR-550. If

the song data is of a different

format from that of the PSR-

550 User songs, the display

prompts you to convert the

song data. By pressing the

[+/YES] button, you can

convert the song data to the

PSR-550 format (compatible

with the PSR-550). Once the

conversion operation is

finished, the PSR-550

returns to record standby,

allowing you to record.

•If the disk memory becomes

full while recording, an alert

message will appear on the

display and recording will

stop.

•Be careful to avoid turning

off the power or unplugging

the AC adaptor from the

outlet during recording, since

this will result in the loss of

recorded data.

The PSR-550 provides two different ways to record: Quick Recording and Multi Track

Recording.

● About Multi Track Recording

In Multi Track Recording, you determine the track assignments (as shown above)

before recording. Several tracks can be recorded simultaneously. In addition to

being able to record to empty tracks, you can also re-record tracks that already

contain recorded data.

● About Quick Recording

In Quick Recording, you can quickly record without having to worry about the

track assignments above. Quick Recording automatically makes track assign-

ments according to the simple rules below.

• When Record method is set to “Melody”

Your keyboard performances (VOICE R1, R2, L) are recorded to tracks

1 - 3.

• When Record method is set to “Acmp”

The auto accompaniment parts are recorded to tracks 9 - 16.

• When Record method is set to “Melody + Acmp”

Your keyboard performances (VOICE R1 and R2) are recorded to tracks

1 - 2, and the auto accompaniment parts are recorded to tracks 9 -16.

The Quick Recording method is different from the Multi Track Recording method;

however, for both of them, the recorded data is recorded on tracks 1–16.

If you wish to re-record a User song that was originally recorded by the Quick

Recording method, use Multi Track Recording.

Song Recording

Track Other Parts that can be set Default Part

1 VOICE R1, R2, L, Accompaniment Style track VOICE R1

2 VOICE R1, R2, L, Accompaniment Style track VOICE R2

3 VOICE R1, R2, L, Accompaniment Style track VOICE L

4 VOICE R1, R2, L, Accompaniment Style track VOICE R1

5 VOICE R1, R2, L, Accompaniment Style track VOICE R1

6 VOICE R1, R2, L, Accompaniment Style track VOICE R1

7 VOICE R1, R2, L, Accompaniment Style track VOICE R1

8 VOICE R1, R2, L, Accompaniment Style track VOICE R1

9 VOICE R1, R2, L, Accompaniment Style track

Accompaniment Style RHYTHM SUB

10 VOICE R1, R2, L, Accompaniment Style track

Accompaniment Style RHYTHM MAIN

11 VOICE R1, R2, L, Accompaniment Style track Accompaniment Style BASS

12 VOICE R1, R2, L, Accompaniment Style track Accompaniment Style CHORD1

13 VOICE R1, R2, L, Accompaniment Style track Accompaniment Style CHORD2

14 VOICE R1, R2, L, Accompaniment Style track Accompaniment Style PAD

15 VOICE R1, R2, L, Accompaniment Style track Accompaniment Style PHRASE1

16 VOICE R1, R2, L, Accompaniment Style track Accompaniment Style PHRASE2

80

001 New Song

RecMenu:Song

SongRec:QuickRec

Rec Tr =Melody

78

Quick Recording

1

Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive.

2

Press the [RECORD] button to engage the Record mode.

3

Select “Song”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

4

Press the [NEXT] button.

5

Press the [NEXT] button again to display the RecMode

screen.

6

Select “QuickRec”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

7

Press the [NEXT] button.

8

Select a Record method.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

● Melody .................... This records your keyboard performance (Voices R1/R2/L)

without the auto accompaniment.

● Acmp ....................... This records only the auto accompaniment. When this is

selected, the auto accompaniment is automatically set to on.

● Mel + Acmp ............. This records your keyboard performance (Voices R1/R2)

along with the auto accompaniment. When this is selected,

auto accompaniment is automatically set to on.

Song Recording

81

BEAT

Song Recording

Sv?:SONG 001.MID

–

79

9

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Record ready screen.

The beat indicator dots will flash at the currently set tempo, indicating that the

record ready (Synchro Start) mode is engaged.

10

Start recording.

• If you’ve selected [Melody] or [Mel + Acmp] in step #8 above, recording

starts as soon as you play a key.

• If you’ve selected [Acmp] in step #8 above, the auto accompaniment and

recording start simultaneously as soon as a chord is played in the auto

accompaniment section of the keyboard (the left side of the split point).

• Recording can also be started by pressing the [START/STOP] button.

•Auto accompaniment cannot

be turned on or off during

recording.

11

Stop recording.

• If you’ve selected [Melody] in step #8 above, press the [START/STOP]

button.

• If you’ve selected [Acmp] or [Mel + Acmp] in step #8 above, press the

[START/STOP] button or the [ENDING] button. If you press the [END-

ING] button while recording the auto accompaniment track, recording will

stop automatically after the ending section has finished.

12

Select whether to save the newly recorded data to disk or

not.

• To cancel the save operation (for example, when you wish to redo the record-

ing), press the [-/NO] button and re-record starting with step #8 above, after

the display returns to the Track selection screen.

• To save the data to disk, press the [+/YES] button.

13

Press the [RECORD] button to exit from the Record mode.

CAUTION

•While the file is being

saved, never eject the

floppy disk or turn the

power off.

Song Recording

Executing 72%

Rec Tr =Melody

The Save operation is completed...

Song Rec Ready

82

001 New Song

SongRec:MultiRec

RecPart T01 =R1

80

Multi Track Recording

1

-

3

Use the same operation as in “Quick Recording” (page

80).

4

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Song selection

screen.

5

Press the [NEXT] button again to display the RecMode

screen.

6

Select “MultiRec”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

7

Press the [NEXT] button three times to display the PART

setting screen.

8

Select the desired track and part for recording.

1) Select a track.

Press one of the [TRACK1]-[TRACK16] buttons.

2) Select a part.

Use the data dial, the

[+/YES] button or the

[-/NO] button.

3) Set the desired track to

“Rec”.

Press the [NEXT] button

and use the data dial, the

[+/YES] button or the

[-/NO] button .

• Make all necessary settings to each track by repeating steps 1) through 3)

above.

•For information on track

assignments (page 79).

•To record auto accompani-

ment data, set the [ACMP]

button to ON.

•The same part cannot be set

to more than one track for

recording.

Song Recording

[NEXT] button

CHORD

dim

mM

6

7

augsus4

119

513

BACK NEXT

KEYBOARD

START/STOP

/YES

TRACK(1~16)

PART DIAL

0~9

SONG

STYLE

VOICE LR12

EASY

NAVIGATOR

RecPart T16 =RhM

CHORD

dim

mM

6

7

augsus4

119

513

BACK NEXT

KEYBOARD

START/STOP

/YES

TRACK(1~16)

PART DIAL

0~9

SONG

STYLE

VOICE LR12

EASY

NAVIGATOR

Rec/Ply T16 =Rec

MUSIC DATABASE

MUSIC DATABASE

[BACK] button

•For information on the punch

in and start measure

functions (page 84).

83

BEAT

Rehearsal

Sv?:SONG 001.MID

–

81

9

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Rehearsal screen.

Voices and styles can be set from this display. After completing the desired

settings, press the [EXIT] button to return to this display.

10

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Record Ready screen.

The beat indicator dots will flash at the currently set tempo, indicating that the

record ready (Synchro Start) mode is engaged.

11

Start recording.

• Recording starts as soon as you play a key on the keyboard.

• If you enabled the auto accompaniment track for recording (in steps #8

above), recording starts as soon as you play a chord in the auto accompani-

ment section of the keyboard (the left side of the split point).

• Recording can also be started by pressing the [START/STOP] button.

•Auto accompaniment cannot

be turned on or off during

recording.

12

Stop recording.

• If you did not enable the auto accompaniment track for recording (in steps #8

above), press the [START/STOP] button.

• If you enabled the auto accompaniment track for recording (in steps #8

above), press the [START/STOP] button or the [ENDING] button. If you

press the [ENDING] button while recording the auto accompaniment track,

recording will stop automatically after the ending section has finished.

13

Save the recorded data to the disk.

• To cancel the save operation (for example, when you wish to redo the record-

ing), press the [-/NO] button and re-record starting with step #8 above, after

the display returns to the Track setting screen.

• To save the data to disk, press the [+/YES] button.

14

Press the [RECORD] button to exit from the Record mode.

CAUTION

•While the file is being

saved, never eject the

floppy disk or turn the

power off.

Song Recording

Executing 72%

Rec/Ply T16 =Ply

The Save operation is completed...

Song Rec Ready

84

RecMenu:Song

002 SONG–001.MID

SongRec:MultiRec

12345678

12345678

Recording start

(Punch In) Recording stop

(Punch Out)

Previously

played data Newly played data Previously

played data

● Before re-recording

● After re-recording

82

Re-recording — Punch In/Out and Start Measure

This section shows you how to re-record a specific section of a already-recorded song.

In the eight-measure example below, the third measures through the fifth measure are

re-recorded.

1

Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive.

2

Press the [RECORD] button to engage the Record mode.

3

Select “Song”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

4

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Song selection

screen.

6

Press the [NEXT] button again to display the RecMode

screen.

7

Select “MultiRec”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

Song Recording

5

Select the Song you want to re-record.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

001 New Song

85

Punch In/Out=On

Punch In = 3

Punch Out = 5

RecStart Mes= 2

83

8

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Punch In/Out screen.

9

Select “On”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

10

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Punch In measure

screen.

11

Set the punch-in measure.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the number buttons

[1]-[0].

12

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Punch Out measure

screen.

13

Set the punch-out measure.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the number buttons

[1]-[0].

14

Press the [NEXT] button to display the START MEASURE

screen.

15

Set the start measure (the measure at which playback starts).

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the number buttons

[1]-[0].

•The punch-out measure

number cannot be set lower

than the punch-in measure

number.

16

Press the [NEXT] button to display the PART screen.

17

Record using the same operation as described in “Multi Track

Recording” on page 82, starting with step #7.

•Punch In/Out recording

cannot be used with the auto

accompaniment tracks.

•During recording you can

use the TRACK buttons to

turn playback of previously-

recorded tracks on or off as

required.

Song Recording

86

002 SONG–001.MID

SongRec:Edit

SngEdit:Quantize

QuantizTrack=T05

84

Quantize

Quantize lets you “clean up” or “tighten” the timing of a previously recorded track.

For example, the following musical passage has been written with exact quarter-note

and eighth-note values.

Even though you think you may have recorded the passage accurately, your actual

performance may be slightly ahead of or behind the beat (or both!). Quantize allows

you to align all the notes in a track so that the timing is absolutely accurate to the

specified note value.

1

-

4

Use the same operation as in “Re-recording” (page 84).

5

Select the Song file to be quantized.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

6

Press the [NEXT] button again to display the RecMode

screen.

7

Select “Edit”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

8

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Edit Menu screen.

9

Select “Quantize”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

10

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Track selection screen.

11

Select the track to be quantized.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

Song Recording

87

Quantize OK?

QuantizSize=1/4

85

12

Press the [NEXT] button.

13

Select the Quantize size (resolution).

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

Set the Quantize resolution to correspond to the smallest notes in the track you

are working with. For example, if the data was recorded with both quarter notes

and eighth notes, use 1/8 for the quantize resolution. If the quantize function is

applied in this case with the resolution set to 1/4, the eighth notes would be

moved on top of the quarter notes.

14

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Quantize operation

screen.

15

Press the [+/YES] button to execute the Quantize operation.

To abort the Quantize operation, press the [-/NO] button.

CAUTION

•While the Quantize

operation is being

executed, never eject the

floppy disk or turn the

power off.

16

Press the [RECORD] button to exit from the Record mode.

Song Recording

● Quantize size

Size Note

1/4 Quarter note

1/6 Quarter note triplet

1/8 Eighth note

1/12 Eighth note triplet

1/16 Sixteenth note

1/24 Sixteenth note triplet

1/32 Thirty-second note

One measure of 8th notes before quantization

After quantization

The Quantize operation is completed...

Executing 84%

Completed

•You cannot restore the

original data once you’ve

executed the Quantize

operation. If space exists on

the disk, save the original

song data (as a backup),

then use Quantize. If you

don’t like the results, you can

reload the backup song data.

88

002 UserSong1

SongRec:Edit

SngEdit:Setup Dt

86

Editing Setup Data

This function lets you make changes to various setup data (voice-related parameters)

for each track of a recorded song. The following parameters can be edited:

● Voice ................................. Assigns a voice number to the specified track.

● Volume .............................. Sets the volume of the specified track.

● Octave ............................... Shifts the pitch of the specified track up or down by

one or two octaves. A setting of “0” produces normal

pitch.

● Pan .................................... Positions the sound of the specified track from left to

right in the stereo sound field. A setting of “-7” is full

left, “7” is full right, “0” is center, and all other settings

are corresponding positions in between.

● Reverb depth..................... Sets the reverb depth for the specified track, and thus

the amount of reverb effect applied to that voice or

track.

● Chorus depth .................... Sets the chorus depth for the specified track, and thus

the amount of chorus effect applied to that voice or

track.

● DSP depth......................... Sets the DSP depth for the specified track, and thus

the amount of DSP effect applied to that voice or track.

•Only one of the Setup

parameters can be recorded

to each track, and any

parameter changes made in

the middle of the song will be

cancelled. However, in the

case of Volume data, any

Volume changes in the

middle of the song are

applied as an offset to the

initial Setup Data setting.

1

-

4

Use the same operation as in “Re-recording” (page 84).

5

Select the file (song) for which you wish to change the setup

data.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

6

Press the [NEXT] button again to display the RecMode

screen.

7

Select “Edit”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button .

8

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Edit Menu screen.

9

Select “Setup Dt”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

10

Press the [NEXT] button to display the setup data screen.

Song Recording

89

87

11

Edit the setup data.

Press the [NEXT] and [BACK] buttons to switch among the displays (as

shown below).

• Select a track by pressing one of the [TRACK1]-[TRACK16] buttons.

• Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the number

buttons [1]-[0] to change the desired values in each display.

12

Press the [NEXT] button to display the setup data saving

screen.

13

Save the changed data to the floppy disk.

• To cancel the save operation (if you wish to redo any edits), press the [-/NO]

button and continue editing.

• To save the data to disk, press the [+/YES] button.

14

Press the [RECORD] button to exit from the Record mode.

CAUTION

• While the file is being

saved, never eject the

floppy disk or turn the

power off.

Song Recording

The Save operation is completed...

Executing 84%

Completed

•Minus settings for the Octave

and Pan parameters can be

directly entered by pressing

the appropriate number

button while holding the

[-/NO] button.

T01=001 GrandPno

Volume T01=108

Octave T01= 1

Pan T01= 63

RevDepth T01= 49

ChoDepth T01= 89

DspDepth T01= 89

[BACK] button[NEXT] button

• Voice

• Volume

• Octave

• Pan

• Reverb depth

• Chorus depth

• DSP depth

[BACK] button[NEXT] button

[BACK] button[NEXT] button

[BACK] button[NEXT] button

[BACK] button[NEXT] button

[BACK] button[NEXT] button

Setup Data OK?

90

002 UserSong1

SongRec:Edit

SngEdit:Name

Nam=UserSong1_

88

cursor

Naming User Songs

1

-

4

Use the same operation as in “Re-recording” (page 84).

5

Select the file (song) for which you wish to change the name.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

6

Press the [NEXT] button again to display the RecMode

screen.

7

Select “Edit”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

8

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Edit Menu screen.

9

Select “Name”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

10

Press the [NEXT] button to display the NAME screen.

11

Enter the desired name for the file (song).

Use the keyboard to enter the name (page 21).

Up to 12 letters or characters can be used. (The three-letter extension cannot be

changed.)

12

Press the [RECORD] button to exit from the Record mode.

Song Recording

91

SngEdit:Clear

Clear Track =T13

Clear Track OK?

89

Clearing User Song Data

1

-

4

Use the same operation as in “Re-recording” (page 84).

5

Select the song file to be cleared.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

6

Press the [NEXT] button again to display the RecMode

screen.

7

Select “Edit”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

8

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Edit Menu screen.

9

Select “Clear”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

10

Press the [NEXT] button.

11

Select the track to be cleared.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

To clear the data of an entire song, select “ALL”.

12

Press the [NEXT] button.

13

Press the [+/YES] button to execute the Clear operation.

To abort the Clear operation, press the [-/NO] button.

14

Press the [RECORD] button to exit from the Record mode.

CAUTION

•While the track is being

cleared, never eject the

floppy disk or turn the

power off.

Song Recording

The Clear operation is completed...

Executing 84%

Completed

92

90

• Material recorded data is

retained in memory even

when the STANDBY switch is

turned off if batteries are

installed or an AC adaptor is

connected (page 136). It is

nevertheless a good idea to

save important data to floppy

disk so that you can keep

them indefinitely and build up

your own data library (page

60).

Multi Pad Recording

Your keyboard performance (using voice R1) is recorded to the User pad. Chord

Match data (page 43) can also be recorded.

• Multi Pad Recording................................................................................ page 92

• Chord Match ........................................................................................... page 94

• Naming User Pads .................................................................................. page 94

• Clearing User Pad Data .......................................................................... page 95

In addition to the preset Multi Pad sets, the PSR-550 has 16 user-recordable sets that you can use to

store your own creations. These original User Multi Pads can be played and used in the same way as

the presets. User Multi Pad data can also be saved to and loaded from floppy disk.

■ Data that can be recorded to User pads

• Note on/off (key press and release)

• Velocity (strength of key press)

• Pitch bend, pitch bend range

• SUSTAIN button on/off

• Footswitch on/off (sustain, sostenuto, soft)

• Voice Change settings

• Mixer settings

Up to approximately 2,000 notes for all pads can be recorded to the PSR-550 Multi

Pads.

• User Pad data is recorded by

playing voice R1 from the

keyboard. Voice R2, voice L

and the auto accompaniment

cannot be used.

Multi Pad Recording

1

Press the [RECORD] button to engage the Record mode.

2

Select “MultiPad”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

3

Press the [NEXT] button.

4

Select a Multi Pad Bank to record.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

RecMenu:MultiPad

PadBank=UserPad1

The following notes and

cautions are important

points for you to keep in

mind as you record your

Multi Pad data.

• Using the Metronome

function (page 118) can

make your recording

sessions much more

efficient.

• Using Registration Memory

(page 54) can make your

recording sessions much

more efficient, since various

settings (such as voices,

etc.) can be recalled by a

single button press.

When the record mode is

engaged, the Registration

Memory Freeze function will

be turned on (it cannot be

turned off while the record

mode is engaged).

• Whenever you record, any

previously recorded material

in the same track will be

erased.

• If the memory becomes full

while recording, an alert

message will appear on the

display and recording will

stop.

• Be careful to avoid turning

off the power or unplugging

the AC adaptor from the

outlet during recording, since

this will result in the loss of

recorded data.

93

91

5

Press the [NEXT] button to display the RecMode screen.

6

Select “Record”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

7

Press the [NEXT] button to display the pad number selection

screen.

8

Select a Pad number to record.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button, or the MULTI PAD

buttons [1]-[4].

9

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Rehearsal screen.

Voices can be set from this display. After completing the desired settings, press

the [EXIT] button to return to this display.

10

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Record ready screen.

The beat indicator dots will flash at the currently set tempo, indicating that the

record ready (Synchro Start) mode is engaged.

11

Start recording.

• Recording starts as soon as you play a key on the keyboard.

• Recording can also be started by pressing the [START/STOP] button.

If you are recording a Chord match phrase, use only the CM7 scale tones (i.e. C,

D, E, G, A and B).

12

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop recording.

13

Press the [RECORD] button to exit from the Record mode.

Multi Pad Recording

M.Pad Recording

Rehearsal

Rec Pad =Pad1

M.Pad Rec:Record

BEAT

CSC CSC C = chord tone

C, S = scale tones

M.Pad Rec Ready

94

[BACK] button

CdMatch Pad1=Off

CdMatch Pad2=Off

[NEXT] button

92

Chord Match

1

-

5

Use the same operation as in “Multi Pad Recording”

(page 92).

6

Select “Edit”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

7

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Edit menu screen.

8

Select “ChdMatch”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

9

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Chord Match screen.

10

Turn the Chord Match function on or off.

• Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

• To select the desired pad for setting, press the [NEXT] button.

11

Press the [RECORD] button to exit from the Record mode.

Naming User Pads

1

-

7

Use the same operation as in “Chord Match” above.

8

Select “Name”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

9

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Name screen.

Multi Pad Recording

M.Pad Rec:Edit

PadEdit:ChdMatch

PadEdit:Name

[BACK] button[NEXT] button

95

93

10

Enter the desired name for the bank.

Use the keyboard to enter the name (page 21).

Up to eight letters or characters can be used.

11

Press the [RECORD] button to exit from the Record mode.

Clearing User Pad Data

1

-

7

Use the same operation as in “Chord Match” (page 94).

8

Select “Clear”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

10

Select the Pad number to be cleared.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

To clear the data from all four pads, select “All”.

11

Press the [NEXT] button.

12

Execute the Clear operation.

Press the [+/YES] button to execute the Clear operation.

To abort the Clear operation, press the [-/NO] button.

13

Press the [RECORD] button to exit from the Record mode.

Multi Pad Recording

–PadName=UserPad2

Clr Pad=Pad1

Clear Pad OK?

9

Press the [NEXT] button.

PadEdit:Clear

The Clear operation is completed...

Completed

Cursor

96

94

•Material recorded data is

retained in memory even

when the STANDBY switch is

turned off if batteries are

installed or an AC adaptor is

connected (page 136). It is

nevertheless a good idea to

save important data to floppy

disk so that you can keep

them indefinitely and build up

your own data library (page

60).

Style Recording

The PSR-550 lets you record up to three original User styles which can be

used for auto accompaniment in the same way as the preset styles. User Style

data can also be saved to and loaded from floppy disk (page 57).

You can create a User style by using the internal style data as a starting point.

Select a preset style that is closest to the type of style you want to create, and

record the auto accompaniment patterns to each section.

The PSR-550 provides two basic ways to record styles:

• Style Recording — Rhythm Track ...................................................................................... page 98

• Style Recording — Bass/Phrase/Pad/Chord Tracks ........................................................ page 100

The four editing features below allow you to edit already recorded style data.

• Quantize........................................................................................................................... page 102

This function aligns the timing of the recorded note data to a specified value.

• Naming User Styles ......................................................................................................... page 104

This function lets you name your original styles.

• Clearing User Style Data ................................................................................................. page 104

This function is for clearing (deleting) or part of the recorded style.

■ User Style Tracks

The tracks which can be recorded to the User styles are organized as shown in the

chart below.

Section Track

INTRO RHYTHM SUB CHORD1 PHRASE1 BASS

RHYTHM MAIN CHORD2 PHRASE2 PAD

MAIN A RHYTHM SUB CHORD1 PHRASE1 BASS

RHYTHM MAIN CHORD2 PHRASE2 PAD

MAIN B RHYTHM SUB CHORD1 PHRASE1 BASS

RHYTHM MAIN CHORD2 PHRASE2 PAD

FILL IN A RHYTHM SUB CHORD1 PHRASE1 BASS

RHYTHM MAIN CHORD2 PHRASE2 PAD

FILL IN B RHYTHM SUB CHORD1 PHRASE1 BASS

RHYTHM MAIN CHORD2 PHRASE2 PAD

ENDING RHYTHM SUB CHORD1 PHRASE1 BASS

RHYTHM MAIN CHORD2 PHRASE2 PAD

On the PSR-550, you can record up to a total of 48 tracks (6 sections x 8 tracks).

■ Data that can be recorded to User styles

• Note on/off (key press and release) .......................... page 107

• Velocity (strength of key press).................................. page 107

• Pitch bend, pitch bend range ..............................pages 30, 122

• Voice number (drum kit number)* ................................ page 26

• Mixer settings* ............................................................. page 76

• Tempo .......................................................................... page 36

• Reverb type and settings ............................................. page 46

• Chorus type and settings ............................................. page 48

Up to approximately 1,950 notes for a section (a total of about 7,150 notes) can be

recorded to the PSR-550 style tracks.

Only one event of the item marked with * can be recorded for each track of the

sections.

•User Style data is recorded

by playing voice R1 from the

keyboard. Voice R2, voice L

and the auto accompaniment

cannot be used.

97

95

■ About Recording User Styles

In recording a User song, the PSR-550 records your keyboard performance as MIDI

data. Recording of User styles, however, is done in a different way. Here are some

of the aspects in which style recording differs from song recording:

Style Recording

Loop Recording

Auto accompaniment repeats the accompaniment patterns of several measures

in a “loop,” and style recording is also done using loops. For example, if you start

recording with a two-measure main section, the two measures are repeatedly

recorded. Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition (loop),

letting you record while hearing previously recorded material.

Overdub Recording

This method records new material to a track already containing recorded data,

without deleting the original data. In style recording, the recorded data is not

deleted, except when using functions such as Clear (page 104) and Drum

Cancel (page 99).

For example, if you start recording with a two-measure main section, the two

measures are repeated many times. Notes that you record will play back from

the next repetition, letting you overdub new material to the loop while hearing

previously recorded material.

Using Preset Styles

The following notes and cautions are important points for you to keep in mind as you record your User styles.

•In the Record Ready mode, you can exchange or edit the voice

data in the recorded tracks using Mixer on page 76.

•If the memory becomes full while recording, an alert message

will appear on the display and recording will stop.

•Since recording is done in measure units, you should first select

a style that has the same number of measures as the section

you intend to record..

• If none of the preset styles is appropriate, select one that has the

same time signature and number of measures as the one you

want to create, then use the Clear function (page 104) to clear

all preset data before entering your own.

•Make sure to clear at least one of the three User styles before

recording a new User style. Recording a new User style cannot

be started when all three User styles have recorded data.

•Be careful to avoid turning off the power or unplugging the AC

adaptor from the outlet during recording, since this will result in

the loss of recorded data.

•Using Registration Memory (page 54) can make your recording

sessions much more efficient, since various settings (such as

voices, etc.) can be recalled by a single button press.

When the record mode is engaged, the Registration Memory

Freeze function will be turned on (it cannot be turned off while

the record mode is engaged).

•Using the Metronome function (page 118) can make your

recording sessions much more efficient.

Preset style data

Copy

Internal memory for

User style recording

As shown in the chart at left, when you select the

internal preset style that is the closest to the type

of style you wish to create, the preset style data

will be copied to a special memory location for

recording.

You create (record) your new, original style by

adding or deleting data from the memory location.

All tracks (with the exception of the rhythm track)

must be cleared before recording (page 104).

98

96

Style Recording — Rhythm Track

With this operation you can create your own original rhythm patterns by editing

existing rhythm track (percussion) data from a preset style.

1

Press the [RECORD] button to engage the Record mode.

2

Select “Style”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

3

Press the [NEXT] button.

4

Select a style to begin with.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the number buttons

[1]-[0].

5

Press the [NEXT] button again to display the RecMode

screen.

6

Select “Record”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

7

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Section selection

screen.

8

Select the section to be recorded.

9

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Track selection screen.

•Multiple sections cannot be

recorded at the same time.

Style Recording

001 8Beat 1

RecMenu:Style

Style Rec:Record

Section =Main A

99

97

10

Select a Rhythm track to be recorded.

Select “RHYTHM MAIN” or “RHYTHM SUB” with the data dial, the

[+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

•Only one track can be

recorded at a time.

11

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Reharsal screen.

The beat indicator dots will flash at the currently set tempo, indicating that the

record ready (Synchro Start) mode is engaged.

Since the rhythm pattern plays back repeatedly, you can record by overdubbing

— listening to the pattern and playing the desired keys. Look at the icons

printed under the keys indicating the percussion sounds that are assigned to

each key.

•For recording the RHYTHM

tracks, the instrument

symbols printed on the front

edge of the panel show you

the instrument assignments

to each key. See “Keyboard

Percussion” on page 31 for

playing each drum/

percussion sound.

You can also delete certain percussion sounds in the following way:

1) Press the [NEXT] button.

2) Press the key on the keyboard corresponding to the instrument you want

to cancel.

3) To return to the original display, press the [BACK] button.

14

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop recording.

15

Press the [RECORD] button to exit from the Record mode.

You should save the recorded data before leaving the recording mode. (Refer

to page 100 for details.)

Style Recording

Record Track=RhM

Style Recording

Drum Cancel

To return to the original display, press the [EXIT] button (page 17).

13

Start recording.

You can start recording with one of the following ways:

• Press the [START/STOP] button. The following will start to play back: the

style selected in step #4, the section selected in step #8 and the rhythm track

selected in step #10.

• Press the [SYNC START] button to enable synchronized standby (page 25),

then play a key on the keyboard. Playback starts as described in the first

method above.

Rehearsal

12

Select one of the Drum Kits.

Select the desired kit by pressing the [VOICE R1] button (page 26).

100

98

Exiting from the Style Record mode

To leave the style recording mode, follow the instructions in the chart below.

Style Recording — Bass/Phrase/Pad/Chord Tracks

This section explains how to record all tracks (other than the rhythm), using the preset

styles.

Unlike recording the rhythm track, in this method you have to clear the track data of

the original style before recording.

1

-

9

Use the same operation as in “Style Recording —

Rhythm Track” (page 98).

10

Select a Track to be recorded.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

Select from the following: “BASS,” “CHORD1,” “CHORD2,” “PAD,”

“PHRASE1,” and “PHRASE2”.

•Only one track can be

recorded at a time.

11

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Record Ready screen.

Style Recording

CAUTION

•Be aware that this process

automatically clears the

data in the track selected

in step #10.

Record Track=Bas

SaveToUserStyle?

Sv?:UserStyle1

Are You Sure?

Press the [-/NO] button to exit from the

Style Record mode without storing the

performance data to Internal Memory.

Select a style number

(destination).

Press the [+/YES] button to exit from the Style

Record mode after storing the performance data to

Internal Memory.

Press the [RECORD] button.

Press the [+/YES] button.

Press the [NEXT] button.

Song Rec Ready

•After exiting from the Style

Recording mode, the section

automatically switches to

Main B. If you record a

section other than Main B,

select the section again and

play the accompaniment.

101

99

12

Select a voice for the track to be recorded.

Select the desired voice by pressing the [VOICE R1] button (page 26).

The recording repeats indefinitely (until stopped) in a loop.

Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition, letting you record

while hearing previously recorded material.

Observe the following rules when recording the MAIN and FILL sections:

•Use only the CM7 scale tones when recording the BASS and PHRASE tracks

(i.e. C, D, E, G, A and B).

•Use only the chord tones when recording the CHORD and PAD tracks (i.e. C,

E, G and B).

Any appropriate chord or chord progression can be used for the INTRO and

ENDING sections.

14

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop recording.

15

Press the [RECORD] button to exit from the Record mode.

For information on leaving the recording mode, see page 100.

Style Recording

Style Recording

CSC CSC

C = chord tone

C, S = scale tones

To return to the previous display, press the [EXIT] button.

13

Start recording.

You can start recording with one of the following ways:

• Press the [START/STOP] button.

• Press the [SYNC START] button to enable synchronized standby (page 25),

then play a key on the keyboard.

102

100

Quantize

Quantize lets you “clean up” or “tighten” the timing of a previously recorded track.

For example, the following musical passage has been written with exact quarter-note

and eighth-note values.

Even though you think you may have recorded the passage accurately, your actual

performance may be slightly ahead of or behind the beat (or both!). Quantize allows

you to align all the notes in a track so that the timing is absolutely accurate to the

specified note value.

1

-

5

Use the same operation as in “Style Recording —

Rhythm Track” (page 98).

6

Select “Edit”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

7

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Edit Menu screen.

8

Select “Quantize”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

9

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Section selection

screen.

10

Select the section to be quantized.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

11

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Track selection

screen.

12

Select the track to be quantized.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

Style Recording

Style Rec:Edit

StyEdit:Quantize

Section =Main A

QuantizTrack=Pad

103

101

13

Press the [NEXT] button.

14

Select the Quantize size (resolution).

Use the data dial, the [-/NO] button or the [+/YES] button.

Set the Quantize resolution to correspond to the smallest notes in the track you

are working with. For example, if the data was recorded with quarter notes and

eighth notes, use 1/8 for the quantize resolution. If the quantize function is

applied in this case with the resolution set to 1/4, the eighth notes would be

moved on top of the quarter notes.

15

Press the [NEXT] button to display the QUANTIZE operation

screen.

• You can audition the quantized pattern in this step, allowing you to hear the

results of the operation before actually changing the data. To audition the

pattern, press the [START/STOP] button.

16

Press the [+/YES] button to execute the Quantize operation.

To abort the Quantize operation, press the [-/NO] button.

17

Press the [RECORD] button to exit from the Record mode.

For information on leaving the recording mode, see page 100.

Style Recording

QuantizSize =1/4

Quantize OK?

● Quantize size

Size Note

1/4 Quarter note

1/6 Quarter note triplet

1/8 Eighth note

1/12 Eighth note triplet

1/16 Sixteenth note

1/24 Sixteenth note triplet

1/32 Thirty-second note

One measure of 8th notes before quantization

After quantization

Completed

The Quantize operation is completed...

104

102

Naming User Styles

1

-

7

Use the same operation as in “Quantize” (page 102).

8

Select “Name”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

9

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Name screen.

10

Enter the desired name for the style.

Use the keyboard to enter the name (page 21).

Up to 12 letters or characters can be used.

11

Press the [RECORD] button to exit from the Record mode.

For information on leaving the recording mode, see page 100.

Clearing User Style Data

1

-

7

Use the same operation as in “Quantize” (page 102).

8

Select “Clear”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

9

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Section selection

screen.

10

Select a Section to be cleared.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

When “All Sect” is selected as the section to be cleared, all style data (which

includes all sections and all tracks) will be deleted. In this case, go to step #13,

skipping over steps #11 and #12.

11

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Track selection screen.

12

Select a Track to be cleared.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

Style Recording

StyEdit:Name

Nam=UserStyle1_

StyEdit:Clear

cursor

105

103

13

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Clear screen.

14

Press the [+/YES] button to execute the Clear operation.

To abort the Clear operation, press the [-/NO] button.

15

Press the [RECORD] button to exit from the Record mode.

If you’ve selected a certain section (other than “ALL sect”), see the explanation

on leaving the recording mode on page 100.

Style Recording

Clear OK?

Completed

The Clear operation is completed...

106

MIDI Functions

104

In the rear panel of your PSR-550, there are MIDI terminals (MIDI IN, MIDI OUT), a TO HOST terminal,

and a HOST SELECT switch. By using the MIDI functions you can expand your musical possibilities. This

section explains what MIDI is, and what it can do, as well as how you can use MIDI on your PSR-550.

● If you don’t know what MIDI is, make sure to read these sections:

• What’s MIDI?.............................................................................................. page 106

• What You Can Do With MIDI ...................................................................... page 108

• MIDI Data Compatibility ............................................................................. page 109

● If you want to use your PSR-550 with a computer, read this section:

• Connecting to a Personal Computer .......................................................... page 110

● The PSR-550 lets you make the following MIDI-related settings:

• MIDI Template ............................................................................................ page 112

• MIDI Transmit Setting ................................................................................. page 114

• MIDI Receive Setting ................................................................................. page 115

• Local Control .............................................................................................. page 116

• Clock .......................................................................................................... page 116

• Initial Data Send......................................................................................... page 117

What’s MIDI?

No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic instrument” and “digital instrument.” In the world today, these are the

two main categories of instruments. Let’s consider an acoustic piano and a classical guitar as representative acous-

tic instruments. They are easy to understand. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some

strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds. But how does a digital

instrument go about playing a note?

As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampling note (previously recorded note) stored

in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is played based on information received from the keyboard. So then

what is the information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for note production?

For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the PSR-550 keyboard. Unlike

an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the electronic instrument puts out information from the

keyboard such as “with what voice,” “with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed,” and “when was

it released.” Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone generator. Using

these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the stored sampling note.

● Example of Keyboard Information

Voice number (with what voice) 01 (grand piano)

Note number (with which key) 60 (C3)

Note on (when was it pressed) and Timing expressed numerically (quarter note)

note off (when was it released)

Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong)

Sampling

Note Sampling

Note

Tone Generator

(Electric circuit)

Playing the keyboard

RL

● Acoustic guitar note production

Pluck a string and the body resonates

the sound.

● Digital instrument note production

Based on playing information from the keyboard, a

sampling note stored in the tone generator is played

through the speakers.

107

105

MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, which allows electronic musical instru-

ments to communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program

Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages.

The PSR-550 can control a MIDI device by transmitting note related data and various types of controller data. The

PSR-550 can be controlled by the incoming MIDI messages which automatically determine tone generator mode,

select MIDI channels, voices and effects, change parameter values and of course play the voices

specified for the various parts.

MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel messages and System messages. Below is an explanation

of the various types of MIDI messages which the PSR-550 can receive/transmit.

● Channel Messages

The PSR-550 is an electronic instrument that can handle 16 channels. This is

usually expressed as “it can play 16 instruments at the same time.” Channel mes-

sages transmit information such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each of the

16 channels.

● System Messages

This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI system. System messages

include messages like Exclusive Messages that transmit data unique to each instru-

ment manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the MIDI device.

The messages transmitted/received by the PSR-550 are shown in the MIDI Data

Format and MIDI Implementation Chart on pages 139 and 151.

•The performance data of all

songs, styles and Multi Pads

is MIDI data.

Message Name PSR-550 Operation/Panel Setting

Note ON/OFF Messages which are generated when the keyboard is

played.

Each message includes a specific note number which corre-

sponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value

based on how hard the key is stuck.

Program Change Voice setting (control change bank select MSB/LSB setting)

Control Change Mixer (volume, pan pot, etc.)

Message Name PSR-550 Operation/Panel Setting

Exclusive Message Reverb/chorus/DSP settings, etc.

Realtime Messages Clock setting

Start/stop operation

MIDI and TO HOST terminals

In order to exchange MIDI data between multiple devices, each device must be con-

nected by a cable.

There are two ways to connect: from the MIDI terminals of the PSR-550 to the MIDI

terminals of an external device using a MIDI cable, or from the TO HOST port of the

PSR-550 to the serial port of a personal computer using a special cable.

If you connect from the PSR-550 TO HOST terminal to a personal computer, the PSR-

550 will be used as a MIDI interface device, meaning that a specialized MIDI interface

device is not necessary.

In the rear panel of the PSR-550, there are two kinds of terminals, the MIDI terminals

and the TO HOST terminal.

● MIDI IN .........Receives MIDI data from another MIDI device.

● MIDI OUT .....Transmits the PSR-550’s keyboard information as

MIDI data to another MIDI device.

● TO HOST .....Transmits and receives MIDI data to and from a

personal computer.

•When using the TO HOST

terminal to connect to a

personal computer using

Windows, a Yamaha MIDI

driver must be installed in

the personal computer. The

included disk contains the

Yamaha MIDI driver.

•Special MIDI cables (sold

separately) must be used for

connecting to MIDI devices.

They can be bought at music

stores, etc.

•Never use MIDI cables

longer than about 15 meters.

Cables longer than this can

pick up noise which can

cause data errors.

108

106

The PSR-550 is an electronic musical instrument which is capable of transmitting and receiving over sixteen

channels. Imagine that there are sixteen separate pipes in the connected MIDI cable. When transmitting MIDI data

from the PSR-550 to an external device, MIDI data is sent through the assigned pipe (or MIDI channel) and

transmitted to the external device.

For example, several tracks can be transmitted simultaneously, including the auto accompaniment data (as shown

below).

What You Can Do With MIDI

●Use the PSR-550 as a multi tone generator (playing 16 channels at one time).

As you can see, it is essential to determine which data is to be sent over which MIDI channel when transmitting

MIDI data (page 114).

Receive mode for all channels set to “XG/GM.”

MIDI receive settings (page 115).

•When using a personal

computer, special software

(sequencer software) is

needed.

●Play music from another keyboard (no tone generator) using the PSR-550 XG tone

generator.

MIDI receive settings (page 115).

●Record performance data (1-16 channels) using the PSR-550 Auto Accompaniment

on a external sequencer (such as a personal computer). After recording, edit the data

with the sequencer, then play it again on the PSR-550 (playback).

MIDI transmit settings (page 114).

Initial Data send (page 117).

PSR-550

PSR-550

MIDI INMIDI OUT

MIDI OUTMIDI IN

PSR-550

Voice R1 Channel 1 Track 1

Voice L Channel 2 Track 2

Auto Accompaniment Bass Channel 3 Track 3

Auto Accompaniment Chord 1 Channel 4 Track 4

Auto Accompaniment Chord 2 Channel 5 Track 5

Auto Accompaniment Pad Channel 6 Track 6

Auto Accompaniment Phrase 1 Channel 7 Track 7

Auto Accompaniment Phrase 2 Channel 8 Track 8

Auto Accompaniment Rhythm Main Channel 9 Track 9

Auto Accompaniment Rhythm Sub Channel 10 Track 10

Voice R2 Channel 11 Track 11

MIDI cable External sequencerPSR-550 part

When recording performance data using the Auto

Accompaniment on an external sequencer

109

107

MIDI Data Compatibility

This section covers basic information on data compatibility: whether or not other MIDI devices can playback the

data recorded by PSR-550, and whether or not the PSR-550 can playback commercially available song data or song

data created for other instruments or on a computer.

Depending on the MIDI device or data characteristics, you may be able to play back the data without any problem,

or you may have to perform some special operations before the data can be played back. If you run into problems

playing back data, please refer to the information below.

Sequence format

The system which records song data is called “sequence format.”

Playback is only possible when the sequence format of the disk matches that of the MIDI device.

Voice allocation format

With MIDI, voices are assigned to specific numbers, called “program numbers.” The numbering standard (order of

voice allocation) is referred to as the “voice allocation format.”

Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice allocation format of the song data matches that of the

compatible MIDI device used for playback.

● SMF (Standard MIDI File)

This is the most common sequence format.

Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two types: Format 0 or Format 1. Many

MIDI devices are compatible with Format 0, and most commercially available software is

recorded as Format 0.

•The PSR-550 is compatible with both Format 0 and Format 1.

•Song data recorded on the PSR-550 is automatically recorded as SMF Format 0.

● ESEQ

This sequence format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the

Clavinova series instruments. This is a common format used with various Yamaha software.

•The PSR-550 is compatible with ESEQ.

● Style File

The Style File Format — SFF — is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique

conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range

of chord types.

•The PSR-550 uses the SFF internally, reads optional SFF style disks, and creates SFF

styles using the Style recording feature.

● GM System Level 1

This is one of the most common voice allocation formats.

Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System Level 1, as is most commercially

available software.

•The PSR-550 is compatible with GM System Level 1.

● XG

XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by

Yamaha specifically to provide more voices and variations, as well as greater expressive

control over voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future.

•The PSR-550 is compatible with XG.

● DOC

This voice allocation format is compaible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the

Clavinova series instruments.

This is also a common format used with various Yamaha software.

•The PSR-550 is compatible with DOC.

•Even if the devices and data

used satisfy all the

conditions above, the data

may still not be completely

compatible, depending on

the specifications of the

devices and particular data

recording methods.

110

108

Connecting to a Personal Computer

Connect your PSR-550 to a computer and take advantage of the wide range of power-

ful and versatile software for creating and editing music. The PSR-550 can be con-

nected in two ways:

• Using the MIDI terminals

• Using the TO HOST terminal

●When using a MIDI interface with a Macintosh series computer, connect the RS-

422 terminal of the computer (modem or printer terminal) to the MIDI interface,

then connect the MIDI OUT terminal on the MIDI interface to the MIDI IN

terminal of the PSR-550, as shown in the diagram below. Set the HOST SE-

LECT switch on the PSR-550 to “MIDI.”

• When the HOST SELECT switch is set in the “MIDI” position, input and

output in the TO HOST switch is ignored.

• When using a Macintosh series computer, set the MIDI interface clock setting

in the application software to match the setting of the MIDI interface you are

using. For details, carefully read the owner’s manual for the software you are

using.

Connect using the PSR-550 MIDI terminals

Using a MIDI interface device installed in the personal computer, connect the MIDI

terminals of the personal computer and the PSR-550.

For the connection cable, use a special MIDI cable.

●When the computer has a MIDI interface installed, connect the MIDI OUT

terminal of the personal computer to the MIDI IN terminal of the PSR-550. Set

the HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI.”

MIDI INMIDI OUT

MIDI OUTMIDI IN

PSR-550

MIDI IN

RS-422

MIDI OUT

PSR-550

•If your computer features a

USB interface, we

recommend using the

Yamaha UX256.

111

MIDI Functions

109

Connect the serial port of the personal computer (RS-232C terminal or RS-422 termi-

nal) to the TO HOST terminal of the PSR-550.

For the connection cable, use the cable below (sold separately) that matches the

personal computer type.

Connect using the TO HOST terminal

● IBM-PC/AT Series

Connect the RS-232C terminal on the computer to the TO HOST terminal on the

PSR-550 using a serial cable (D-SUB 9P → MINI DIN 8P cross cable). Set the

PSR-550 HOST SELECT switch in the “PC-2” position.

When using a D-SUB 25P → MINI DIN 8P cross cable, connect using a D-SUB

9P plug adaptor on the computer side of the cable.

● Macintosh Series

Connect the RS-422 terminal (modem or printer terminal) on the computer to the

TO HOST terminal on the PSR-550 using a serial cable (system peripheral

cable, 8 bit). Set the PSR-550 HOST SELECT switch in the “Mac” position.

Set the MIDI interface clock in the sequencer software you are using to 1 MHz.

For details, carefully read the owner’s manual for the software you are using.

For details about the necessary MIDI settings for computer and sequence

software you are using, refer to the relevant owner’s manuals.

•Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.

•IBM PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corp.

•Other company names and product names, etc. in this manual are registered trademarks or trademarks of those companies.

PSR-550

mini DIN 8-pin

D-SUB 9-pin

YAMAHA CCJ-PC2

PSR-550

mini DIN 8-pin

D-SUB 25-pin D-SUB 9-pin

YAMAHA CCJ-PC2

PSR-550

mini DIN 8-pin mini DIN 8-pin

YAMAHA CCJ-MAC

112

MIDI Functions

110

MIDI Template

The PSR-550 is capable of transmitting and receiving MIDI data over sixteen indepen-

dent channels. For proper MIDI operation, it is necessary to determine which data is

set to which channel.

The MIDI Template function allows you to instantly configure all appropriate transmit/

receive settings with a single button press.

2

Select “Midi.”

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

3

Press the [NEXT] button to display the MIDI screen.

4

Select “Template.”

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

5

Press the [NEXT] button to display the MIDI Template screen.

6

Select a MIDI Template.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

For details, refer to the MIDI Template List (page 113).

1

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

F4 Midi

Midi:Template

Temp=Acmp Out

Temp=XG Module

113

MIDI Functions

111

7

Press the [NEXT] button.

8

Load the selected MIDI Template.

Press the [+/YES] button to actually load the selected MIDI template settings.

To abort the operation, press the [-/NO] button.

MidiTemplatLoad?

● MIDI Template List

Keyboard Out The transmit channels are set as follows:

ch. 1: Right1, ch. 2: Right2, ch. 3: Left, chs. 4-16: Off

When outputting the performance data (note on/off messages).

Used to play the PSR-550 note on/off data with an external tone

generator and to record the PSR-550 note on/off data to an

external sequencer.

Acmp Out The transmit channels 9-16 are set with the Accompaniment

tracks.

chs. 1-8: Off, chs. 9-10: Rhythms, ch. 11: Bass,

chs. 12-13: Chords, ch. 14: Pad, chs. 15-16: Phrases

When outputting the style data. Used to play the PSR-550 auto

accompaniment data with an external tone generator and to record

the PSR-550 auto accompaniment data to an external sequencer.

Song Out All transmit channels are set with the Song tracks 1-16.

When outputting the song data. Used to play the PSR-550 song

data with an external tone generator and to record your entire

performance on the PSR-550 to an external sequencer.

Master Keyboard When using the PSR-550 as a master keyboard; in other words,

using it strictly as a controller for outputting MIDI data, without

using the internal sounds.

XG Module All receive channels are set to “XG/GM.”

When using the PSR-550 as a multi-timbral XG tone generator.

Accordion The receive channels are set as follows:

ch. 1: Remote, ch. 2: Chord, ch. 3: Bass, chs. 4-16: Off

When playing the PSR-550 by an external MIDI Accordion.

The connected MIDI accordion can play the PSR-550 and detect

chords and basses in the auto accompaniment section.

Midi Pedal All receive channels are set to “Root.”

When playing the PSR-550 using a connected (optional) MIDI

pedal. The connected MIDI pedal detects chords and basses in the

auto accompaniment section, allowing you to play on-bass chords.

Completed

114

MIDI Functions

112

MIDI Transmit Setting

The PSR-550 can simultaneously transmit data on all 16 MIDI channels. The Transmit

Channel and Transmit Track functions determine what PSR-550 data is transmitted via

which MIDI channels.

1

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

2

Select “Midi.”

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

3

Press the [NEXT] button to display the MIDI screen.

4

Select “Transmit Ch.”

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

5

Press the [NEXT] button to display the MIDI Transmit Ch

screen.

6

Set a MIDI Transmit Channel and Transmit Track.

● Press one of the [TRACK1]-[TRACK16] buttons to select a MIDI channel.

● Select a track with the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

Off Nothing is transmitted.

R1 Right-hand keyboard playing* (VOICE R1)**

R2 Right-hand keyboard playing* (VOICE R2)**

L Left-hand keyboard playing* (VOICE L)**

Upper Right-hand keyboard playing*

(Outputs MIDI note data normally as explained on page 29.)

Lower Left-hand keyboard playing* with Auto Accompaniment ON

(Outputs MIDI note data normally as explained on page 29.)

RhM Auto Accompaniment RHYTHM MAIN track

RhS Auto Accompaniment RHYTHM SUB track

Bas Auto Accompaniment BASS track

Cd1 Auto Accompaniment CHORD1 track

Cd2 Auto Accompaniment CHORD2 track

Pad Auto Accompaniment PAD track

Ph1 Auto Accompaniment PHRASE1 track

Ph2 Auto Accompaniment PHRASE2 track

T01-16 Song track 1-16

•When a track is assigned to

more than one MIDI channel,

the data from that track is

transmitted via the lowest-

numbered channel.

•MIDI transmit track settings

will be retained even after

turning the power off. See

page 136 for details.

•The initial default channel/

track settings are:

• Ch. 1 = R1

• Ch. 2 = R2

• Ch. 3 = L

• Ch. 4 = Off

• Ch. 5 = Off

• Ch. 6 = Off

• Ch. 7 = Off

• Ch. 8 = Off

• Ch. 9 = RhS

• Ch. 10 = RhM

• Ch. 11 = Bas

• Ch. 12 = Cd1

• Ch. 13 = Cd2

• Ch. 14 = Pad

• Ch. 15 = Ph1

• Ch. 16 = Ph2

•To avoid MIDI loops which

can cause operational errors,

check the PSR-550 Local

Control setting (page 116),

and the MIDI THRU settings

of any external MIDI devices.

*“Right-hand keyboard playing” and “Left-hand keyboard playing” indicate the

performance played on the right side and left side of the keyboard from the split

point, respectively.

** Outputs MIDI note data according to the respective octave settings for the voices

R1, R2 and L.

Midi:Transmit Ch

Trans Ch16=R1

115

MIDI Functions

113

MIDI Receive Setting

The PSR-550 can simultaneously receive data on all 16 MIDI channels, allowing it to

function as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator. The Receive Channel and

Receive Mode functions determine how each channel will respond to received MIDI

data.

1

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

2

Select “Midi.”

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

3

Press the [NEXT] button to display the MIDI screen.

4

Select “Receive Ch.”

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

5

Press the [NEXT] button to display the MIDI Receive Ch

screen.

6

Set a MIDI Receive Channel and Receive mode.

● Press one of the [TRACK1]-[TRACK16] buttons to select a MIDI channel.

● Select a receive mode with the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO]

button.

Off No MIDI data is received on channels set to “Off”.

XG/GM Received MIDI data is sent directly to the PSR-550 tone

generator. If all channels are set to “XG/GM”, the PSR-550

functions as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator.

Keybd Received MIDI data is handled in the same way as data

generated by the PSR-550’s own keyboard. In other words, a

remote keyboard could be used to control the PSR-740/640

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT functions, etc.

Chord The note on/off messages received at the channel(s) set to

“Chord” are recognized as the fingerings in the accompaniment

section. The chords to be detected depend on the fingering

mode on the PSR-550. The chords will be detected regardless

of the accompaniment on/off and split point settings on the

PSR-550 panel.

Root The note on/off messages received at the channel(s) set to

“Root” are recognized as the bass notes in the accompaniment

section. The bass notes will be detected regardless of the

accompaniment on/off and split point settings on the PSR-550

panel.

•The initial default setting

(factory setting) for all

channels is “XG/GM.”

•MIDI receive mode settings

will be retained even after

turning the power off. See

page 136 for details.

Midi:Receive Ch

Reciv Ch01=XG/GM

116

MIDI Functions

114

Local Control

“Local Control” refers to the fact that, normally, the PSR-550 keyboard controls the

internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the

keyboard. This situation is “Local Control on” since the internal tone generator is

controlled locally by its own keyboard. Local control can be turned off, however, so

that the keyboard does not play the internal voices, but the appropriate MIDI informa-

tion is still transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector when notes are played on the

keyboard. At the same time, the internal tone generator can respond to MIDI informa-

tion received on channels set to the “XG/GM” mode via the MIDI IN connector. This

means that while an external MIDI sequencer, for example, plays the PSR-550 internal

voices, an external tone generator can be played from the PSR-550 keyboard.

5

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Local Control screen.

6

Turn the Local Control on or off.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-NO] button.

Clock

Reception of an external MIDI clock signal can be enabled or disabled as required.

When disabled (“Int”), all of the time-based functions (Auto Accompaniment, SONG

recording and playback, etc.) are controlled by its own internal clock. When MIDI

clock reception is enabled (“Ext”), however, all timing is controlled by an external

MIDI clock signal received via the MIDI IN terminal (in this case the PSR-550

TEMPO setting has no effect). The default setting is “Int”.

1

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

2

Select “Midi.”

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

•The default Local Control

setting (factory setting) is

“On”.

1

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

2

Select “Midi”.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

3

Press the [NEXT] button to display the MIDI screen.

4

Select “LocalContrl.”

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

Midi:LocalContrl

Midi Local =Off

117

MIDI Functions

115

3

Press the [NEXT] button to display the MIDI screen.

4

Select “Clock.”

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

Initial Data Send

Transmits all current panel settings to a second PSR-550 or a MIDI data storage

device.

If you want to have the song play back with the panel settings used for recording,

execute the Initial Data Send function before recording the performance on the PSR-

550 to an external sequencer.

1

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

2

Select “Midi.”

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

3

Press the [NEXT] button to display the MIDI screen.

4

Select “Init Send.”

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

•The default Clock setting

(factory setting) is “Int.”

•When the Clock setting is

“Ext,” auto accompaniment

playback cannot be started

via the panel [START/STOP]

button. Also, Multi Pad

playback cannot be initiated

by pressing the any of the

Multi Pads.

•When the Clock setting is

“Ext”, “EC” will appear on the

TEMPO display, and tempo

cannot be changed with the

panel button.

5

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Clock screen.

6

Set the Clock to “Int” or “Ext.”

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

5

Press the [NEXT] button to display the Init Send screen.

Midi:Clock

Midi Clock =Int

Midi:Init Send

Init Send OK?

Completed

6

Execute the Init Send

operation.

Press the [+/YES] button to

execute the Init Send opera-

tion.

To abort the operation, press

the [-/NO] button.

118

116

Other Functions (Utility)

This section of the manual covers some important functions of the PSR-550 that have not been ex-

plained in previous sections. These are all combined in the Utility menu of the “Function” section.

• Metronome ........................... “Metronom”............................................. page 118

• Upper Octave ....................... “UpperOct”............................................. page 119

• Master Tuning....................... “Tuning”.................................................. page 119

• Scale Tuning......................... “SC.Tune”................................................ page 119

• Split Point ............................. “Split”..................................................... page 120

• Fingering .............................. “Fingerng”............................................... page 38

• Touch Sensitivity .................. “TouchSns”............................................. page 120

• Voice Set .............................. “VoiceSet”............................................. page 120

• Footswitch ............................ “Pedal”..................................................... page 121

• Pitch Bend Range ................ “PitchBnd”............................................. page 122

• Assignable ........................... “Assignbl”............................................. page 122

• Backlight .............................. “BackLigt”............................................. page 122

Metronome

When this is set to “ON,” the metronome sounds at the set tempo for the following

conditions.

• Accompaniment playback

• Song playback

• Synchronized start standby

• Record standby

• Recording

• Turn Metronome ON or OFF with the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the

[-/NO] button.

1

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

2

Select “Utility.”

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or

the [-/NO] button.

3

Press the [NEXT] button.

4

Select a function.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

Refer to the list above for available Utility menu items.

5

Press the [NEXT] button.

6

Set the value.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or

the [-/NO] button.

Each of the above functions can be set as described below.

The operations for each function corresponding to step #6 are covered in the following explanations.

Metronome =On

F5 Utility

F5 Util:Metronom

Metronome =Off

•The Metronome cannot be

turned on when free-tempo

song data is selected in the

Song mode.

The tempo setting of some

commercially available songs

is fixed. These songs are

called “free-tempo” software.

When playing back free-

tempo song data on the

PSR-550, the Tempo display

shows “- - -” and the beat

display does not flash. Also,

the measure number in the

display does not match the

actual measure number of

playback, and only gives you

an indication of how much of

the song has played back.

119

117

Upper Octave

This determines the Octave setting for the right-hand range of the keyboard, letting you

have independent ranges for the right and left hands. The range is from -1 to 1.

• Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button to set the Octave.

Master Tuning

The Master Tuning function sets the overall pitch of the PSR-550.

The range is from 414.6 Hz to 466.8 Hz.

• Set the value with the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

Scale Tuning

Scale tuning allows each individual note of the octave to be tuned over range from -64

to +63 cents in 1-cent increments (1 cent = 1/100th of a semitone). This makes it

possible to produce subtle tuning variations, or tune the instrument to totally different

scales (e.g. classic or Arabic scales).

The PSR-550 also provides nine different scale settings (shown below) that let you

instantly reconfigure the tuning of the instrument for playing in special scales. You can

tune the instrument in two ways: select the desired scale setting template, or tune each

key individually using Note Edit.

•The scale tuning settings are

common to each octave on

the keyboard.

•Minus values can be entered

by using the number buttons

while holding the [-/NO]

button.

Other Functions (Utility)

Upper Octave = 1

Tuning =414.6

•The normal tuning of

±

0

cents can be recalled by

setting ‘‘Equal’’.

Use the same operation as in steps 1-5 on page 118 and:

• Selecting the template • Individual note tuning

Template C C#DEbEFF#GAbABbB

Bayat-G 0 0 0 0 -50 0 0 0 0 -50 0 0

Bayat-A 0 0 0 0 0 0 -50 0 0 0 0 -50

Bayat-E 0 -50 0 0 0 0 -50 0 0 0 0 0

Bayat-C 0 0 -50 0 0 0 0 0 0 -50 0 0

Rast-G 0 0 0 0 0 0 -50 0 0 0 0 -50

Rast-A 0 -50 0 0 0 0 0 0 -50 0 0 0

Rast-E 0 0 0 -50 0 0 0 0 -50 0 0 0

Rast-C 0 0 0 0 -50 0 0 0 0 0 0 -50

Equal 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

ScTuneEdt C#= 63

Completed

SC.Tune:NoteEdit

Template=Bayat-G

SC.Tune:Template

[NEXT] button

Use the data dial, the

[+/YES] button or the [-/

NO] button to select the

template. For details,

refer to the table above.

[NEXT] button

Data dial

[+/YES] button

[-/NO] button

Use the [NEXT] button to select the

desired key, then tune each key by

using the data dial, the [+/YES] button,

or the [-/NO] button.

[NEXT] button

120

118

Touch Sensitivity

The keyboard of the PSR-550 is equipped with a touch response feature that lets you

dynamically and expressively control the level of the voices with your playing strength

— just as on an acoustic instrument. The Touch Sensitivity parameter gives you

detailed control over the touch response feature by letting you set the degree of touch

response.

Voice Set

The Voice Set feature brings out the best in each individual voice by automatically

setting a range of important voice-related parameters whenever an R1 panel voice is

selected. The parameters that may be set by the Voice Set feature are listed below. This

function lets you turn Voice Set on or off, as required.

● Voice Set Parameter List

•Voice R1 (Volume, octave, pan, reverb depth, chorus depth, DSP depth)

•Voice R2 (Voice number, volume, octave, pan, reverb depth, chorus depth, DSP

depth)

•Harmony Type, Volume, Part setting

•DSP on/off, type, return level and FAST/SLOW

• Set the value with the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO] button or the

number buttons [1]-[0].

The range is from 0 to 127. The greater the value, the more sensitive the keyboard is to

your playing strength, and the more dynamic range that can be brought out of the

voices.

A setting of “0” results in a fixed touch response, or no level change no matter how

hard or how soft you play the keys. (This setting is good for instrument sounds such as

organ or harpsichord, which normally do not have touch response.) You can also

achieve the same effect by turning touch response off with the [TOUCH] button on the

panel (the indicator turns off).

• Turn Voice Set On or Off by using the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the

[-/NO] button.

Other Functions (Utility)

Voice Set =On

Touch Sense =127

DSP(FAST)

SUSTAIN HARMONY

TOUCH

Split Point

The point on the keyboard that separates the auto accompaniment section and the right-

hand section of the keyboard is called the “split point.”

• When the auto accompaniment is on, keys played to the left of the split point are

used for controlling the auto accompaniment (page 33).

• When the auto accompaniment is off, keys played to the left of the split point are

used for playing voice L (page 28).

• Set the value with the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button.

•The default setting (factory

setting) is “F

#

2.”

Split Point =C3

121

119

Footswitch

Various functions can be assigned to the footswitch connected to the FOOTSWITCH

jack. The polarity of the footswitch can also be changed.

• Select the Functions to be controlled by the footswitch.

• Set the polarity of the footswitch NORMAL or REVERSE.

● Functions controlled by the footswitch

Sustain When you press the footswitch,

sustain is applied to the keyboard

notes.

Sostenuto When you press the footswitch,

the sostenuto effect is applied to

the keyboard notes.

Soft When you press the footswitch, the soft effect is applied to the keyboard notes.

Regist + Pressing the footswitch advances through the Registration Memory numbers. For

example, if you step on the footswitch with bank 1-3 recalled, 1-4 will be recalled,

then next 2-1 will be recalled.

Start/Stop Pressing the footswitch has the same effect as pressing the START/STOP button

on the panel.

Synchro Stop Pressing the footswitch has the same effect as pressing the SYNC STOP button

on the panel.

Bass Hold The bass root note will be held as long as you press the footswitch.

Break When you press the footswitch, accompaniment will stop. Releasing the switch

with the foot will cause it to play again from the next measure.

Tap Tempo Pressing the footswitch has the same effect as pressing the TAP TEMPO button

on the panel.

● Polarity

This parameter lets you configure the footswitch response of the PSR-550 to

match that of the particular footswitch you are using. If the footswitch works in

the opposite way (i.e., pressing the footswitch has no effect, but releasing it

does), try changing this setting. The default setting is “Norm.”

Other Functions (Utility)

For “Sostenuto,” if you press and hold the footswitch here,

only the first note will be sustained (the note that you

played and held when pressing the footswitch).

For “Sustain,” if you press and hold the footswitch here, all

the notes shown will be sustained.

Pedl=Sustain

Use the data dial, the [+/YES]

button or the [-/NO] button.

Polarity =Norm

Use the data dial, the [+/YES]

button or the [-/NO] button.

Press the [NEXT] button.

•When the footswitch

changes the Registration

Memory number (Regist +),

the footswitch function set in

the selected Registration

Memory is overridden or

ignored. For example, even

if footswitch is set to control

Sustain in the selected

Registration Memory, if set to

“Regist +” here, the

footswitch will NOT control

Sustain.

122

120

Pitch Bend Range

This determines the maximum pitch bend range for the PITCH BEND wheel.

The range is from “0” to “12”. Each increment corresponds to one semitone.

• Set the Pitch Bend Range with the data dial, the [+/YES] button, the [-/NO]

button or the number buttons [1]-[0].

Other Functions (Utility)

PitchBndRange= 4

Assignable

Functions to be called up via the Direct Access can be assigned to the [+/YES] button,

[-/NO] button and the number buttons [1]-[0]. See the function tree chart for details

(page 22-23).

● Another way to set the Direct Access:

1

Select the function or parameter you wish to assign.

See the function tree chart for details (page 22-23).

In this example,

‘‘Clock = Int’’ is

assigned to the [+]

button.

Backlight

You can set the Backlight color of the display.

Use the data dial, the [+/YES] button or the [-/NO] button to set the Backlight color.

• Auto ...................................... The color changes according to the mode of the PSR-550. In the Style mode, the

backlight color is set to blue. In the Song mode, the backlight color is set to purple. In

the Record mode, the backlight color is set to red.

• Blue, Red, Purple ................. The backlight color is not changed regardless of the mode.

• Off ......................................... The backlight color is turned off.

BackLight=Auto

Press one of the

number buttons to

be assigned.

Select the function/parameter you wish to

assign by using the data dial, the [+/YES]

button, or the [-/NO] button.

AssignButton =1

AssignButton =+ Ass=HarmPart

2

While holding the [MEMORY] button, press one of the number buttons.

123

131

PSR-550 Voices

The PSR-550 actually includes two voice sets: the “panel” voices and percussion kits, and the XG voices. The panel

voices include 219 “pitched” voices and 14 drum kits, while the XG voice set includes 480 voices.

The panel voices are specially recorded and programmed voices exclusive to the PSR-550 and other PortaTone

instruments. The XG voices conform to Yamaha’s XG format; they also conform to the GM (General MIDI) standard. This

allows you to accurately play back any GM- or XG-compatible song data directly on the PSR-550 itself, without having to

change voices or make special settings. It also allows you to record songs for other GM- or XG-compatible instruments,

and have them play back on those instruments as intended.

Appendix Voice List

•The Voice List includes

MIDI program change

numbers for each voice.

Use these program change

numbers when playing the

PSR-550 via MIDI from an

external device.

•When the sustain or

sostenuto pedal functions

are being used (page 121),

some voices may sound

continuously or have a long

decay after the notes have

been released while the

pedal is held.

● Maximum Polyphony

The PSR-550 has 32-note maximum polyphony. Auto Accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, so when

Auto Accompaniment is used the total number of notes that can be played on the keyboard is correspondingly reduced.

The same applies to the Voice R2, Voice L, Multi Pad, and Song functions. When the maximum polyphony is exceeded,

notes are played using last-note priority.

● Voices Panel Voices Drum Kits XG Voices

(Panel Voices)

PSR-550 001-219 220-233 234-713

Bank Select MIDI

Number

Voice Program Voice Name

of Notes

Number MSB LSB Change

Used

Number

Panel Voice List

Bank Select MIDI

Number

Voice Program Voice Name

of Notes

Number MSB LSB Change

Used

Number

Piano

1 0 112 1 Grand Piano 2

2 0 112 2 Bright Piano 2

3 0 112 4 Honky Tonk 2

4 0 114 3 Rock Piano 2

5 0 112 3 Midi Grand 2

6 0 113 3 CP 80 2

7 0 112 7 Harpsichord 1

8 0 113 7 Grand Harpsi 2

E.Piano

9 0 114 5 Galaxy EP 2

10 0 115 5 Polaris EP 2

11 0 118 5 Suitcase EP 2

12 0 117 6 Super DX EP 2

13 0 112 6 DX Modern EP 2

14 0 112 5 Funk EP 1

15 0 115 6 Modern EP 2

16 0 113 6 Hyper Tines 2

17 0 116 6 New Tines 2

18 0 114 6 Venus EP 2

19 0 113 5 Tremolo EP 2

20 0 112 8 Clavi 1

21 0 113 8 Wah Clavi 1

Organ

22 0 112 17 Jazz Organ1 2

23 0 113 17 Jazz Organ2 2

24 0 120 17 GlassJazzOrg 2

25 0 112 18 Click Organ 2

26 0 113 18 Dance Organ 2

27 0 115 17 DrawbarOrgan 2

28 0 115 18 Mellow Draw 2

29 0 116 17 Bright Draw 2

30 0 112 19 Rock Organ 1 2

31 0 113 19 Rock Organ 2 2

32 0 114 19 Purple Organ 2

33 0 116 18 60’s Organ 2

34 0 117 18 Blues Organ 2

35 0 117 17 16+1 Organ 2

36 0 118 17 16+2 Organ 2

37 0 119 17 16+4 Organ 2

38 0 118 18 Elec.Organ 2

39 0 114 17 TheaterOrg1 2

40 0 114 18 TheaterOrg2 2

41 0 112 20 Pipe Organ 2

42 0 113 20 ChapelOrgan1 2

43 0 114 20 ChapelOrgan2 2

44 0 115 20 ChapelOrgan3 2

45 0 112 21 Reed Organ 1

Accordion

46 0 113 22 Trad.Accrd 2

47 0 112 22 MusetteAccrd 2

48 0 112 24 Tango Accrd 1

49 0 113 24 Bandoneon 2

50 0 114 22 Soft Accrd 2

51 0 115 22 Accordion 1

52 0 112 23 Harmonica 1

Guitar

53 0 113 25 Spanish Gtr 1

54 0 112 25 Classic Gtr 2

55 0 112 26 Folk Guitar 1

56 0 116 26 FolkGw/pick1 2

57 0 117 26 FolkGw/pick2 2

58 0 118 26 FolkGw/pick3 2

59 0 113 26 12Str Guitar 2

60 0 114 25 Smooth Nylon 2

61 0 115 26 Campfire 2

62 0 112 27 Jazz Guitar 2

63 0 113 27 Octave Gtr 2

64 0 114 27 Hawaiian Gtr 2

65 0 123 28 VintageOpen 1

66 0 124 28 VintageChors 2

67 0 118 28 Solid Guitar 2

68 0 116 28 Bright Clean 1

69 0 112 28 Clean Guitar 2

70 0 119 28 Elec12StrGtr 2

71 0 113 28 Tremolo Gtr 2

72 0 114 29 Cool! E.Gtr 1

73 0 115 29 VintageMute 1

74 0 113 29 Funk Guitar 1

75 0 112 29 Muted Guitar 1

76 0 113 30 Feedback Gtr 2

77 0 112 30 Overdriven 2

78 0 112 31 Distortion 2

79 0 115 28 Pedal Steel 2

80 0 114 26 Mandolin 2

Bass

81 0 112 34 Finger Bass 1

82 0 112 33 AcousticBass 2

124

132

Voice List

Bank Select MIDI

Number

Voice Program Voice Name

of Notes

Number MSB LSB Change

Used

Number

Bank Select MIDI

Number

Voice Program Voice Name

of Notes

Number MSB LSB Change

Used

Number

83 0 114 33 Bass&Cymbal 2

84 0 112 35 Pick Bass 1

85 0 112 36 FretlessBass 2

86 0 113 36 Jaco Bass 2

87 0 112 37 Slap Bass 1

88 0 112 38 Funk Bass 1

89 0 113 37 Fusion Bass 1

90 0 112 39 Synth Bass 1

91 0 112 40 Analog Bass 2

92 0 113 40 Dance Bass 2

93 0 113 39 Hi-Q Bass 2

94 0 114 39 Rave Bass 2

Strings

95 0 112 49 String Ensbl 2

96 0 113 49 Orch.Strings 2

97 0 114 49 SymphonicStr 2

98 0 113 50 Slow Strings 2

99 0 114 50 Str.Quartet 2

100 0 115 49 Concerto Str 2

101 0 115 50 Marcato Strs 2

102 0 112 50 Chamber Strs 2

103 0 112 45 Tremolo Strs 2

104 0 112 46 Pizz.Strings 2

105 0 112 51 Syn Strings 2

106 0 112 52 Analog Strs 2

107 0 113 51 Tech Strings 2

108 0 112 56 OrchestraHit 2

109 0 112 41 Solo Violin 2

110 0 113 41 Soft Violin 1

111 0 112 111 Fiddle 1

112 0 112 42 Viola 2

113 0 112 43 Cello 1

114 0 112 44 Contrabass 1

115 0 112 47 Harp 2

116 0 113 47 Hackbrett 2

117 0 112 107 Shamisen 1

118 0 112 108 Koto 1

119 0 112 105 Sitar 2

120 0 112 106 Banjo 1

Choir

121 0 112 53 Choir 2

122 0 112 55 Air Choir 2

123 0 113 54 Gothic Vox 2

124 0 113 53 Vocal Ensbl 2

125 0 112 54 Vox Humana 2

Trumpet

126 0 115 57 SweetTrumpet 1

127 0 112 57 Solo Trumpet 1

128 0 114 57 Soft Trumpet 1

129 0 113 57 Flugel Horn 1

130 0 112 60 MutedTrumpet 1

131 0 112 58 Trombone 1

132 0 114 58 Mel.Trombone 2

133 0 112 61 French Horn 1

134 0 112 59 Tuba 2

Brass

135 0 113 62 BigBandBrass 2

136 0 112 62 BrassSection 2

137 0 116 62 Mellow Brass 2

138 0 117 62 Small Brass 2

139 0 118 62 Pop Brass 2

140 0 119 62 Mellow Horns 2

141 0 113 60 Ballroom Brs 2

142 0 114 62 Full Horns 2

143 0 115 62 High Brass 2

144 0 120 62 Bright Brass 2

145 0 113 58 Trb.Section 2

146 0 112 63 Synth Brass 2

147 0 112 64 Analog Brass 2

148 0 113 63 Jump Brass 2

149 0 114 63 Techno Brass 2

Saxophone

150 0 117 67 Sweet Tenor 2

151 0 114 67 BreathyTenor 2

152 0 113 66 Breathy Alto 2

153 0 112 65 Soprano Sax 2

154 0 112 66 Alto Sax 1

155 0 112 67 Tenor Sax 1

156 0 112 68 Baritone Sax 1

157 0 116 67 Sax Section 2

158 0 115 67 Sax Combo 2

159 0 112 72 Clarinet 2

160 0 113 72 Mel.Clarinet 2

161 0 113 67 Woodwind Ens 2

162 0 112 69 Oboe 1

163 0 112 70 English Horn 1

164 0 112 71 Bassoon 1

Flute

165 0 114 74 Sweet Flute 1

166 0 112 74 Flute 2

167 0 113 74 Pan Flute 2

168 0 112 73 Piccolo 1

169 0 112 76 Ethnic Flute 2

170 0 112 78 Shakuhachi 1

171 0 112 79 Whistle 1

172 0 112 75 Recorder 1

173 0 112 80 Ocarina 1

174 0 112 110 Bagpipe 2

Synth Lead

175 0 116 82 Fire Wire 2

176 0 112 81 Square Lead 2

177 0 112 82 SawtoothLead 2

178 0 113 82 Big Lead 2

179 0 112 99 Stardust 2

180 0 114 82 Blaster 2

181 0 115 82 Analogon 2

182 0 113 99 Sun Bell 2

183 0 112 84 Aero Lead 2

184 0 114 81 Mini Lead 2

185 0 115 81 Vinylead 1

186 0 117 82 Warp 2

187 0 116 81 Hi Bias 2

188 0 118 81 Tiny Lead 2

189 0 118 82 Sub Aqua 2

190 0 119 82 Fargo 2

Synth Pad

191 0 113 95 Insomnia 2

192 0 115 89 Golden Age 2

193 0 113 100 Cyber Pad 2

194 0 112 96 Wave 2001 2

195 0 112 95 Equinox 2

196 0 114 89 Stargate 2

197 0 112 93 DX Pad 2

198 0 112 89 Fantasia 2

199 0 112 92 Xenon Pad 2

200 0 112 90 Area 51 2

201 0 112 100 AtmospherPad 2

202 0 113 90 Dark Moon 2

125

133

Bank Select MIDI

Number

Voice Program Voice Name

of Notes

Number MSB LSB Change

Used

Number

Bank Select MIDI

Number

Voice Program Voice Name

of Notes

Number MSB LSB Change

Used

Number

203 0 115 95 Ionosphere 2

204 0 113 89 Symbiont 2

205 0 114 95 Solaris 2

206 0 117 89 Millenium 2

207 0 113 96 Transform 2

Percussion

208 0 113 12 Jazz Vibes 2

209 0 112 12 Vibraphone 2

210 0 112 13 Marimba 2

211 0 112 14 Xylophone 1

212 0 112 115 Steel Drums 1

213 0 112 9 Celesta 2

214 0 112 10 Glockenspiel 1

215 0 112 11 Music Box 2

216 0 112 15 Tubular Bell 2

217 0 112 109 Kalimba 1

218 0 112 48 Timpani 1

219 0 112 16 Dulcimer 2

Drum Kits

220 127 0 1 StandardKit1 -

221 127 0 2 StandardKit2 -

222 127 0 9 Room Kit -

223 127 0 17 Rock Kit -

224 127 0 25 Electro Kit -

225 127 0 26 Analog Kit -

226 127 0 28 Dance Kit -

227 127 0 33 Jazz Kit -

228 127 0 41 Brush Kit -

229 127 0 49 Symphony Kit -

230 127 0 81 Style Kit -

231 126 0 36 ArabicKit -

232 126 0 1 SFX Kit 1 -

233 126 0 2 SFX Kit 2 -

Voice List

XG Voice List

Bank Select

MIDI

Number

Voice Program

Voice Name

of Notes

Number

MSB LSB Change

Used

Number

234 0 0 1 Grand Piano 1

235 0 1 1 GrndPianoKSP 1

236 0 18 1 MellowGrPno 1

237 0 40 1 PianoStrings 2

238 0 41 1 Dream 2

239 0 0 2 Bright Piano 1

240 0 1 2 BritePnoKSP 1

241 0 0 3 ElecGrandPno 2

242 0 1 3 ElecGrPnoKSP 2

243 0 32 3 Detuned CP80 2

244 0 40 3 Layered CP 1 2

245 0 41 3 Layered CP 2 2

246 0 0 4 Honkytonk 2

247 0 1 4 HonkytonkKSP 2

248 0 0 5 El.Piano 1 2

249 0 1 5 El.Piano1KSP 1

250 0 18 5 Mellow EP 1 2

251 0 32 5 Chorus EP 1 2

252 0 40 5 HardEl.Piano 2

253 0 45 5 VXfade El.P1 2

254 0 64 5 60sEl.Piano1 1

255 0 0 6 El.Piano 2 2

256 0 1 6 El.Piano2KSP 1

257 0 32 6 Chorus EP 2 2

258 0 33 6 DX EP Hard 2

259 0 34 6 DX Legend 2

260 0 40 6 DX Phase EP 2

261 0 41 6 DX+AnalogEP 2

262 0 42 6 DX Koto EP 2

263 0 45 6 VXfade El.P1 2

264 0 0 7 Harpsichord 1

265 0 1 7 Harpsi.KSP 1

266 0 25 7 Harpsichord2 2

267 0 35 7 Harpsichord3 2

268 0 0 8 Clavi. 1

269 0 1 8 Clavi.KSP 1

270 0 27 8 Clavi.Wah 2

271 0 64 8 Pulse Clavi. 1

272 0 65 8 PierceClavi. 2

273 0 0 9 Celesta 1

274 0 0 10 Glockenspiel 1

275 0 0 11 Music Box 2

276 0 64 11 Orgel 2

277 0 0 12 Vibraphone 1

278 0 1 12 Vibes KSP 1

279 0 45 12 Hard Vibes 2

280 0 0 13 Marimba 1

281 0 1 13 Marimba KSP 1

282 0 64 13 Sine Marimba 2

283 0 97 13 Balimba 2

284 0 98 13 Log Drums 2

285 0 0 14 Xylophone 1

286 0 0 15 TubularBells 1

287 0 96 15 Church Bells 2

288 0 97 15 Carillon 2

289 0 0 16 Dulcimer 1

290 0 35 16 Dulcimer 2 2

291 0 96 16 Cimbalom 2

292 0 97 16 Santur 2

293 0 0 17 DrawbarOrgan 1

294 0 32 17 DetDrawOrgan 2

295 0 33 17 60sDrawOrg1 2

296 0 34 17 60sDrawOrg2 2

297 0 35 17 70sDrawOrg1 2

298 0 36 17 DrawbarOrg2 2

299 0 37 17 60sDrawOrg3 2

300 0 38 17 Even Bar Org 2

301 0 40 17 16+2’2/3 Org 2

302 0 64 17 Organ Bass 1

303 0 65 17 70sDrawOrg2 2

304 0 66 17 Cheezy Organ 2

305 0 67 17 DrawbarOrg3 2

306 0 0 18 Perc.Organ 1

307 0 24 18 70sPercOrg1 2

308 0 32 18 DetPercOrgan 2

309 0 33 18 Light Organ 2

310 0 37 18 Perc.Organ2 2

311 0 0 19 Rock Organ 1

312 0 64 19 Rotary Organ 2

313 0 65 19 Slow Rotary 2

314 0 66 19 Fast Rotary 2

315 0 0 20 Church Organ 2

316 0 32 20 ChurchOrgan3 2

317 0 35 20 ChurchOrgan2 2

318 0 40 20 Notre Dame 2

319 0 64 20 Organ Flute 2

320 0 65 20 Trem.OrganFl 2

321 0 0 21 Reed Organ 1

322 0 40 21 Puff Organ 2

323 0 0 22 Accordion 1

324 0 32 22 Accord It 2

325 0 0 23 Harmonica 1

326 0 32 23 Harmonica 2 2

327 0 0 24 Tango Accord 1

328 0 64 24 TangoAccord2 2

329 0 0 25 Nylon Guitar 1

330 0 16 25 NylonGuitar2 1

331 0 25 25 NylonGuitar3 2

332 0 43 25 VelGtrHarmo 1

333 0 96 25 Ukulele 1

334 0 0 26 Steel Guitar 1

335 0 16 26 SteelGuitar2 1

336 0 35 26 12Str Guitar 2

337 0 40 26 Nylon&Steel 2

338 0 41 26 Steel&Body 2

339 0 96 26 Mandolin 2

340 0 0 27 Jazz Guitar 1

341 0 18 27 MellowGuitar 1

342 0 32 27 Jazz Amp 2

343 0 0 28 Clean Guitar 1

344 0 32 28 ChorusGuitar 2

345 0 0 29 Muted Guitar 1

346 0 40 29 FunkGuitar1 2

347 0 41 29 MuteSteelGtr 2

Bank Select

MIDI

Number

Voice Program

Voice Name

of Notes

Number

MSB LSB Change

Used

Number

Bank Select

MIDI

Number

Voice Program

Voice Name

of Notes

Number

MSB LSB Change

Used

Number

126

134

Voice List

Bank Select

MIDI

Number

Voice Program

Voice Name

of Notes

Number

MSB LSB Change

Used

Number

Bank Select

MIDI

Number

Voice Program

Voice Name

of Notes

Number

MSB LSB Change

Used

Number

Bank Select

MIDI

Number

Voice Program

Voice Name

of Notes

Number

MSB LSB Change

Used

Number

348 0 43 29 FunkGuitar2 1

349 0 45 29 Jazz Man 2

350 0 0 30 Overdriven 1

351 0 43 30 Guitar Pinch 1

352 0 0 31 Distortion 1

353 0 40 31 FeedbackGtr 2

354 0 41 31 FeedbackGtr2 2

355 0 0 32 GtrHarmonics 1

356 0 65 32 GtrFeedback 1

357 0 66 32 GtrHarmonic2 1

358 0 0 33 AcousticBass 1

359 0 40 33 Jazz Rhythm 2

360 0 45 33 VXUprghtBass 2

361 0 0 34 Finger Bass 1

362 0 18 34 Finger Dark 2

363 0 27 34 Flange Bass 2

364 0 40 34 Bass&DistEG 2

365 0 43 34 Finger Slap 1

366 0 45 34 FingerBass2 2

367 0 65 34 Mod.Bass 2

368 0 0 35 Pick Bass 1

369 0 28 35 MutePickBass 1

370 0 0 36 FretlessBass 1

371 0 32 36 Fretless 2 2

372 0 33 36 Fretless 3 2

373 0 34 36 Fretless 4 2

374 0 96 36 Syn.Fretless 2

375 0 97 36 SmthFretless 2

376 0 0 37 Slap Bass 1 1

377 0 27 37 ResonantSlap 1

378 0 32 37 Punch Thumb 2

379 0 0 38 Slap Bass 2 1

380 0 43 38 Velo.Sw.Slap 1

381 0 0 39 Synth Bass 1 1

382 0 18 39 SynBass1Dark 1

383 0 20 39 FastResoBass 1

384 0 24 39 Acid Bass 1

385 0 35 39 Clavi Bass 2

386 0 40 39 Techno Bass 2

387 0 64 39 Orbiter 2

388 0 65 39 Square Bass 1

389 0 66 39 Rubber Bass 2

390 0 96 39 Hammer 2

391 0 0 40 Synth Bass 2 2

392 0 6 40 MellowSyBass 1

393 0 12 40 SequenceBass 2

394 0 18 40 ClickSynBass 2

395 0 19 40 SynBass2Dark 1

396 0 32 40 SmoothSyBass 2

397 0 40 40 ModulrSyBass 2

398 0 41 40 DX Bass 2

399 0 64 40 X Wire Bass 2

400 0 0 41 Violin 1

401 0 8 41 SlwAtkViolin 1

402 0 0 42 Viola 1

403 0 0 43 Cello 1

404 0 0 44 Contrabass 1

405 0 0 45 Trem.Strings 1

406 0 8 45 SlwAtTremStr 1

407 0 40 45 SuspenseStr 2

408 0 0 46 PizzicatoStr 1

409 0 0 47 Orch.Harp 1

410 0 40 47 Yang Chin 2

411 0 0 48 Timpani 1

412 0 0 49 Strings 1 1

413 0 3 49 StereoStrngs 2

414 0 8 49 SlwAtkStrngs 1

415 0 24 49 Arco Strings 2

416 0 35 49 60’s Strings 2

417 0 40 49 Orchestra 2

418 0 41 49 Orchestra 2 2

419 0 42 49 TremOrchstra 2

420 0 45 49 Velo.Strings 2

421 0 0 50 Strings 2 1

422 0 3 50 S.SlowStrngs 2

423 0 8 50 LegatoStrngs 2

424 0 40 50 Warm Strings 2

425 0 41 50 Kingdom 2

426 0 64 50 70’s Strings 1

427 0 65 50 Strings 3 1

428 0 0 51 SynStrings1 2

429 0 27 51 Reso Strings 2

430 0 64 51 SynStrings4 2

431 0 65 51 SynStrings5 2

432 0 0 52 SynStrings2 2

433 0 0 53 Choir Aahs 1

434 0 3 53 Stereo Choir 2

435 0 16 53 Choir Aahs 2 2

436 0 32 53 Mellow Choir 2

437 0 40 53 ChoirStrings 2

438 0 0 54 Voice Oohs 1

439 0 0 55 Synth Voice 1

440 0 40 55 SynthVoice2 2

441 0 41 55 Choral 2

442 0 64 55 Analog Voice 1

443 0 0 56 OrchestraHit 2

444 0 35 56 OrchestrHit2 2

445 0 64 56 Impact 2

446 0 0 57 Trumpet 1

447 0 16 57 Trumpet 2 1

448 0 17 57 BriteTrumpet 2

449 0 32 57 Warm Trumpet 2

450 0 0 58 Trombone 1

451 0 18 58 Trombone 2 2

452 0 0 59 Tuba 1

453 0 16 59 Tuba 2 1

454 0 0 60 MutedTrumpet 1

455 0 0 61 French Horn 1

456 0 6 61 Fr.Horn Solo 1

457 0 32 61 FrenchHorn2 2

458 0 37 61 HornOrchestr 2

459 0 0 62 BrassSection 1

460 0 35 62 Tp&TbSection 2

461 0 40 62 BrassSect2 2

462 0 41 62 High Brass 2

463 0 42 62 Mellow Brass 2

464 0 0 63 SynthBrass1 2

465 0 12 63 Quack Brass 2

466 0 20 63 ResoSynBrass 2

467 0 24 63 Poly Brass 2

468 0 27 63 SynthBrass3 2

469 0 32 63 Jump Brass 2

470 0 45 63 AnaVelBrass1 2

471 0 64 63 AnalogBrass1 2

472 0 0 64 SynthBrass2 1

473 0 18 64 Soft Brass 2

474 0 40 64 SynthBrass4 2

475 0 41 64 Choir Brass 2

476 0 45 64 AnaVelBrass2 2

477 0 64 64 AnalogBrass2 2

478 0 0 65 Soprano Sax 1

479 0 0 66 Alto Sax 1

480 0 40 66 Sax Section 2

481 0 43 66 HyperAltoSax 1

482 0 0 67 Tenor Sax 1

483 0 40 67 BreathyTenor 2

484 0 41 67 SoftTenorSax 2

485 0 64 67 Tenor Sax2 1

486 0 0 68 Baritone Sax 1

487 0 0 69 Oboe 1

488 0 0 70 English Horn 1

489 0 0 71 Bassoon 1

490 0 0 72 Clarinet 1

491 0 0 73 Piccolo 1

492 0 0 74 Flute 1

493 0 0 75 Recorder 1

494 0 0 76 Pan Flute 1

495 0 0 77 Blown Bottle 2

496 0 0 78 Shakuhachi 1

497 0 0 79 Whistle 1

498 0 0 80 Ocarina 1

499 0 0 81 Square Lead 2

500 0 6 81 SquareLead2 1

501 0 8 81 LM Square 2

502 0 18 81 Hollow 1

503 0 19 81 Shroud 2

504 0 64 81 Mellow 2

505 0 65 81 Solo Sine 2

506 0 66 81 Sine Lead 1

507 0 0 82 SawtoothLead 2

508 0 6 82 SawtoothLd2 1

509 0 8 82 Thick Saw 2

510 0 18 82 Dynamic Saw 1

511 0 19 82 Digital Saw 2

512 0 20 82 Big Lead 2

513 0 24 82 Heavy Synth 2

514 0 25 82 Waspy Synth 2

515 0 40 82 Pulse Saw 2

516 0 41 82 Dr. Lead 2

517 0 45 82 VelocityLead 2

518 0 96 82 Seq.Analog 2

519 0 0 83 CalliopeLead 2

520 0 65 83 Pure Pad 2

521 0 0 84 Chiff Lead 2

522 0 64 84 Rubby 2

523 0 0 85 Charang Lead 2

524 0 64 85 DistortedLd 2

525 0 65 85 Wire Lead 2

526 0 0 86 Voice Lead 2

527 0 24 86 Synth Aahs 2

528 0 64 86 Vox Lead 2

529 0 0 87 Fifths Lead 2

530 0 35 87 Big Five 2

531 0 0 88 Bass & Lead 2

532 0 16 88 Big & Low 2

533 0 64 88 Fat & Perky 2

534 0 65 88 Soft Whirl 2

535 0 0 89 New Age Pad 2

536 0 64 89 Fantasy 2

537 0 0 90 Warm Pad 2

538 0 16 90 Thick Pad 2

539 0 17 90 Soft Pad 2

127

135

Bank Select

MIDI

Number

Voice Program

Voice Name

of Notes

Number

MSB LSB Change

Used

Number

Bank Select

MIDI

Number

Voice Program

Voice Name

of Notes

Number

MSB LSB Change

Used

Number

Bank Select

MIDI

Number

Voice Program

Voice Name

of Notes

Number

MSB LSB Change

Used

Number

540 0 18 90 Sine Pad 2

541 0 64 90 Horn Pad 2

542 0 65 90 RotaryStrngs 2

543 0 0 91 PolySynthPad 2

544 0 64 91 Poly Pad 80 2

545 0 65 91 Click Pad 2

546 0 66 91 Analog Pad 2

547 0 67 91 Square Pad 2

548 0 0 92 Choir Pad 2

549 0 64 92 Heaven 2

550 0 66 92 Itopia 2

551 0 67 92 CC Pad 2

552 0 0 93 Bowed Pad 2

553 0 64 93 Glacier 2

554 0 65 93 Glass Pad 2

555 0 0 94 Metallic Pad 2

556 0 64 94 Tine Pad 2

557 0 65 94 Pan Pad 2

558 0 0 95 Halo Pad 2

559 0 0 96 Sweep Pad 2

560 0 20 96 Shwimmer 2

561 0 27 96 Converge 2

562 0 64 96 Polar Pad 2

563 0 66 96 Celestial 2

564 0 0 97 Rain 2

565 0 45 97 Clavi Pad 2

566 0 64 97 Harmo Rain 2

567 0 65 97 African Wind 2

568 0 66 97 Carib 2

569 0 0 98 Sound Track 2

570 0 27 98 Prologue 2

571 0 64 98 Ancestral 2

572 0 0 99 Crystal 2

573 0 12 99 SynthDr.Comp 2

574 0 14 99 Popcorn 2

575 0 18 99 Tiny Bells 2

576 0 35 99 RoundGlocken 2

577 0 40 99 GlockenChime 2

578 0 41 99 Clear Bells 2

579 0 42 99 Chorus Bells 2

580 0 64 99 Synth Mallet 1

581 0 65 99 Soft Crystal 2

582 0 66 99 Loud Glocken 2

583 0 67 99 ChristmasBel 2

584 0 68 99 Vibe Bells 2

585 0 69 99 DigitalBells 2

586 0 70 99 Air Bells 2

587 0 71 99 Bell Harp 2

588 0 72 99 Gamelimba 2

589 0 0 100 Atmosphere 2

590 0 18 100 Warm Atmos. 2

591 0 19 100 HollwRelease 2

592 0 40 100 NylonElPiano 2

593 0 64 100 Nylon Harp 2

594 0 65 100 Harp Vox 2

595 0 66 100 Atmos.Pad 2

596 0 67 100 Planet 2

597 0 0 101 Brightness 2

598 0 64 101 FantasyBells 2

599 0 96 101 Smokey 2

600 0 0 102 Goblins 2

601 0 64 102 GoblinsSynth 2

602 0 65 102 Creeper 2

603 0 66 102 Ring Pad 2

604 0 67 102 Ritual 2

605 0 68 102 To Heaven 2

606 0 70 102 Night 2

607 0 71 102 Glisten 2

608 0 96 102 Bell Choir 2

609 0 0 103 Echoes 2

610 0 8 103 Echoes2 2

611 0 14 103 Echo Pan 2

612 0 64 103 Echo Bells 2

613 0 65 103 Big Pan 2

614 0 66 103 Synth Piano 2

615 0 67 103 Creation 2

616 0 68 103 Star Dust 2

617 0 69 103 Reso&Panning 2

618 0 0 104 Sci-Fi 2

619 0 64 104 Starz 2

620 0 0 105 Sitar 1

621 0 32 105 DetunedSitar 2

622 0 35 105 Sitar 2 2

623 0 96 105 Tambra 2

624 0 97 105 Tamboura 2

625 0 0 106 Banjo 1

626 0 28 106 Muted Banjo 1

627 0 96 106 Rabab 2

628 0 97 106 Gopichant 2

629 0 98 106 Oud 2

630 0 0 107 Shamisen 1

631 0 0 108 Koto 1

632 0 96 108 Taisho-kin 2

633 0 97 108 Kanoon 2

634 0 0 109 Kalimba 1

635 0 0 110 Bagpipe 2

636 0 0 111 Fiddle 1

637 0 0 112 Shanai 1

638 0 64 112 Shanai2 1

639 0 96 112 Pungi 1

640 0 97 112 Hichiriki 2

641 0 0 113 Tinkle Bell 2

642 0 96 113 Bonang 2

643 0 97 113 Altair 2

644 0 98 113 GamelanGongs 2

645 0 99 113 StereoGamlan 2

646 0 100 113 Rama Cymbal 2

647 0 101 113 Asian Bells 2

648 0 0 114 Agogo 1

649 0 0 115 Steel Drums 1

650 0 97 115 Glass Perc. 2

651 0 98 115 Thai Bells 2

652 0 0 116 Woodblock 1

653 0 96 116 Castanets 1

654 0 0 117 Taiko Drum 1

655 0 96 117 Gran Cassa 1

656 0 0 118 Melodic Tom 1

657 0 64 118 MelodicTom2 1

658 0 65 118 Real Tom 2

659 0 66 118 Rock Tom 2

660 0 0 119 Synth Drum 1

661 0 64 119 Analog Tom 1

662 0 65 119 ElectroPerc. 2

663 0 0 120 Rev.Cymbal 1

664 0 0 121 GtrFretNoise 1

665 0 0 122 Breath Noise 1

666 0 0 123 Seashore 2

667 0 0 124 Bird Tweet 2

668 0 0 125 TelephonRing 1

669 0 0 126 Helicopter 1

670 0 0 127 Applause 1

671 0 0 128 Gunshot 1

672 64 0 1 CuttingNoise 1

673 64 0 2 CuttingNoiz2 2

674 64 0 4 String Slap 1

675 64 0 17 Fl.Key Click 1

676 64 0 33 Shower 1

677 64 0 34 Thunder 1

678 64 0 35 Wind 1

679 64 0 36 Stream 2

680 64 0 37 Bubble 2

681 64 0 38 Feed 2

682 64 0 49 Dog 1

683 64 0 50 Horse 1

684 64 0 51 Bird Tweet 2 1

685 64 0 55 Ghost 2

686 64 0 56 Maou 2

687 64 0 65 Phone Call 1

688 64 0 66 Door Squeak 1

689 64 0 67 Door Slam 1

690 64 0 68 Scratch Cut 1

691 64 0 69 ScratchSplit 1

692 64 0 70 Wind Chime 1

693 64 0 71 TelphonRing2 1

694 64 0 81 CarEngineIgn 1

695 64 0 82 CarTiresSqel 1

696 64 0 83 Car Passing 1

697 64 0 84 Car Crash 1

698 64 0 85 Siren 2

699 64 0 86 Train 1

700 64 0 87 Jet Plane 2

701 64 0 88 Starship 2

702 64 0 89 Burst 2

703 64 0 90 RollrCoaster 2

704 64 0 91 Submarine 1

705 64 0 97 Laugh 1

706 64 0 98 Scream 1

707 64 0 99 Punch 1

708 64 0 100 Heartbeat 1

709 64 0 101 FootSteps 1

710 64 0 113 Machine Gun 1

711 64 0 114 Laser Gun 2

712 64 0 115 Explosion 2

713 64 0 116 Firework 2

Voice List

128

136

Bank MSB

Bank LSB

Prgram Number

Note # Note

13 C#-1

14 D-1

15 D#-1

16 E-1

17 F-1

18 F#-1

19 G-1

20 G#-1

21 A-1

22 A#-1

23 B-1

24 C0

25 C#0

26 D0

27 D#0

28 E0

29 F0

30 F#0

31 G0

32 G#0

33 A0

34 A#0

35 B0

36 C1

37 C#1

38 D1

39 D#1

40 E1

41 F1

42 F#1

43 G1

44 G#1

45 A1

46 A#1

47 B1

48 C2

49 C#2

50 D2

51 D#2

52 E2

53 F2

54 F#2

55 G2

56 G#2

57 A2

58 A#2

59 B2

60 C3

61 C#3

62 D3

63 D#3

64 E3

65 F3

66 F#3

67 G3

68 G#3

69 A3

70 A#3

71 B3

72 C4

73 C#4

74 D4

75 D#4

76 E4

77 F4

78 F#4

79 G4

80 G#4

81 A4

82 A#4

83 B4

84 C5

85 C#5

86 D5

87 D#5

88 E5

89 F5

90 F#5

91 G5

E1

F1 F#1

G1 G#1

A1 A#1

B1

C1

D#1

D1 C#1

E2

F2 F#2

G2 G#2

A2 A#2

B2

C2

D#2

D2 C#2

E3

F3 F#3

G3 G#3

A3 A#3

B3

C3

D#3

D3 C#3

E4

F4 F#4

G4 G#4

A4 A#4

B4

C4

D#4

D4 C#4

E5

F5 F#5

G5 G#5

A5 A#5

B5

C5

D#5

D5 C#5

C6

•“<——” indicates that the drum kit is the same as “Standard Kit1”.

•Each percussion voice uses one note, whereas one marked ( ) = uses two notes.

•The note numbers and note names printed on the keyboard are one octave higher than the MIDI note numbers and note names shown in the

list. For example, the note number and note name, #36 and C1, on the keyboard correspond to the MIDI note number and note name, #24 and

C0, shown in the list.

Drum Kit List

127 127 127 127 127 127 127

000000 0

129172526 28

Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electro Kit Analog Kit Dance Kit

Surdo Mute <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Surdo Open <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Hi Q <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Whip Slap <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Scratch H <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Scratch L <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Finger Snap <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Click Noise <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Metronome Click <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Metronome Bell <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Seq Click L <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Seq Click H <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Brush Tap <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Brush Swirl <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Brush Slap <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Brush Tap Swirl <—— <—— <—— Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal

Snare Roll <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Castanet <—— <—— <—— Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2

Snare Soft Snare Soft 2 <—— Snare Noisy

Snare Snappy Electro

Snare Noisy 4 Snare Techno

Sticks <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Kick Soft <—— <—— <—— Kick 3 Kick 3 Kick Techno Q

Open Rim Shot

Open Rim Shot H Short

<—— <—— <—— <—— Rim Gate

Kick Tight <—— <—— Kick 2 Kick Gate Kick Analog Short Kick Techno L

Kick Kick Short <—— Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy Kick Analog Kick Techno 2

Side Stick Side Stick Light <—— <—— <——

Side Stick Analog

Side Stick Analog

Snare Snare Short Snare Snappy Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2 Snare Analog Snare Clap

Hand Clap <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Snare Tight Snare Tight H

Snare Tight Snappy Snare Rock Tight

Snare Noisy 3 Snare Analog 2 Snare Dry

Floor Tom L <—— Tom Room 1 Tom Rock 1 Tom Electro 1 Tom Analog 1 Tom Analog 1

Hi-Hat Closed <—— <—— <—— <——

Hi-Hat Closed Analog

Hi-Hat Closed 3

Floor Tom H <—— Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2 Tom Analog 2 Tom Analog 2

Hi-Hat Pedal <—— <—— <—— <——

Hi-Hat Closed Analog 2

Hi-Hat Closed Analog 3

Low Tom <—— Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 3 Tom Analog 3 Tom Analog 3

Hi-Hat Open <—— <—— <—— <——

Hi-Hat Open Analog

Hi-Hat Open 3

Mid Tom L <—— Tom Room 4 Tom Rock 4 Tom Electro 4 Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 4

Mid Tom H <—— Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 5 Tom Electro 5 Tom Analog 5 Tom Analog 5

Crash Cymbal 1 <—— <—— <—— <—— Crash Analog Crash Analog

High Tom <—— Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 Tom Electro 6 Tom Analog 6 Tom Analog 6

Ride Cymbal 1 <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Chinese Cymbal <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Ride Cymbal Cup <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Tambourine <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Splash Cymbal <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Cowbell <—— <—— <—— <—— Cowbell Analog Cowbell Analog

Crash Cymbal 2 <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Vibraslap <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Ride Cymbal 2 <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Bongo H <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Bongo L <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Conga H Mute <—— <—— <—— <—— Conga Analog H Conga Analog H

Conga H Open <—— <—— <—— <—— Conga Analog M Conga Analog M

Conga L <—— <—— <—— <—— Conga Analog L Conga Analog L

Timbale H <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Timbale L <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Agogo H <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Agogo L <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Cabasa <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Maracas <—— <—— <—— <—— Maracas 2 Maracas 2

Samba Whistle H <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Samba Whistle L <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Guiro Short <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Guiro Long <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Claves <—— <—— <—— <—— Claves 2 Claves 2

Wood Block H <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Wood Block L <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Cuica Mute <—— <—— <—— Scratch H 2 Scratch H 2 Scratch H 2

Cuica Open <—— <—— <—— Scratch L 2 Scratch L 2 Scratch L 2

Triangle Mute <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Triangle Open <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Shaker <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Jingle Bells <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Bell Tree <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

129

137

Bank MSB

Bank LSB

Prgram Number

Note # Note

13 C#-1

14 D-1

15 D#-1

16 E-1

17 F-1

18 F#-1

19 G-1

20 G#-1

21 A-1

22 A#-1

23 B-1

24 C0

25 C#0

26 D0

27 D#0

28 E0

29 F0

30 F#0

31 G0

32 G#0

33 A0

34 A#0

35 B0

36 C1

37 C#1

38 D1

39 D#1

40 E1

41 F1

42 F#1

43 G1

44 G#1

45 A1

46 A#1

47 B1

48 C2

49 C#2

50 D2

51 D#2

52 E2

53 F2

54 F#2

55 G2

56 G#2

57 A2

58 A#2

59 B2

60 C3

61 C#3

62 D3

63 D#3

64 E3

65 F3

66 F#3

67 G3

68 G#3

69 A3

70 A#3

71 B3

72 C4

73 C#4

74 D4

75 D#4

76 E4

77 F4

78 F#4

79 G4

80 G#4

81 A4

82 A#4

83 B4

84 C5

85 C#5

86 D5

87 D#5

88 E5

89 F5

90 F#5

91 G5

E1

F1 F#1

G1 G#1

A1 A#1

B1

C1

D#1

D1 C#1

E2

F2 F#2

G2 G#2

A2 A#2

B2

C2

D#2

D2 C#2

E3

F3 F#3

G3 G#3

A3 A#3

B3

C3

D#3

D3 C#3

E4

F4 F#4

G4 G#4

A4 A#4

B4

C4

D#4

D4 C#4

E5

F5 F#5

G5 G#5

A5 A#5

B5

C5

D#5

D5 C#5

C6

127 127 127 127 126 126 126

000 0 000

33 41 49 81 36 1 2

Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit Style Kit Arabic Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2

<—— <—— <—— <——

<—— <—— <—— <——

<—— <—— <—— <——

<—— <—— <—— <——

<—— <—— <—— <——

<—— <—— <—— <——

<—— <—— <—— <——

<—— <—— <—— <——

<—— <—— <—— <——

<—— <—— <—— <——

<—— <—— <—— <——

<—— <—— <—— <—— Nakarazan Dom

<—— <—— <—— Brush Tap Style Cabasa

<—— <—— <—— Brush Swirl Style

Nakarazan Edge

<—— <—— <—— Brush Slap Style Hager Dom

<—— <—— <—— Brush Tap Swirl Style Hager Edge

<—— <—— <—— <—— Bongo H

<—— <—— <—— <—— Bongo L

Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2 <—— Snare Soft Style Conga H Mute

<—— <—— <—— <—— Conga H Open

<—— <—— Kick Soft 2 Kick Soft Style Conga L

<——

Open Rim Shot Light

<——

Open Rim Shot Style

Zagrouda H

<—— <—— Gran Cassa Kick Tight Style Zagrouda L

Kick Jazz Kick Jazz Gran Cassa Mute Kick Style Kick Soft Cutting Noise Phone Call

Side Stick Light Side Stick Light <—— Side Stick Style Side Stick

Cutting Noise 2

Door Squeak

Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare Snare Style Snare Soft Door Slam

<—— <—— <—— <——

Arabic Hand Clap

String Slap Scratch Cut

Snare Jazz M Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2 Snare Tight Style Snare Scratch H 3

<—— Tom Brush 1 <—— Floor Tom L Style Floor Tom L Wind Chime

<—— <—— <——

Hi-Hat Closed Style

Hi-Hat Closed

Telephone Ring 2

<—— Tom Brush 2 <—— Floor Tom H Style Floor Tom H

<—— <—— <—— Hi-Hat Pedal Style Hi-Hat Pedal

<—— Tom Brush 3 <—— Low Tom Style Low Tom

<—— <—— <—— Hi-Hat Open Style Hi-Hat Open

<—— Tom Brush 4 <—— Mid Tom L Style Mid Tom L

<—— Tom Brush 5 <—— Mid Tom H Style Mid Tom H

<—— <—— Hand Cymbal

Crash Cymbal 1 Style

Crash Cymbal 1

<—— Tom Brush 6 <—— High Tom Style High Tom

<—— <——

Hand Cymbal Short

Ride Cymbal 1 Style Ride Cymbal 1

<—— <—— <——

Chinese Cymbal Style

Crash Cymbal 2

Flute Key Click

Car Engine Ignition

<—— <—— <——

Ride Cymbal Cup Style

Duhulla Dom

Car Tires Squeal

<—— <—— <—— <—— Tambourine Car Passing

<—— <—— <——

Splash Cymbal Style

Duhulla Tak Car Crash

<—— <—— <—— <—— Cowbell Siren

<—— <—— Hand Cymbal 2

Crash Cymbal 2 Style

Duhulla Sak Train

<—— <—— <—— <—— Claves Jet Plane

<—— <——

Hand Cymbal 2 Short

Ride Cymbal 2 Style

Doff Dom Starship

<—— <—— <—— <—— Katem Dom Burst

<—— <—— <—— <—— Katem Tak Roller Coaster

<—— <—— <—— <—— Katem Sak Submarine

<—— <—— <—— <—— Katem Tak

<—— <—— <—— <—— Doff Tak

<—— <—— <—— <—— Tabla Dom

<—— <—— <—— <—— Tabla Tak1

<—— <—— <—— <—— Tabla Tik

<—— <—— <—— <—— Tabla Tak2 Shower Laugh

<—— <—— <—— <—— Tabla Sak Thunder Scream

<—— <—— <—— <——

Tabla Roll of Edge

Wind Punch

<—— <—— <—— <—— Tabla Flam Stream Heart Beat

<—— <—— <—— <—— Sagat 1 Bubble Foot Steps

<—— <—— <—— <—— Tabel Dom Feed

<—— <—— <—— <—— Sagat 3

<—— <—— <—— <—— Tabel Tak

<—— <—— <—— <—— Sagat 2

<—— <—— <—— <—— Rik Dom

<—— <—— <—— <—— Rik Tak 2

<—— <—— <—— <—— Rik Finger 1

<—— <—— <—— <—— Rik Tak 1

<—— <—— <—— <—— Rik Finger 2

<—— <—— <—— <——

Rik Brass Tremolo

<—— <—— <—— <—— Rik Sak

<—— <—— <—— <—— Rik Tik Dog Machine Gun

Horse Laser Gun

Bird Tweet 2 Explosion

Firework

Ghost

Maou

Drum Kit List

130

138

Style List

Style Style Name

Number Style Style Name

Number Country

59 Country Rock

60 Country 2/4

61 Country 8 Beat

62 Country Pop

63 Country Swing

64 Country Shuffle

65 Country Ballad

66 Country Waltz

67 Bluegrass

68 Hoedown

Latin

69 Latin Pop

70 Samba City

71 Bossa Nova

72 Guitar Bossa

73 Mambo

74 Salsa

75 Beguine

76 Gypsy Rumba

77 Pop Rumba

78 Happy Reggae

79 Disco Latin

March & Waltz

80 US March

81 German March

82 6/8 March

83 Polka Oberkrainer

84 Waltz Oberkrainer

85 Polka Pop

86 Tarantella

87 Reel

88 Musette

89 Jazz Waltz

90 Christmas 3/4

91 Slow Waltz

Ballroom

92 Vienna Waltz

93 English Waltz

94 Slowfox

95 Quickstep

96 Foxtrot

97 Tango

98 Samba

99 Rumba

100 Cha Cha Cha

101 Pasodoble

102 Jive

Pianist

103 P_Swing

104 P_Stride

105 P_Boogie

106 P_Ballad

107 P_Pianoman

108 P_March

109 P_6/8 March

110 P_Ragtime

111 P_Jazz Waltz

112 P_Waltz

8 Beat

1 8 Beat 1

2 8 Beat 2

3 8 Beat 3

4 8 Beat Adria

5 8 Beat Party

6 8 Beat Rock

7 Root Rock

8 Hard Rock

16 Beat

9 16 Beat Pop

10 Guitar Pop

11 Kool Shuffle

12 Pop Shuffle

13 Jazz Rock

Ballad

14 16 Beat Ballad

15 Slow & Easy

16 Love Song

17 Organ Ballad

18 Analog Ballad

19 6/8 Slow Rock

20 Modern 6/8

21 Acoustic Ballad

Dance

22 House

23 Eurobeat

24 Euro House

25 Trance

26 Clubdance

27 Techno

28 Hip Hop

29 Trip Hop

30 Groundbeat

Disco

31 Saturday Night

32 70’s Disco

33 Disco Chocolate

34 Disco Hands

35 Disco Funk

36 Disco Fox

37 Disco Party

Swing & Jazz

38 Big Band 1

39 Big Band 2

40 Big Band 3

41 Swing

42 Swingfox

43 Shuffle

44 Acoustic Jazz

45 Jazz Ballad

46 Dixieland

R & B

47 Soul Shuffle

48 Cat Groove

49 Gospel Brothers

50 Gospel Sisters

51 Boogie Woogie

52 Croco Twist

53 Rock & Roll

54 60’s Rock & Roll

55 Soul

56 Rock Shuffle

57 Motown Soul

58 6/8 Blues

131

139

MDB Song Name

Number MDB Song Name

Number

Music Database List

POP HITS

1 Alive Fever

2 Alive Synth

3 Croco Rock

4 D.Survival

5 EasySunday1

6 EasySunday2

7 GoingMyWay 1

8 GoingMyWay 2

9 Hurry Luv

10 I’m Torn

11 Imagination

12 Just Called

13 Just the way

14 Love is Deep

15 Music Thanks

16 Nikita Trp.

17 Paradise Day

18 Proud Guitar

19 Sailing Sax

20 SeptemberPop

21 Sultan Swing

22 Sweet Lord

23 TitanicHeart

24 WatchGirls1

25 WatchGirls2

26 WaterlooShfl

27 Whiter Shade

28 YesterGuitar

SWING & JAZZ

29 Days of Sax

30 Honey Taste

31 Lost Heart

32 MistyGeorgia

33 Moon Jazz

34 Moonlight 1

35 Moonlight 2

36 New York 1

37 New York 2

38 New York 3

39 PantherSwing

40 Patrol Brass

41 Patrol Sax

42 PetiteClari.

43 Ragtime Band

44 RedRoseSwing

45 Saints March

46 Satin Woodw.

47 Sax The Mood

48 Shear Jazz

49 Show Bizz

50 Splanky Trb.

51 Sunny Side

52 Two Foot 5

53 WaltzingBlue

54 What is new?

55 WildCatDixie

56 Wonderland

EVERGREEN

57 Black Forest

58 California

59 Ciao Capri

60 Close on You

61 D’Amour Str.

62 Do you wish?

63 Dolanes Song

64 El Condor

65 Entertainer

66 EpicSymphony

67 In the Night

68 In the Rain

69 Love Stories

70 Lucky Sax

71 MillionStars

72 My Prince

73 O Sole Mio

74 PalomaGuitar

MDB Song Name

Number

75 Puppet Brass

76 Raindrops

77 Red Moulin

78 Romantic Gtr

79 SchiwagoMood

80 Shadow Gtr.

81 Small Planet

82 Snow White

83 Spanish Eyes

84 Tie a Ribbon

85 Time goes by

86 Wonder World

ROMANTIC BALLADS

87 Adeline B.

88 ArgentinaCry

89 BlueAcordion

90 Body Beauty

91 Cat Memory

92 CavatinaSolo

93 Deep Ballad

94 Elvis Ballad

95 Fly Away

96 GoodFeelings

97 GreenSleeves

98 Gtr.Concerto

99 Guitar Date

100 Hard to Say1

101 Hard to Say2

102 Lonely Piper

103 Moon Tenor

104 MusicboxDnce

105 NorwegianFlt

106 RainbowAbove

107 Red Lady

108 Release me

109 SavingMyLove

110 SierraMusett

111 Silent Sound

112 Silvery Moon

113 Smokey Eyes

114 StrangeShore

115 Sweet Orch

116 Unplugged

117 Whisper Sax

ROCK & FUSION

118 Dave again

119 Funky Pieces

120 Jump Rock

121 Oye Como Cha

122 RiverRedRock

123 SatisfiedGtr

124 Sheriff Shot

125 Smokey Water

126 Twist again

127 Venus Pop

RHYTHM & BLUES

128 Amazing

129 Baby Baby

130 BoogieManiac

131 Clock Rock

132 Gator Boogie

133 Happy Day!

134 Johnny Good

135 Melon Cat

136 Mercy Bros.

137 Rising Sun

138 Supergroove1

139 Supergroove2

HIP HOP HOUSE

140 Boy Group

141 Funky City

142 Funky Disco

143 Grounded

144 Miami Trance

145 Nine PM

146 Only TwoOfUs

147 Rap Talk

148 Soft Kill

149 Techno Dolls

LATIN NIGHTS

150 Bamba Brass

151 Bamba Flute

152 Be Happy!

153 Day & Night

154 Ipanema 1

155 Ipanema 2

156 Latin Lola

157 MarinaMusett

158 Mucho Tromb.

159 Smooth Latin

160 Sun of Life

161 Sunshine

162 Tico Organ

163 TromboneWave

COUNTRY & WESTERN

164 AlabamaBanjo

165 Blowing Wind

166 Bonanza

167 Green Grass

168 JambalayaFlt

169 LondonStreet

170 Lucille Str.

171 Think Twice

172 Top World

173 WestVirginia

BALLROOM & PARTY

174 Aloha Hawaii

175 BabylonDisco

176 Barbados!

177 Brazil Brass

178 Charming 3/4

179 Cherry Brass

180 Cherry Organ

181 ChickenSynth

182 Cumparsita

183 Danube Waves

184 FiestaMexico

185 HandsUpParty

186 Modern Talk

187 Next Alice

188 Paloma Flute

189 Pub Piano

190 Sandman Fox

191 Sunday Never

192 Tea Time Cha

193 ThemeOfLove

194 Tijuana 1

195 Tijuana 2

196 Tulip’sWaltz

197 Why MCA?

198 “YesSir,Quick”

TRADITIONAL

199 Alpen Trio

200 Balalaikas

201 Ceilidh Band

202 Ciel deParis

203 Clarinet Fun

204 Comrades

205 Happy Polka

206 Herzilein

207 Jingle Bells

208 KufsteinSong

209 La Danza

210 MexiHatDance

211 Mickey Flute

212 Navy Anchors

213 Rolla Barrel

214 Snow Waltz

215 Star March 1

216 Star March 2

217 The Hornpipe

218 Washington

219 Wood Cutters

220 Xmas Night

132

140

● Reverb (System effect)

Reverb effect type/depth can be set by panel operation.

When you select a different style, the appropriate reverb type will be selected accord-

ingly.

● Chorus (System effect)

Chorus effect type/depth can be set by panel operation.

When you select a different style, the appropriate chorus type will be selected accord-

ingly.

● DSP (System/Insertion effect)

DSP effect on/off status, type and depth can be set by panel operation.

DSP effect will function as either System or Insertion effect. Whether DSP

effect is System or Insertion depends on the selected type. DSP effect

configuration will differ between System and Insertion effects as follows:

About the Digital Effects (Reverb/Chorus/DSP)

•Although not all the effect

settings cannot be made by

operating the PSR-550 panel

manually, some of them may

be accessible through MIDI.

Refer to the MIDI data format

for details.

OUT

Rev Send

VOICE R1

Dry

Cho Send

DSP Send

When DSP type is selected

as a System effect

When DSP type is selected

as an Insertion effect

Rev Send

VOICE R2

Dry

Cho Send

DSP Send

Rev Send

VOICE L

Dry

Cho Send

DSP Send

Rev Send

STYLE

Dry

Cho Send

DSP Send

CHORUS

REVERB

DRY LINE

DSP

Chorus

Return

DSP

Return

Reverb

Return

DSP

effect

133

141

● Reverb Type List

Reverb Type System/Insertion Description

Hall1-5 System Concert hall reverb.

Room1-7 System Small room reverb.

Stage1-4 System Reverb for solo instruments.

Plate1-3 System Simulated steel plate reverb.

White Room System A unique short reverb with a bit of initial delay.

Tunnel System Simulation of a tunnel space expanding to left and right.

Canyon System A hypothetical acoustic space which extends without limit.

Basement System A bit of initial delay followed by reverb with a unique resonance.

No Effect — No effect.

● Chorus Type List

Chorus Type System/Insertion Description

Chorus1-8 System Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.

Celeste1, 2 System A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.

Flanger1-5 System Pronounced three-phase modulation with slight metallic sound.

No Effect — No effect.

● DSP Type List

DSPType System/Insertion Description

Hall1-5 System Concert hall reverb.

Room1-7 System Small room reverb.

Stage1-4 System Reverb for solo instruments.

Plate1-3 System Simulated steel plate reverb.

Delay Left - Center - System Three independent delays, for the left, right and center stereo positions.

Right1, 2

Delay Left - Right System Initial delay for each stereo channel, and two separate feedback delays.

Echo System Stereo delay, with independent feedback level settings for each channel.

Cross Delay System Complex effect that sends the delayed repeats “bouncing” between the left and right channels.

ER1, 2 System This effect isolates only the early reflection components of the reverb.

Gate Reverb System Gated reverb effect, in which the reverberation is quickly cut off for special effects.

Reverse Gate System Similar to Gate Reverb, but with a reverse increase in reverb.

Karaoke1-3 System A delay with feedback of the same types as used for karaoke reverb.

Chorus1-8 System Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.

Celeste1, 2 System A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.

Flanger1-5 System Pronounced three-phase modulation with slight metallic sound.

Symphonic1, 2 System A multi-phase version of Celeste.

Rotary Speaker 1-6 Insertion Rotary speaker simulation.

Tremolo1-3 Insertion Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation.

Guitar Tremolo Insertion Simulated electric guitar tremolo.

Auto Pan1, 2 Insertion Several panning effects that automatically shift the sound position (left, right, front, back).

Phaser 1, 2 System Pronounced, metallic modulation with periodic phase change.

Distortion Hard Insertion Hard-edge distortion.

Distortion Soft Insertion Soft, warm distortion.

Distortion Heavy Insertion Heavy distortion.

Overdrive Insertion Adds mild distortion to the sound.

Amp Simulator Insertion A simulation of a guitar amp.

EQ Disco Insertion Equalizer effect that boosts both high and low frequencies, as is typical in most disco music.

EQ Telephone Insertion Equalizer effect that cuts both high and low frequencies, to simulate the sound heard through a

telephone receiver.

3Band EQ (MONO) Insertion A mono EQ with adjustable LOW, MID, and HIGH equalizing.

2Band EQ (STEREO) Insertion A stereo EQ with adjustable LOW and HIGH. Ideal for drum Parts.

Auto Wah1, 2 Insertion Cyclically modulates the center frequency of a wah filter.

No Effect — No effect.

Through — Bypass without applying an effect.

About the Digital Effects (Reverb/Chorus/DSP)

134

142

Harmony/Echo Type List

Category Type Description

Harmony Duet An extra note is added to the note played on the keyboard to produce duet type harmony.

1+5 A parallel voice is produced a fifth above the note played on the keyboard.

Country One note is added above the note played on the keyboard for a country-style harmony feel.

Trio Two notes are added below the note played on the keyboard for three-part harmony.

Block Three or four notes are added to the note played on the keyboard to produce four or five-

note chords.

4Way Close1 Three harmony notes are generated to produce a four-note chord.

4Way Close2 Similar to the preceding type, but depending on the chords played this type will sometimes

produce a more colorful sound.

4Way Open Four-note chords with open voice (large intervals between the notes). The result is a very

“open” sound. Since the harmony notes can be as much as two octaves below the note

played on the keyboard, avoid playing in the lower registers.

Octave One note is added an octave below the note played on the keyboard.

Strum The notes and assignments are the same as in the Block type, but the notes are

arpeggiated.

Echo Echo 1/4 An echo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard at the currently set tempo.

Echo 1/6

3

Echo 1/8

Echo 1/12

3

Tremolo Tremolo 1/8 A tremolo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard at the currently set tempo.

Tremolo 1/12

3

Tremolo 1/16

Tremolo 1/32

Trill Trill 1/12

3

Two notes played on the keyboard are played alternately at the currently set tempo.

Trill 1/16

Trill 1/24

3

Trill 1/32

135

143

Troubleshooting

POSSIBLE CAUSE/SOLUTION

This is normal and is no cause for alarm.

Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the PortaTone may produce interference.

To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the PortaTone.

The batteries probably need to be replaced. Either replace all six batteries, or use

an AC power adaptor.

•The R1/R2/L voice volume (Mixer) settings could be set too low. Make sure the

voice volumes are set at appropriate levels (page 76).

•The Local Control function could be turned off. Make sure Local Control is turned

on (page 116).

•Check whether the naming function of Registration Memory or song recording

(page 21) is called up in the display or not. If the naming function is active, the

PSR-550 does not produce any sound, even when the keys are played.

You are probably exceeding the maximum polyphony of the PSR-550. The PSR-550

can play up to 32 notes at the same time — including voice R2, voice L, auto

accompaniment, song, and multi pad notes. Notes exceeding this limit will not

sound.

Make sure that Disk mode is engaged.

In the Disk mode, no panel operations can be executed (except for disk operations),

and playing the keyboard does not produce any sound.

Exit from the display by pressing the [EXIT] button.

The MIDI Clock may be set to “Ext”. Make sure it is set to “Int” (page 116).

You may be trying to start accompaniment by playing a key in the right-hand range

of the keyboard. To start the accompaniment with Synchro Start, make sure to play

a key in the left-hand (accompaniment) range of the keyboard.

Check whether the Song mode (page 25) is selected or not. When the Song mode

is active, none of the auto accompaniment functions can be used.

Make sure that the scale tuning value for those notes is set to “0.” If not, select the

template “Equal” to recall the normal tuning of ±0 cents (page 119).

Check whether the fingering mode is set to “Full” or not. If the Full fingering mode is

selected, chords are recognized over the entire range of the keyboard, irrespective

of the split point setting.

•Harmony cannot be turned on when the Full Keyboard fingering mode is selected

or if a percussion kit voice is selected. Select an appropriate fingering mode or

voice.

•Harmony cannot be turned on when a drum kit is selected for the voice R1.

The MIDI terminals can only be used when the HOST SELECT switch is set to

“MIDI.” All other settings (“Mac,” “PC-1,” and “PC-2”) are for direct transmission/

reception with a computer.

PROBLEM

•The speakers produce a “pop” sound whenever

the power is turned ON or OFF.

•When using a mobile phone, noise is produced.

•The volume is reduced or the sound is distorted.

•The sound quality has gotten progressively

worse.

•The registration memory doesn’t work properly.

•Recorded song data will not play back properly.

•The display goes blank and all panel controls are

reset.

•No sound results when the keyboard is played.

•Not all simultaneously-played notes sound.

•Auto Accompaniment seems to “skip” when the

keyboard is played.

•Nothing happens or nothing seems to function,

even when pressing a panel button. For example,

pressing the DEMO button does not start the

Demo song, or playing the keyboard does not

produce any sound.

•The accompaniment or song does not play back

even when pressing the [START/STOP] button.

•The Multi Pads do not play back, even when one

of the MULTI PAD buttons is pressed.

•The auto accompaniment does not start, even

when the Synchro Start is in the standby

condition and a key is pressed.

•The following buttons related to the auto

accompaniment do not function.

•[SYNC START] button

•[SYNC STOP] button

•[ACMP ON/OFF] button

•REGISTRATION MEMORY [FREEZE] button

•Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch.

•Auto accompaniment chords are recognized

regardless of the split point or where chords are

played on the keyboard.

•The Harmony function does not operate.

•MIDI data is not transmitted or received, even

when MIDI cables are connected properly.

136

144

Data Backup & Initialization

■ Data Backup

Except for the data listed below, all PSR-550 panel settings are reset to their initial

settings whenever the power is turned on. The data listed below are backed up - i.e.

retained in memory - as long as an AC adaptor is connected or a set of batteries is

installed.

■ Data Initialization

All data can be initialized and restored to the factory preset condition by turning on the

power while holding the highest (rightmost) white key on the keyboard. “Now Initial-

izing” will appear briefly on the display.

• User Style data ............................................................ page 96

• User Pad data .............................................................. page 92

• Registration Memory data............................................ page 54

• Registration Memory Bank Number............................. page 56

• Registration Memory/One Touch Setting status........... page 55

• Freeze on/off ................................................................ page 55

• MIDI Transmit settings ............................................... page 114

• MIDI Receive settings ................................................ page 115

• Voice Set on/off .......................................................... page 120

• Voice L (Voice Change, Mixer) ..................................... page 74

• Fingering mode ............................................................ page 38

• Split Point ................................................................... page 120

• Sustain on/off ............................................................... page 30

• Upper Octave setting ................................................. page 119

• Pitch Bend Range ...................................................... page 122

• Scale Tuning .............................................................. page 119

• Transpose .................................................................... page 30

• Footswitch Function, Polarity ..................................... page 121

• Touch on/off, Sensitivity ............................................. page 120

• Multi Pad setting .......................................................... page 43

• Master Tuning ............................................................ page 119

• Metronome on/off....................................................... page 118

CAUTION

• All registration and User

Style/Pad memory data,

plus the other settings

listed above, will be erased

and/or changed when the

data initialization

procedure is carried out.

• Carrying out the data

initialization procedure will

usually restore normal

operation if the PSR-550

freezes or begins to act

erratically for any reason.

Even though these settings are retained in memory, you should save them — and all

your important data — to floppy disk for permanent, safe storage. To save all of the

data types listed above to floppy disk, use the Save operation (page 60) and select

“All” as the file type.

All data listed above will be lost if the power is interrupted — in other words, if the

power is turned off, the AC adaptor is disconnected and the batteries are removed.

When this happens, the next time you turn on the PSR-550, a “Clear Backup” message

appears in the display, the Data Initialization operation (below) is automatically

executed, and the PSR-550 is set to the Style mode (page 25).

Now Initializing

137

145

Alert Message List

No File

Unformatted Disk

Disk Error

Write-protected

File Protected

No Disk

Disk Removed

Disk Full

Wrong Disk

Same Name

Maximum 60 Songs

Memory Full

The file is a purposely “copy-protected” disk.

The Copy function is not possible.

The disk contains no file to be loaded, copied, or be deleted.

Insert the disk that contains files to be loaded, copied, or deleted.

An unformatted disk is inserted.

An error occurred during execution of a disk operation.

Try changing the disk.

This message also may appear when executing the Load operation if the

internal memory becomes full.

The floppy disk’s write-protect tab is set to ON.

Remove the disk, set write-protect to off, reinsert the disk and attempt the

operation again.

There is no floppy disk inserted into the disk drive.

Insert a disk.

An error occured because the disk was removed during a disk operation.

Never remove a disk during a disk operation since this could damage both

the disk and the drive.

The disk’s memory capacity is full and no additional data can be recorded.

Delete one or more unneeded songs (using Delete), and attempt the

operation again.

When using the Copy operation, the inserted disk is different from the

source or destination disk.

Remove the disk and reinsert the proper Disk.

More than one file has the same name on the disk.

Change the name.

Maximum of 60 songs can be recorded.

Delete one or more unneeded songs (using Delete), and attempt the song

recording again.

If the internal memory becomes full during Style/Pad recording, this

message will appear on the display and recording will stop.

Insert Song Disk

This message appears when you press the [SONG] button without a disk

in the disk drive.

138

146

Clear Backup

Now Initializing

Cannot Operate

Cannot Set MIDI

CannotTurnHar.On

CannotTurnDSP On

Alert Message List

This message appears when you attempt to edit, quantize or clear the

track which contains no data in the Record mode.

This message indicates that recording a new User style cannot be started

when all three User styles have recorded data. Make sure to clear at least

one of the three User styles before recording a new User style.

This message appears when you attempt to edit, or quantize the track

(other than RHYTHM) which contains preset data in the Style Record

mode.

This function cannot be used during Song/Style/Pad recording.

The MIDI function cannot be set during recording, playback, and disk

operations.

Harmony cannot be turned on during Style/Pad recording.

DSP cannot be turned on during Style/Pad recording.

This message appears to indicate you cannot enter the function when you

select a Multi Pad function in the Multi Pad Recording mode.

•This message may appear when the PSR-550 is turned on, and indi-

cates that user data temporarily stored in the internal memory has been

lost (page 136). When this happens, the Data Initialization operation

(page 136) is automatically executed, and the PSR-550 is set to the

Style mode (page 25).

•If this message appears even when the AC adaptor is connected or the

battery power is adequate, the backup data (page 136) is faulty. Use the

Data Initialization function (page 136).

CannotEnterFunc.

All data can be initialized and restore to the factory preset condition by

turning the STANDBY switch ON while holding the highest (rightmost)

white key on the keyboard.

When the batteries run down this message appears every few seconds.

Exchange all the batteries with the new ones according to the instructions

on page 12.

Battery Low

Data Not Found

User Style Full

Preset Data

This message appears when executing the Quantize or Recording opera-

tions (in the Style Recording mode) when the internal memory is full.

Memory Over

139

Many MIDI messages listed in the MIDI Data Format are expressed in decimal numbers,

binary numbers and hexadecimal numbers.

Hexadecimal numbers may include the letter “H” as a suffix. Also, “n” can freely be defined

as any whole number.

To enter data/values, refer to the table below.

Decimal Hexadecimal Binary

0 00 0000 0000

1 01 0000 0001

2 02 0000 0010

3 03 0000 0011

4 04 0000 0100

5 05 0000 0101

6 06 0000 0110

7 07 0000 0111

8 08 0000 1000

9 09 0000 1001

10 0A 0000 1010

11 0B 0000 1011

12 0C 0000 1100

13 0D 0000 1101

14 0E 0000 1110

15 0F 0000 1111

16 10 0001 0000

17 11 0001 0001

18 12 0001 0010

19 13 0001 0011

20 14 0001 0100

21 15 0001 0101

22 16 0001 0110

23 17 0001 0111

24 18 0001 1000

25 19 0001 1001

26 1A 0001 1010

27 1B 0001 1011

28 1C 0001 1100

29 1D 0001 1101

30 1E 0001 1110

31 1F 0001 1111

32 20 0010 0000

33 21 0010 0001

34 22 0010 0010

35 23 0010 0011

36 24 0010 0100

37 25 0010 0101

38 26 0010 0110

39 27 0010 0111

40 28 0010 1000

41 29 0010 1001

42 2A 0010 1010

43 2B 0010 1011

44 2C 0010 1100

45 2D 0010 1101

46 2E 0010 1110

47 2F 0010 1111

48 30 0011 0000

49 31 0011 0001

50 32 0011 0010

51 33 0011 0011

52 34 0011 0100

53 35 0011 0101

54 36 0011 0110

55 37 0011 0111

56 38 0011 1000

57 39 0011 1001

58 3A 0011 1010

59 3B 0011 1011

60 3C 0011 1100

61 3D 0011 1101

62 3E 0011 1110

63 3F 0011 1111

Decimal Hexadecimal Binary

64 40 0100 0000

65 41 0100 0001

66 42 0100 0010

67 43 0100 0011

68 44 0100 0100

69 45 0100 0101

70 46 0100 0110

71 47 0100 0111

72 48 0100 1000

73 49 0100 1001

74 4A 0100 1010

75 4B 0100 1011

76 4C 0100 1100

77 4D 0100 1101

78 4E 0100 1110

79 4F 0100 1111

80 50 0101 0000

81 51 0101 0001

82 52 0101 0010

83 53 0101 0011

84 54 0101 0100

85 55 0101 0101

86 56 0101 0110

87 57 0101 0111

88 58 0101 1000

89 59 0101 1001

90 5A 0101 1010

91 5B 0101 1011

92 5C 0101 1100

93 5D 0101 1101

94 5E 0101 1110

95 5F 0101 1111

96 60 0110 0000

97 61 0110 0001

98 62 0110 0010

99 63 0110 0011

100 64 0110 0100

101 65 0110 0101

102 66 0110 0110

103 67 0110 0111

104 68 0110 1000

105 69 0110 1001

106 6A 0110 1010

107 6B 0110 1011

108 6C 0110 1100

109 6D 0110 1101

110 6E 0110 1110

111 6F 0110 1111

112 70 0111 0000

113 71 0111 0001

114 72 0111 0010

115 73 0111 0011

116 74 0111 0100

117 75 0111 0101

118 76 0111 0110

119 77 0111 0111

120 78 0111 1000

121 79 0111 1001

122 7A 0111 1010

123 7B 0111 1011

124 7C 0111 1100

125 7D 0111 1101

126 7E 0111 1110

127 7F 0111 1111

•Except the table above, for example 144-159(decimal)/9nH/1001 0000-1001

1111(binary) displays the Note On Message for each channel (1-16).

176-191/BnH/1011 0000-1011 1111 displays the Control Change Message for each

channel (1-16).

192-207/CnH/1100 0000-1100 1111 displays the Program Change Message for

each channel (1-16).

240/FOH/1111 0000 denotes the start of a System Exclusive Message.

247/F7H/1111 0111 denotes the end of a System Exclusive Message.

•aaH (hexidecimal)/0aaaaaaa (binary) denotes the data address. The address

contains High, Mid, and Low.

•bbH/0bbbbbbb denotes the byte count.

•ccH/0ccccccc denotes the check sum.

•ddH/0ddddddd denotes the data/value.

(1) TRANSMIT FLOW

MIDI ← NOTE ON/OFF 9nH

OUT CONTROL CHANGE BnH

BANK SELECT MSB BnH,00H

BANK SELECT LSB BnH,20H

DATA ENTRY MSB BnH,06H

DATA ENTRY LSB BnH,26H

MAIN VOLUME BnH,07H

PANPOT BnH,0AH

SUSTAIN BnH,40H

SOSTENUTE BnH,42H

SOFT PEDAL BnH,43H

RELEASE TIME BnH,48H

REVERB SEND LEVEL BnH,5BH

CHORUS SEND LEVEL BnH,5DH

VARIATION SEND LEVEL BnH,5EH

RPN LSB BnH,64H

RPN MSB BnH,65H

PITCH BEND SENS. BnH,65H,00H,64H,00H,06H,mmH

PROGRAM CHANGE CnH

PITCH BEND EnH

SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE

<YAMAHA MIDI FORMAT>

<UNIVERSAL>

UNIVERSAL NON-REALTIME F0H 7EH.....F7H

<XG STANDARD>

XG PARAMETER CHANGE F0H 43H 1nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH ddH

.....ddH F7H

XG BULK DUMP F0H 43H 0nH 4CH bbH bbH aaH aaH

aaH ddH.....ddH ccH F7H

SPECIAL OPERATORS

SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE

MIDI CLOCK F8H

START FAH

STOP FCH

ACTIVE SENSING FEH

(2) RECEIVE FLOW

MIDI → NOTE OFF 8nH

IN NOTE ON/OFF 9nH

CONTROL CHANGE

BANK SELECT MSB BnH,00H

BANK SELECT LSB BnH,20H

MODULATION BnH,01H

PORTAMENTO TIME BnH,05H

DATA ENTRY MSB BnH,06H

DATA ENTRY LSB BnH,26H

MAIN VOLUME BnH,07H

PANPOT BnH,0AH

EXPRESSION BnH,0BH

SUSTAIN BnH,40H

PORTAMENTO BnH,41H

SOSTENUTO BnH,42H

SOFT PEDAL BnH,43H

HARMONIC CONTENT BnH,47H

RELEASE TIME BnH,48H

ATTACK TIME BnH,49H

BRIGHTNESS BnH,4AH

PORTAMENTO CONTROL BnH,54H

REVERB SEND LEVEL BnH,5BH

CHORUS SEND LEVEL BnH,5DH

VARIATION SEND LEVEL BnH,5EH

DATA INCREMENT BnH,60H

DATA DECREMENT BnH,61H

NRPN LSB BnH,62H

NRPN MSB BnH,63H

VIBRATO RATE BnH,63H,01H,62H,08H,06H,mmH

VIBRATO DEPTH BnH,63H,01H,62H,09H,06H,mmH

VIBRATO DELAY BnH,63H,01H,62H,0AH,06H,mmH

FILTER CUTOFF FREQ. BnH,63H,01H,62H,20H,06H,mmH

FILTER RESONANCE BnH,63H,01H,62H,21H,06H,mmH

AEG ATTACK TIME BnH,63H,01H,62H,63H,06H,mmH

AEG DECAY TIME BnH,63H,01H,62H,64H,06H,mmH

AEG RELEASE BnH,63H,01H,62H,66H,06H,mmH

DRUM INST

CUTOFF FREQ. BnH,63H,14H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

FILTER RESONANCE BnH,63H,15H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

AEG ATTACK RATE BnH,63H,16H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

AEG DECAY RATE BnH,63H,17H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

PITCH COARSE BnH,63H,18H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

MIDI Data Format

147

140

PITCH FINE BnH,63H,19H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

LEVEL BnH,63H,1AH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

PANPOT BnH,63H,1CH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

REVERB SEND BnH,63H,1DH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

CHORUS SEND BnH,63H,1EH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

VARIATION SEND BnH,63H,1FH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

RPN LSB BnH,64H

RPN MSB BnH,65H

PITCH BEND SENS. BnH,65H,00H,64H,00H,06H,mmH

FINE TUNING BnH,65H,00H,64H,01H,06H,mmH,

26H,llH

COARSE TUNING BnH,65H,00H,64H,02H,06H,mmH

NULL BnH,65H,7FH,64H,7FH

ALL SOUND OFF BnH,78H,00H

RESET ALL CONTROLLERS BnH,79H,00H

ALL NOTES OFF BnH,7BH,00H

OMNI OFF BnH,7CH,00H

OMNI ON BnH,7DH,00H

MONO BnH,7EH

POLY BnH,7FH

PROGRAM CHANGE CnH

CHANNEL AFTER TOUCH DnH

PITCH BEND CHANGE EnH

SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE

<YAMAHA MIDI FORMAT>

<UNIVERSAL>

UNIVERSAL REALTIME F0H 7FH.....F7H

UNIVERSAL NON-REALTIME F0H 7EH.....F7H

<XG STANDARD>

XG PARAMETER CHANGE F0H 43H 1nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH ddH

.....ddH F7H

XG BULK DUMP F0H 43H 0nH 4CH bbH bbH aaH aaH

aaH ddH.....ddH ccH F7H

PARAMETER REQUEST F0H 43H 3nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH F7H

DUMP REQUEST F0H 43H 2nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH F7H

SPECIAL OPERATORS

Others

SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE

MIDI CLOCK F8H

START FAH

STOP FCH

ACTIVE SENSING FEH

(3-1-4) CHANNEL AFTER TOUCH (Receive only)

STATUS 1101nnnn(DnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

VALUE 0vvvvvvv v = 0 - 127 AFTER TOUCH VALUE

(3-1-5) PITCH BEND CHANGE

STATUS 1110nnnn(EnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

LSB 0vvvvvvv PITCH BEND CHANGE LSB

MSB 0vvvvvvv PITCH BEND CHANGE MSB

(3-1-6) CONTROL CHANGE

STATUS 1011nnnn(BnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

CONTROL NUMBER 0ccccccc

CONTROL VALUE 0vvvvvvv

* Transmit CONTROL NUMBER.

c = 0 BANK SELECT MSB ; v = 0:XG NORMAL,

64:SFX NORMAL,

126:XG SFX KIT,

127:XG DRUM

c = 32 BANK SELECT LSB ; v = 0 - 127

c = 6 DATA ENTRY MSB ; v = 0 - 127

c = 38 DATA ENTRY LSB ; v = 0 - 127

c = 7 MAIN VOLUME ; v = 0 - 127

c = 10 PANPOT ; v = 0 - 127

c = 64 SUSTAIN ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON

c = 66 SOSTENUTO ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON

c = 67 SOFT PEDAL ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON

c = 72 RELEASE TIME ; v = 0:-64-64:0-127:+63

c = 91 REVERB SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127

c = 93 CHORUS SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127

c = 94 VARIATION SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127

(When only Connection = 1[System])

c = 100 RPN LSB Refer to “(3-3)REGISTERED

PARAMETER NUMBER”

c = 101 RPN MSB Refer to “(3-3)REGISTERED

PARAMETER NUMBER”

* Receive CONTROL NUMBER.

c = 0 BANK SELECT MSB ; v =0:XG NORMAL,

64:SFX NORMAL,

126:XG SFX KIT,

127:XG DRUM

c = 32 BANK SELECT LSB ; v = 0 - 127

c = 1 MODULATION ; v = 0 - 127

c = 5 PORTAMENTO TIME ; v = 0 - 127 *2

c = 6 DATA ENTRY MSB ; v = 0 - 127 *1

c = 38 DATA ENTRY LSB ; v = 0 - 127 *1

c = 7 MAIN VOLUME ; v = 0 - 127

c = 10 PANPOT ; v = 0 - 127

c = 11 EXPRESSION ; v = 0 - 127

c = 64 SUSTAIN ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2

c = 65 PORTAMENTO ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2

c = 66 SOSTENUTO ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2

c = 67 SOFT PEDAL ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2

c = 71 HARMONIC CONTENT ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63

c = 72 RELEASE TIME ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63 *2

c = 73 ATTACK TIME ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63

c = 74 BRIGHTNESS ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63

c = 84 PORTAMENT CONTROL ; v = 0 - 127 *2

c = 91 REVERB SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127

c = 93 CHORUS SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127

c = 94 VARIATION SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127

(When only Connection=1[System])

c = 96 DATA INCREMENT ; v = 0 - 127 *1

c = 97 DATA DECREMENT ; v = 0 - 127 *1

c = 98 NRPN LSB Refer to “(3-4)NON-REGISTERED

PARAMETER NUMBER”

c = 99 NRPN MSB Refer to “(3-4)NON-REGISTERED

PARAMETER NUMBER”

c = 100 RPN LSB Refer to “(3-3)REGISTERED

PARAMETER NUMBER”

c = 101 RPN MSB Refer to “(3-3)REGISTERED

PARAMETER NUMBER”

*1 Only when setting the appointed parameter with RPN.

*2 Does not effect Rhythm Voice.

• Until a PROGRAM CHANGE message is received, the BANK SELECT operation

will be suspended.

When a Voice, including VOICE BANK, is changed, set the BANK SELECT and

Program Change Message, and transmit in the following order, BANK SELECT

MSB, LSB, PROGRAM CHANGE.

• MODULATION controls the Vibrato Depth.

• PORTAMENTO TIME controls the Pitch Change Speed when the Portamento Switch

= ON. 0 being the shortest time, and 127 being the longest.

• PANPOT changes the value for the melody voice and rhythm voice in relation to the

preset value.

• Portamento time is fixed to 0 when the PORTAMENTO CONTROL is used.

• HARMONIC CONTENT applies adjustment to the resonance value that is set by the

voice.

(3) TRANSMIT/RECEIVE DATA

(3-1) CHANNEL VOICE MESSAGES

(3-1-1) NOTE OFF (Receive only)

STATUS 1000nnnn(8nH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

NOTE NUMBER 0kkkkkkk k = 0 (C-2) - 127 (G8)

VELOCITY 0vvvvvvv v: ignored

(3-1-2) NOTE ON/OFF

STATUS 1001nnnn(9nH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

NOTE NUMBER 0kkkkkkk k = 0 (C-2) - 127 (G8)

VELOCITY 0vvvvvvv (v≠0) NOTE ON

00000000 (v=0) NOTE OFF

(3-1-3) PROGRAM CHANGE

STATUS 1100nnnn(CnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

PROGRAM NUMBER 0ppppppp p = 0 - 127

* PROGRAM NUMBER: XG DRUM VOICE number correspondence

P = 0 Standard Kit

P = 1 Standard2 Kit

P = 8 Room Kit

P = 16 Rock Kit

P = 24 Elctrnic Kit

P = 25 Analog Kit

P = 27 Dance Kit

P = 32 Jazz Kit

P = 40 Brush Kit

P = 48 Symphonic Kit

* PROGRAM NUMBER: XG SFX KIT number correspondence

P = 0 SFX1 Kit

P = 1 SFX2 Kit

When DRUM VOICE is selected and program change data for a different DRUM

VOICE is received, the currently selected DRUM VOICE will be replaced with the new

DRUM VOICE.

MIDI Data Format

148

141

This parameter specifies relative change with the value of 64 producing 0 adjustment.

As values get higher the sound becomes increasingly eccentric.

Note that for some voices the effective parameter range is narrower than the legal

parameter range.

• RELEASE TIME applies adjustment to the envelope release time set by the voice.

This parameter specifies relative change with the value of 64 producing 0 adjustment.

• ATTACK TIME applies adjustment to the envelope attack time set by the voice.

This parameter specifies relative change with the value of 64 producing 0 adjustment.

• BRIGHTNESS applies adjustment to the cut-off frequency set by the voice.

This parameter specifies relative change with the value of 64 producing 0 adjustment.

Lower voices produce a softer sound.

For some voices the effective parameter range is narrower than the legal parameter

range.

(3-2) CHANNEL MODE MESSAGES

STATUS 1011nnnn(BnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

CONTROL NUMBER 0ccccccc c = CONTROL NUMBER

CONTROL VALUE 0vvvvvvv v = DATA VALUE

(3-2-1) ALL SOUND OFF (Receive only)

(CONTROL NUMBER = 78H , DATA VALUE = 0)

Switches off all sound from the channel.

Does not reset Note On and Hold On conditions established by Channel Messages.

(3-2-2) RESET ALL CONTROLLERS (Receive only)

(CONTROL NUMBER = 79H , DATA VALUE = 0)

Resets controllers as follows.

PITCH BEND CHANGE 0 (Center)

AFTER TOUCH 0 (min.)

MODULATION 0 (min.)

EXPRESSION 127 (max.)

SUSTAIN 0 (off)

SOSTENUTO 0 (off)

SOFT PEDAL 0 (off)

NRPN Sets number to null. (Internal data remains unchanged)

RPN Sets number to null. (Internal data remains unchanged)

PORTAMENT CONTROL Resets portamento source note number

PORTAMENTO 0 (off)

(3-2-3) ALL NOTES OFF (Receive only)

(CONTROL NUMBER = 7BH , DATA VALUE = 0)

Switches off all of the channel’s “on” notes.

However, any notes being held by SUSTAIN or SOSTENUTO continue to sound until

SUSTAIN/SOSTENUTO goes off.

(3-2-4) OMNI OFF (Receive only)

(CONTROL NUMBER = 7CH , DATA VALUE = 0)

Same processing as for All Notes Off.

(3-2-5) OMNI ON (Receive only)(CONTROL NUMBER = 7DH , DATA VALUE = 0)

Same processing as for All Notes Off. Omni On is not executed.

(3-2-6) MONO (Receive only) (CONTROL NUMBER = 7EH , DATA VALUE = 0)

Same processing as for All Notes Off.

If the 3rd byte is in a range of 0-16 the corresponding channel will be changed to Mode

4 (m=1).

(3-2-7) POLY (Receive only) (CONTROL NUMBER = 7FH , DATA VALUE = 0)

Same processing as for All Sounds Off and the corresponding channel will be changed

to Mode 3.

(3-3) REGISTERED PARAMETER NUMBER (RPN)

STATUS 1011nnnn(BnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

RPN LSB 01100100(64H)

RPN LSB NUMBER 0ppppppp p = RPN LSB(refer to the list below)

RPN MSB 01100101(65H)

RPN MSB 0qqqqqqq q = RPN MSB(refer to the list below)

DATA ENTRY MSB 00000110(06H)

DATA VALUE 0mmmmmmm m = Data Value

DATA ENTRY LSB 00100110(26H)

DATA VALUE 0lllllll l = Data Value

First appoints the parameter for RPN MSB/LSB, then sets the parameter value for data

entry MSB/LSB.

RPN D.ENTRY

MSB LSB MSB LSB PARAMETER NAME DATA RANGE

00H 00H mmH — PITCH BEND SENSITIVITY 00H - 18H(0 - 24 semitones)

01H 00H mmH llH FINE TUNE {mmH,llH} =

{00H,00H}-{40H,00H}-{7FH,7FH}

(-8192*100/8192) - 0 - (+8192*100/8192)

02H 00H mmH — COARSE TUNE

28H - 40H - 58H (-24 - 0 - +24 semitones)

7FH 7FH — — NULL Clears the current RPN number setting.

Does not change the internal parameter settings.

(3-4) NON-REGISTERED PARAMETER NUMBER (NRPN) (Receive only)

STATUS 1011nnnn(BnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

NRPN LSB 01100010(62H)

NRPN LSB NUMBER 0ppppppp p = NRPN LSB(refer to the list below)

NRPN MSB 01100011(63H)

NRPN MSB NUMBER 0qqqqqqq q = NRPN MSB(refer to the list below)

DATA ENTRY MSB 00000110(06H)

DATA VALUE 0mmmmmmm m = Data Value

First appoints the parameter for NRPN MSB/LSB, then sets the parameter value for

data entry MSB/LSB.

NRPN D.ENTRY

MSB LSB MSB LSB PARAMETER NAME DATA RANGE

01H 08H mmH — VIBRATO RATE 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

01H 09H mmH — VIBRATO DEPTH 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

01H 0AH mmH — VIBRATO DELAY 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

01H 20H mmH — FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

01H 21H mmH — FILTER RESONANCE 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

01H 63H mmH — EG ATTACK TIME 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

01H 64H mmH — EG DECAY TIME 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

01H 66H mmH — EG RELEASE 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

14H rrH mmH — DRUM FILTER CUTOFF FREQ. 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

15H rrH mmH — DRUM FILTER RESONANCE 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

16H rrH mmH — DRUM AEG ATTACK RATE 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

17H rrH mmH — DRUM AEG DECAY RATE 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

18H rrH mmH — DRUM PITCH COARSE 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

19H rrH mmH — DRUM PITCH FINE 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

1AH rrH mmH — DRUM LEVEL 00H - 7FH (0 - max.)

1CH rrH mmH — DRUM PANPOT 00H, 01H - 40H - 7FH

(random,left - center - right)

1DH rrH mmH — DRUM REVERB SEND LEVEL 00H - 7FH (0 - max.)

1EH rrH mmH — DRUM CHORUS SEND LEVEL 00H - 7FH (0 - max.)

1FH rrH mmH — DRUM VARIATION SEND LEVEL 00H - 7FH (0 - max.)

The MSG14H-1FH (for drums) message is accepted as long as the channel is set with a

drum voice.

rrH : drum instrument note number

(3-5) SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGES

(3-5-1) MIDI CLOCK

STATUS 11111000 (F8H)

Transmission: 96 clocks per measure are transmitted.

Reception: If the instrument’s clock is set to external, after FAH is received from the

external device the instrument’s clock will sync with the 96 beats per measure received

from the external device.

Decides whether the internal clock, or Timing Clocks received via the MIDI IN will be

used.

(3-5-2) START

STATUS 11111010 (FAH)

Transmission: Transmitted when instrument’s Rhythm or Song playback is started.

Reception: Depending upon the condition, Rhythm, Song Playback, or Song Rec will

start.

(3-5-3) STOP

STATUS 11111100 (FCH)

Transmission: Transmitted when instrument’s Rhythm or Song playback is stopped.

Reception: Depending upon the condition, Rhythm, Song Playback, or Song Rec will

stop.

(3-5-4) ACTIVE SENSING

STATUS 11111110 (FEH)

Transmission: Transmitted approximately once every 200msec.

Reception: Depending upon the condition, Rhythm, Song Playback, or Song Rec will

stop.

(3-6) SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE

(3-6-1) YAMAHA MIDI FORMAT

(3-6-1-1) SECTION CONTROL

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

01111110 7E Style

00000000 00

0sssssss SS Switch No.

00H : INTRO A

01H - 07H : INTRO B

08H : MAIN A

09H - 0FH : MAIN B

10H : FILL IN A

11H - 1FH : FILL IN B

20H : ENDING A

21H - 27H : ENDING B

0ddddddd DD Switch On/Off: 00H(Off),7FH(On)

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

When an ON code is received, the appointed section will be changed.

MIDI Data Format

149

142

(3-6-1-2) TEMPO CONTROL

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

01111110 7E Style

00000000 01

0ttttttt TT Tempo4

0ttttttt TT Tempo3

0ttttttt TT Tempo2

0ttttttt TT Tempo1

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

The internal clock will be set to the received Tempo value.

Tempo Meta Event is a large data block (24-bit), it is divided into 4 groups with 7-bits

going into each of the Tempos 1-4 (4 receives the remaining 3 bits).

(3-6-2) UNIVERSAL SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE

(3-6-2-1) UNIVERSAL REALTIME MESSAGE

(3-6-2-1-1) MIDI MASTER VOLUME (Receive only)

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01111111 7F Universal Realtime

01111111 7F ID of target Device

00000100 04 Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message

00000001 01 Sub-ID #2=Master Volume

0sssssss SS Volume LSB

0ttttttt TT Volume MSB

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

or

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01111111 7F Universal Realtime

0xxxnnnn XN When N is received N=0-F, whichever is received.

When N is transmitted N always=0.

X = don’t care

00000100 04 Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message

00000001 01 Sub-ID #2=Master Volume

0sssssss SS Volume LSB

0ttttttt TT Volume MSB

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

The volume for all channels will be changed simultaneously.

The TT value is used as the MIDI Master Volume value. (the ss value is ignored.)

(3-6-2-2) UNIVERSAL NON REALTIME MESSAGE

(3-6-2-2-1) GENERAL MIDI SYSTEM ON

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01111110 7E Universal Non-Realtime

01111111 7F ID of target Device

00001001 09 Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message

00000001 01 Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

or

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01111110 7E Universal Non-Realtime

0xxxnnnn XN When N is received N=0-F, whichever is received.

When N is transmitted N always=0.

X = don’t care

00001001 09 Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message

00000001 01 Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

Depending upon the received ON message, the System Mode will be changed to XG.

Except MIDI Master Tuning, all control data be reset to default values.

This message requires approximately 50ms to execute, so sufficient time should be

allowed before the next message is sent.

The bank select message for the channel 10 and the NRPN message are not received in

the GM mode.

(3-6-3) XG STANDARD

(3-6-3-1) XG PARAMETER CHANGE

(3-6-3-1-1) XG SYSTEM ON

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

0001nnnn 1N Device Number

01001100 4C Model ID

00000000 00 Address High

00000000 00 Address Mid

01111110 7E Address Low

00000000 00 Data

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

Depending upon the received ON message, the SYSTEM MODE will be changed to

XG.Controllers will be reset, all values of Multi Part and Effect, and All System values

denoted by “XG” data within All System will be reset to default values in the table.

This message requires approximately 50ms to execute, so sufficient time should be

allowed before the next message is sent.

(3-6-3-1-2) XG PARMETER CHANGE

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

0001nnnn 1N Device Number

01001100 4C Model ID

0aaaaaaa AA Address High

0aaaaaaa AA Address Mid

0aaaaaaa AA Address Low

0ddddddd DD Data

| |

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

For parameters with data size of 2 or 4, transmit the appropriate number of data bytes.

For more information on Address and Parameters, refer to < Table 1-2 > - < Table 1-5 >.

The data types listed below are transmitted and received.

System Data

Multi Effect1 Data

Multi Part Data

Drums Setup Data

(3-6-3-2) XG BULK DUMP

binary hexadecimal

01110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

0000nnnn 0N Device Number

01001100 4C Model ID

0bbbbbbb BB ByteCount MSB

0bbbbbbb BB ByteCount LSB

0aaaaaaa AA Address High

0aaaaaaa AA Address Mid

0aaaaaaa AA Address Low

0ddddddd DD Data

| |

0ccccccc CC Check sum

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

For more information on Address and Byte Count, refer to < Table 1-2 > - < Table 1-5 >.

The Check Sum value is set such that the sum of Byte Count, Address, Data, and Check

Sum has value zero in its seven least significant bits.

If the top of the block is appointed to the Address the XG Bulk Dump, Bulk Request

will be received.

The Block is a unit that consists of the data, arranged in the list, as the Total Size.

The data types listed below are transmitted and received.(These are transmitted only

after a Bulk Dump request is received.)

System Data

System Information (Transmit ONLY)

Multi Effect1 Data

Multi Part Data

Drums Setup Data

(3-6-3-3) XG PARAMETER REQUEST (Receive only)

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

0011nnnn 3n Device Number

01001100 4C Model ID

0aaaaaaa AA Address High

0aaaaaaa AA Address Mid

0aaaaaaa AA Address Low

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

For more information on Address and Byte Count refer to < Table 1-2 > - < Table1-5 >.

The data types listed below are received.

System Data

Multi Effect1 Data

Multi Part Data

Drums Setup Data

(3-6-3-4) XG DUMP REQUEST (Receive only)

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

0010nnnn 2n Device Number

01001100 4C Model ID

00aaaaaaa AA Address High

00aaaaaaa AA Address Mid

00aaaaaaa AA Address Low

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

For more information on Address and Byte Count refer to < Table 1-2 > - < Table1-5 >.

The data types listed below are received.

System Data

System Information

Multi Effect1 Data

Multi Part Data

Drums Setup Data

MIDI Data Format

150

143

(3-6-4) CLAVINOVA MIDI COMPLIANCE

(3-6-4-1) DOC MULTI TIMBRE ON / OFF (Receive only)

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

01110011 73 Clavinova ID

00000001 01 Clavinova commmon ID

0001000n 1N

N: 3(DOC Multi Timbre Off),4(DOC Multi Timbre On)

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

(3-6-4-2) MIDI FA CANCEL(Receive only)

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

01110011 73 Clavinova ID

00000001 01 Clavinova common ID

01100001 61 MIDI FA Cancel

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

If this message is received, even if FAH is received the accompaniment/song will not

start.

(3-6-5) SPECIAL OPERATORS

(3-6-5-1) VOLUME ,EXPRESSION AND PAN REALTIME CONTROL OFF

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

01110011 73 Clavinova ID

00000001 01 Clavinova common ID

00010001 11 Sub ID

0000nnnn 0N N = MIDI Channel

01000101 45 Volume and Expression Realtime Control Off

0vvvvvvv VV Value VV: Off=7FH, on=OOH

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

When “On” is received, subsequent volume, expression, and PAN

changes are only valid after the reception of the next key on.

Normal operation resumes when “Off” is received.

(3-6-6) Others

(3-6-6-1) MIDI MASTER TUNING(Receive only)

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

0001nnnn 1N When N is received N=0-F, whichever is received.

When N is transmitted N always=0.

00100111 27 Model ID

00110000 30 Sub ID

00000000 00

00000000 00

0mmmmmmm MM Master Tune MSB

0lllllll LL Master Tune LSB

0ccccccc CC don’t care

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

Changes tuning of all channels.

MM, LL values are used to define the MIDI Master Tuning value.

T = M-128

T : Tuning value (-99cent - +99cent)

M : A single byte value (28-228) consists of bytes 0-3 of MM = MSB,

bytes 0-3 of LL = LSB.

In this setting, GM System ON, XG System ON will not be reset.

< Table 1-1> Parmeter Basic Address

Parameter Change

Address

(H) (M) (L) Description

SYSTEM 00 00 00 System

00 00 7D Drum Setup Reset

00 00 7E XG System On

00 00 7F All Parameter Reset

INFORMATION 01 00 00 System Information

EFFECT 1 02 01 00 Effect1(Reverb,Chorus,Variation)

MULTI PART 08 00 00 Multi Part 1

:

08 0F 00 Multi Part 16

DRUM 30 0D 00 Drum Setup 1 → Address Parameter

31 0D 00 Drum Setup 2 : :

3n 0D 0 note number 13

3n 0E 0 note number 14

: :

3n 5B 0 note number 91

< Table 1-2 > MIDI Parameter Change table (SYSTEM)

Address Size Data Prameter Name Description Default Value

(H) (H) (H) (H)

00 00 00 4 0000 Master Tune -102.4..+102.3[cent] 00 04 00 00

01 ..07FF 1st bit3-0 → bit15-12 (400)

02 2nd bit3-0 → bit11-8

03 3rd bit3-0 → bit7-4

4th bit3-0 → bit3-0

04 1 00..7F Master Volume 0..127 7F

05 1 Not Used

06 1 28..58 Transpose -24..+24[semitones] 40

7D 0n Drum Setup Reset 0n=Drum Setup Number

7E 00 XG System On 00=XG Sytem on

7F 00 All Parameter Reset 00=on (receive only)

TOTAL SIZE 7

< Table 1-3 > MIDI Parameter table (System information)

Address Size Data Prameter Name Description

(H) (H) (H)

01 00 00 E 20..7F Model Name 32..127(ASCII)

:

0D

0E 1 00

0F 1 00

TOTAL SIZE 10

(Transmitted by Dump Request. Not received. Bulk Dump Only)

MIDI Data Format

151

144

< Table 1-4 > MIDI Parameter Change table (EFFECT)

Address Size Data Prameter Name Description Default Value

(H) (H) (H) (H)

02 01 00 2 00..7F Reverb Type MSB Refer to the Ef. Type List 01(=HALL1)

00..7F Reverb Type LSB 00 : basic type 00

02 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 1 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

03 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 2 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

04 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 3 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

05 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 4 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

06 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 5 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

07 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 6 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

08 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 7 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

09 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 8 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

0A 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 9 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

0B 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 10 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

0C 1 00..7F Reverb Return -∞..0..+6dB(0..64..127) 40

0D 1 01..7F Reverb Pan L63..C..R63(1..64..127) 40

TOTAL SIZE 0E

02 01 10 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 11 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

11 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 12 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

12 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 13 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

13 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 14 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

14 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 15 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

15 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 16 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

TOTAL SIZE 6

02 01 20 2 00..7F Chorus Type MSB Refer to the Ef. Type List 41(=Chorus1)

00..7F Chorus Type LSB 00 : basic type 00

22 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 1 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

23 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 2 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

24 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 3 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

25 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 4 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

26 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 5 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

27 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 6 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

28 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 7 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

29 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 8 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

2A 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 9 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

2B 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 10 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

2C 1 00..7F Chorus Return -∞..0..+6dB(0..64..127) 40

2D 1 01..7F Chorus Pan L63..C..R63(1..64..127) 40

2E 1 00..7F Send Chorus To Reverb -∞..0..+6dB(0..64..127) 00

TOTAL SIZE 0F

02 01 30 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 11 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

31 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 12 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

32 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 13 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

33 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 14 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

34 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 15 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

35 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 16 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

TOTAL SIZE 6

02 01 40 2 00..7F Variation Type MSB Refer to the Ef. Type List 05(=DELAY L,C,R)

00..7F Variation Type LSB 00 : basic type 00

42 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 1 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 1 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

44 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 2 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 2 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

46 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 3 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 3 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

48 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 4 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 4 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

4A 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 5 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 5 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

4C 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 6 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 6 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

4E 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 7 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 7 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

50 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 8 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 8 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

52 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 9 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 9 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

54 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 10 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 10 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

56 1 00..7F Variation Return -∞..0..+6dB(0..64..127) 40

57 1 01..7F Variation Pan L63..C..R63(1..64..127) 40

58 1 00..7F Send Vari. To Reverb -∞..0..+6dB(0..96..127) 00

59 1 00..7F Send Vari. To Chorus -∞..0..+6dB(0..96..127) 00

5A 1 00..01 Variation Connection 0:insertion,1:system 00

5B 1 00..7F Variation Part

part1..16(0..15),off(16..63,65..127),AD1(64)

7F

5C 1 00..7F MW Vari. Ctrl Depth -63..+63 40

5D 1 00..7F PB Vari. Ctrl Depth -63..+63 40

5E 1 00..7F CAT Vari. Ctrl Depth -63..+63 40

5F 1 Not Used

60 1 Not Used

TOTAL SIZE 21

02 01 70 1 00..7F Variation Parameter 11 option Parameter Depend on Variation Type

71 1 00..7F Variation Parameter 12 option Parameter Depend on Variation Type

72 1 00..7F Variation Parameter 13 option Parameter Depend on Variation Type

73 1 00..7F Variation Parameter 14 option Parameter Depend on Variation Type

74 1 00..7F Variation Parameter 15 option Parameter Depend on Variation Type

75 1 00..7F Variation Parameter 16 option Parameter Depend on Variation Type

TOTAL SIZE 6

MIDI Data Format

152

145

< Table 1-5 > MIDI Parameter Change table (MULTI PART)

Address Size Data Prameter Name Description Default Value

(H) (H) (H) (H)

08 nn 00 1 00..20 Element Reserve 0..32 0(Part10),2(Others)

nn 01 1 00..7F Bank Select MSB 0..127 7F(Part10),00(Others)

nn 02 1 00..7F Bank Select LSB 0..127 00

nn 03 1 00..7F Program Number 1..128 00

nn 04 1 00..0F, Rcv Channel 0..15;1..16,127;off Part No.

7F

nn 05 1 00..01 Mono/Poly Mode 0:mono,1:poly 01

nn 06 1 00..03 Same Note Number 0:single 01

Key On Assign 1:multi

2:inst (for DRUM)

nn 07 1 00..02 Part Mode 0:normal 00 (other than Part10)

1:drum (ROM) 01 (Part10)

2-3:drum (RAM)

nn 08 1 28..58 Note Shift -24..+24[semitones] 40

nn 09 2 00..FF Detune -12.8..+12.7[Hz] 08 00

nn 0A 1st bit3..0 → bit7..4 -80

2nd bit3..0 → bit3..0

nn 0B 1 00..7F Volume 0..127 64

nn 0C 1 00..7F Velocity Sense Depth 0..127 40

nn 0D 1 00..7F Velocity Sense Offset 0..127 40

nn 0E 1 00..7F Pan 0:random 40

L63..C..R63(1..64..127)

nn 0F 1 00..7F Note Limit Low C-2..G8 00

nn 10 1 00..7F Note Limit High C-2..G8 7F

nn 11 1 00..7F Dry Level 0..127 7F

nn 12 1 00..7F Chorus Send 0..127 00

nn 13 1 00..7F Reverb Send 0..127 28

nn 14 1 00..7F Variation Send 0..127 00

nn 15 1 00..7F Vibrato Rate -64..+63 40

nn 16 1 00..7F Vibrato Depth -64..+63 40

nn 17 1 00..7F Vibrato Delay -64..+63 40

nn 18 1 00..7F Filter Cutoff Freq. -64..+63 40

nn 19 1 00..7F Filter Resonance -64..+63 40

nn 1A 1 00..7F EG Attack Time -64..+63 40

nn 1B 1 00..7F EG Decay Time -64..+63 40

nn 1C 1 00..7F EG Release Time -64..+63 40

nn 1D 1 28..58 MW Pitch Control -24..+24[semitones] 40

nn 1E 1 00..7F MW Filter Control -9600..+9450[cent] 40

nn 1F 1 00..7F MW Amp. Control -100..+100[%] 40

nn 20 1 00..7F MW LFO PMod Depth 0..127 0A

nn 21 1 00..7F MW LFO FMod Depth 0..127 00

nn 22 1 00..7F MW LFO AMod Depth 0..127 00

nn 23 1 28..58 Bend Pitch Control -24..+24[semitones] 42

nn 24 1 00..7F Bend Filter Control -9600..+9450[cent] 40

nn 25 1 00..7F Bend Amp. Control -100..+100[%] 40

nn 26 1 00..7F Bend LFO PMod Depth 0..127 00

nn 27 1 00..7F Bend LFO FMod Depth 0..127 00

nn 28 1 00..7F Bend LFO AMod Depth 0..127 00

TOTAL SIZE 29

nn 30 Not Used

: :

nn 40 Not Used

nn 41 1 00..7F Scale Tuning C -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 42 1 00..7F Scale Tuning C# -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 43 1 00..7F Scale Tuning D -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 44 1 00..7F Scale Tuning D# -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 45 1 00..7F Scale Tuning E -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 46 1 00..7F Scale Tuning F -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 47 1 00..7F Scale Tuning F# -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 48 1 00..7F Scale Tuning G -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 49 1 00..7F Scale Tuning G# -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 4A 1 00..7F Scale Tuning A -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 4B 1 00..7F Scale Tuning A# -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 4C 1 00..7F Scale Tuning B -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 4D 1 28..58 CAT Pitch Control -24..+24[semitones] 40

nn 4E 1 00..7F CAT Filter Control -9600..+9450[cent] 40

nn 4F 1 00..7F CAT Amplitude Control -100..+100[%] 40

nn 50 1 00..7F CAT LFO PMod Depth 0..127 00

nn 51 1 00..7F CAT LFO FMod Depth 0..127 00

nn 52 1 00..7F CAT LFO AMod Depth 0..127 00

nn 53 Not Used

: :

66 Not Used

nn 67 1 00..01 Portamento Switch off/on 00

nn 68 1 00..7F Portamento Time 0..127 00

nn 69 Not Used

: :

6E Not Used

TOTAL SIZE 3F

nn = PartNumber

If there is a Drum Voice assigned to the Part, the following parameters are ineffective.

• Bank Select LSB

• Pitch EG

• Portamento

• Soft Pedal

• Mono/Poly

• Scale Tuning

MIDI Data Format

153

146

XG ESSENTIAL EFFECT

Same as LSB=0

XG OPTION EFFECT

Expanded type for PSR-550

* If the received value does not contain an effect type in the TYPE LSB, the LSB will be directed to TYPE 0.

* Panel Effects are based on the “[Number] Effect Name”.

< Table 1-6 > MIDI Parameter Change table (DRUM SETUP)

Address Size Data Prameter Name Description Default Value

(H) (H) (H) (H) (H)

3n rr 00 1 00..7F Pitch Coarse -64..+63 40

3n rr 01 1 00..7F Pitch Fine -64..+63[cent] 40

3n rr 02 1 00..7F Level 0..127 Depend on the Note

3n rr 03 1 00..7F Alternate Group 0:off,1..127 Depend on the Note

3n rr 04 1 00..7F Pan 0:random Depend on the Note

L63..C..R63(1..64..127)

3n rr 05 1 00..7F Reverb Send Level 0..127 Depend on the Note

3n rr 06 1 00..7F Chorus Send Level 0..127 Depend on the Note

3n rr 07 1 00..7F Variation Send Level 0..127 7F

3n rr 08 1 00..01 Key Assign 0:single,1:multi 00

3n rr 09 1 00..01 Rcv Note Off off/on Depend on the Note

3n rr 0A 1 00..01 Rcv Note On off/on 01

3n rr 0B 1 00..7F Filter Cutoff Freq. -64..63 40

3n rr 0C 1 00..7F Filter Resonance -64..63 40

3n rr 0D 1 00..7F EG Attack Rate -64..63 40

3n rr 0E 1 00..7F EG Decay1 Rate -64..63 40

3n rr 0F 1 00..7F EG Decay2 Rate -64..63 40

TOTAL SIZE 10

n:Drum Setup Number(0 - 1)

rr:note number(0DH - 5BH)

If XG SYSTEM ON and/or GM On message is received, all Drum Setup Parameter will be reset to default values.

According to the Drum Setup Reset message, individual Drum Setup Parameters can be reset to default values.

< Table 1-7 > Effect Type List

REVERB TYPE

TYPE MSB TYPE LSB

DEC HEX 00 01 02 03...07 08 09...15 16 17 18 19 20

000 00 NO EFFECT

001 01 [1]HALL1 [5]HALL2 [2]HALL2 [3]HALL3 [4]HALL4

002 02 [10]ROOM1 [11]ROOM2 [12]ROOM3 [6]ROOM1 [7]ROOM2 [8]ROOM3 [9]ROOM4

003 03 [15]STAGE1 [16]STAGE2 [13]STAGE1 [14]STAGE2

004 04 [19]PLATE [17]PLATE1 [18]PLATE2

005 05 NO EFFECT

:::

015 0F NO EFFECT

016 10 [20]WHITE ROOM

017 11 [21]TUNNEL

018 12 [22]CANYON

019 13 [23]BASEMENT

020 14 NO EFFECT

:::

127 7F NO EFFECT

CHORUS TYPE

TYPE MSB TYPE LSB

DEC HEX 00 01 02 03...07 08 09...15 16 17 18 19 20

000 00 NO EFFECT

001 01 NO EFFECT

:::

064 40 NO EFFECT

065 41 [6]CHORUS1 [7]CHORUS2 [5]CHORUS5 [8]CHORUS4

066 42 [9]CELESTE1 [4]CHORUS4 [10]CELESTE3 [2]CHORUS2 [3]CHORUS3 [1]CHORUS1

067 43 [15]FLANGER 1 [14]FLANGER 4 [11]FLANGER1 [12]FLANGER2 [13]FLANGER3

068 44 NO EFFECT

:::

127 7F NO EFFECT

VARIATION TYPE(0-63)

TYPE MSB TYPE LSB

DEC HEX 00 01 02 03...07 08 09...15 16 17 18 19 20

000 00 NO EFFECT

001 01 [1]HALL1 [5]HALL2 [2]HALL2 [3]HALL3 [4]HALL4

002 02 [10]ROOM1 [11]ROOM2 [12]ROOM3 [6]ROOM1 [7]ROOM2 [8]ROOM3 [9]ROOM4

003 03 [15]STAGE1 [16]STAGE2 [13]STAGE1 [14]STAGE2

004 04 [19]PLATE [17]PLATE1 [18]PLATE2

005 05 [21]DELAY L,C,R [20]Delay LCR

006 06 [22]DELAY L,R

007 07 [23]ECHO

008 08 [24]CROSS DELAY

009 09 [25]ER1 [26]ER2

010 0A [27]GATE REVERB

011 0B [28]REVERS GATE

012 0C NO EFFECT or THRU*

:::

019 13 NO EFFECT or THRU*

020 14 [29]KARAOKE 1

[30]KARAOKE 2 [31]KARAOKE 3

021 15 NO EFFECT or THRU*

:::

063 3F NO EFFECT or THRU*

* No effect when Effect Connection = System.

Through when Effect Connection = Insertion.

VARIATION TYPE (64-127)

TYPE MSB TYPE LSB

DEC HEX 00 01 02 03...07 08 09...15 16 17 18 19 20

064 40 THRU

065 41 [37]CHORUS1 [38]CHORUS2 [36]CHORUS5 [39]CHORUS4

066 42 [40]CELESTE1 [35]CHORUS4 [41]CELESTE3 [33]CHORUS2 [34]CHORUS3 [32]CHORUS1 [53]Rotary Sp5

067 43 [46]FLANGER 1 [45]FLANGER 4 [42]FLANGER1 [43]FLANGER2 [44]FLANGER3

068 44 [48]SYMPHONIC [47]Symphonic

069 45 [54]ROTARY SP. [49]Rotary Sp1

070 46 [57]TREMOLO [55]Tremolo1 [52]Rotary Sp4

071 47 [60]AUTO PAN [36]AutoPan [50]Rotary Sp2 [51]Rotary Sp3 [56]Tremolo2 [58]Gtr Tremolo

072 48 [61]PHASER [62]PHASER 2

073 49 [65]DISTORTION

074 4A [66]OVER DRIVE

075 4B [67]AMP SIM. [63]DIST.HARD [64]DIST.SOFT

076 4C [70]3BAND EQ [68]EQ DISCO [69]EQ TEL

077 4D [71]2BAND EQ

078 4E [73]AUTO WAH [72]Auto Wah

079 4F THRU

::

127 7F THRU

MIDI Data Format

154

147

< Table 1-8 > Effect Parameter List

HALL1,HALL2, ROOM1,ROOM2,ROOM3, STAGE1,STAGE2, PLATE (reverb, variation block)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Reverb Time 0.3-30.0s 0-69 table#4

2 Diffusion 0-10 0-10

3 Initial Delay 0.1mS-99.3mS 0-63 table#5

4 HPF Cutoff Thru-8.0kHz 0-52 table#3

5 LPF Cutoff 1.0k-Thru 34-60 table#3

6

7

8

9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W - D=W - D<W63 1-127 ●

11 Rev Delay 0.1mS-99.3mS 0-63 table#5

12 Density 0-4 0-3

13 Er/Rev Balance E63>R - E=R - E<R63 1-127

14

15 Feedback Level -63-+63 1-127

16

WHITE ROOM, TUNNEL, CANYON, BASEMENT (reverb, variation block)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Reverb Time 0.3-30.0s 0-69 table#4

2 Diffusion 0-10 0-10

3 Initial Delay 0.1mS-99.3mS 0-63 table#5

4 HPF Cutoff Thru-8.0kHz 0-52 table#3

5 LPF Cutoff 1.0k-Thru 34-60 table#3

6 Width 0.5-10.2m 0-37 table#8

7 Heigt 0.5-20.2m 0-73 table#8

8 Depth 0.5-30.2m 0-104 table#8

9 Wall Vary 0-30 0-30

10 Dry/Wet D63>W - D=W - D<W63 1-127 ●

11 Rev Delay 0.1mS-99.3mS 0-63 table#5

12 Density 0-4 0-3

13 Er/Rev Balance E63>R - E=R - E<R63 1-127

14

15 Feedback Level -63-+63 1-127

16

DELAY L,C,R (variation block)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Lch Delay 0.1-715.0ms 1-7150

2 Rch Delay 0.1-715.0ms 1-7150

3 Cch Delay 0.1-715.0ms 1-7150

4 Feedback Delay 0.1-715.0ms 1-7150

5 Feedback Level -63-+63 1-127

6 Cch Level 0-127 0-127

7 High Damp 0.1-1.0 1-10

8

9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W - D=W - D<W63 1-127 ●

11

12

13 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz-2.0kHz 8-40 table#3

14 EQ Low Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz-16.0kHz 28-58 table#3

16 EQ High Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

DELAY L,R (variation block)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Lch Delay 0.1-715.0ms 1-7150

2 Rch Delay 0.1-715.0ms 1-7150

3 Feedback Delay 1 0.1-715.0ms 1-7150

4 Feedback Delay 2 0.1-715.0ms 1-7150

5 Feedback Level -63-+63 1-127

6 High Damp 0.1-1.0 1-10

7

8

9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W - D=W - D<W63 1-127 ●

11

12

13 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz-2.0kHz 8-40 table#3

14 EQ Low Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz-16.0kHz 28-58 table#3

16 EQ High Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

ECHO (variation block)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Lch Delay1 0.1-355.0ms 1-3550

2 Lch Feedback Level -63-+63 1-127

3 Rch Delay1 0.1-355.0ms 1-3550

4 Rch Feedback Level -63-+63 1-127

5 High Damp 0.1-1.0 1-10

6 Lch Delay2 0.1-355.0ms 1-3550

7 Rch Delay2 0.1-355.0ms 1-3550

8 Delay2 Level 0-127 0-127

9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W - D=W - D<W63 1-127 ●

11

12

13 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz-2.0kHz 8-40 table#3

14 EQ Low Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz-16.0kHz 28-58 table#3

16 EQ High Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

CROSS DELAY (variation block)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 L->R Delay 0.1-355.0ms 1-3550

2 R->L Delay 0.1-355.0ms 1-3550

3 Feedback Level -63-+63 1-127

4 Input Select L,R,L&R 0-2

5 High Damp 0.1-1.0 1-10

6

7

8

9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W - D=W - D<W63 1-127 ●

11

12

13 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz-2.0kHz 8-40 table#3

14 EQ Low Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz-16.0kHz 28-58 table#3

16 EQ High Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

EARLY REF1,EARLY REF2(variation block)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Type S-H, L-H, Rdm, Rvs, Plt, Spr 0-5

2 Room Size 0.1-7.0 0-44 table#6

3 Diffusion 0-10 0-10

4 Initial Delay 0.1mS-99.3mS 0-63 table#5

5 Feedback Level -63-+63 1-127

6 HPF Cutoff Thru-8.0kHz 0-52 table#3

7 LPF Cutoff 1.0k-Thru 34-60 table#3

8

9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W - D=W - D<W63 1-127 ●

11 Liveness 0-10 0-10

12 Density 0-3 0-3

13 High Damp 0.1-1.0 1-10

14

15

16

GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE (variation block)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Type TypeA,TypeB 0-1

2 Room Size 0.1-20.0 0-127 table#6

3 Diffusion 0-10 0-10

4 Initial Delay 0.1mS-200.0mS 0-127 table#5

5 Feedback Level -63-+63 1-127

6 HPF Cutoff Thru-8.0kHz 0-52 table#3

7 LPF Cutoff 1.0k-Thru 34-60 table#3

8

9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W - D=W - D<W63 1-127 ●

11 Liveness 0-10 0-10

12 Density 0-3 0-3

13 High Damp 0.1-1.0 1-10

14

15

16

KARAOKE1,2,3 (variation block)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Delay Time 0.1mS-400.0mS 0-127 table#7

2 Feedback Level -63-+63 1-127

3 HPF Cutoff Thru-8.0kHz 0-52 table#3

4 LPF Cutoff 1.0k-Thru 34-60 table#3

5

6

7

8

9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W - D=W - D<W63 1-127 ●

11

12

13

14

15

16

CHORUS1,2,3,4, CELESTE1,2,3,4 (chorus, variation block)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz-39.7Hz 0-127 table#1

2 LFO Depth 0-127 0-127

3 Feedback Level -63-+63 1-127

4 Delay Offset 0.0mS-50mS 0-127 table#2

5

6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz-2.0kHz 8-40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz-16.0kHz 28-58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W - D=W - D<W63 1-127 ●

11

12

13

14

15 Input Mode mono/stereo 0-1

16

MIDI Data Format

155

148

PHASER 1 (chorus, variation block)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz-39.7Hz 0-127 table#1

2 LFO Depth 0-127 0-127

3 Phase Shift Offset 0-127 0-127

4 Feedback Level -63-+63 1-127

5

6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz-2.0kHz 8-40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz-16.0kHz 28-58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W - D=W - D<W63 1-127 ●

11 Stage 4,5,6 (chorus block) 4-6

6-10 (variation block) 6-10

12

13

14

15

16

PHASER 2 (variation block)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz-39.7Hz 0-127 table#1

2 LFO Depth 0-127 0-127

3 Phase Shift Offset 0-127 0-127

4 Feedback Level -63-+63 1-127

5

6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz-2.0kHz 8-40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz-16.0kHz 28-58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W - D=W - D<W63 1-127 ●

11 Stage 3,4,5 3-5

12

13 LFO Phase Difference -180deg-+180deg (resolution=3deg.) 4-124

14

15

16

DISTORTION, OVERDRIVE (variation block)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Drive 0-127 0-127 ●

2 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz-2.0kHz 8-40 table#3

3 EQ Low Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

4 LPF Cutoff 1.0k-Thru 34-60 table#3

5 Output Level 0-127 0-127

6

7 EQ Mid Frequency 500Hz-10.0kHz 28-54 table#3

8 EQ Mid Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

9 EQ Mid Width 1.0-12.0 10-120

10 Dry/Wet D63>W - D=W - D<W63 1-127

11 Edge (Clip Curve) 0-127 0-127 mild-sharp

12

13

14

15

16

AMP SIMULATOR (variation block)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Drive 0-127 0-127 ●

2 AMP Type Off,Stack,Combo,Tube 0-3

3 LPF Cutoff 1.0k-Thru 34-60 table#3

4 Output Level 0-127 0-127

5

6

7

8

9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W - D=W - D<W63 1-127

11 Edge(Clip Curve) 0-127 0-127 mild-sharp

12

13

14

15

16

3BAND EQ(MONO) (variation block)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 EQ Low Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

2 EQ Mid Frequency 500Hz-10.0kHz 28-54 table#3

3 EQ Mid Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

4 EQ Mid Width 1.0-12.0 10-120

5 EQ High Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz-2.0kHz 8-40 table#3

7 EQ High Frequency 500Hz-16.0kHz 28-58 table#3

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15 Input Mode mono/stereo 0-1

16

FLANGER1,2,3 (chorus, variation block)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz-39.7Hz 0-127 table#1

2 LFO Depth 0-127 0-127

3 Feedback Level -63-+63 1-127

4 Delay Offset 0.0mS-50mS 0-127 table#2

5

6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz-2.0kHz 8-40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz-16.0kHz 28-58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W - D=W - D<W63 1-127 ●

11

12

13

14 LFO Phase Difference -180-+180deg (resolution=3deg.) 4-124

15

16

SYMPHONIC (chorus, variation block)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz-39.7Hz 0-127 table#1

2 LFO Depth 0-127 0-127

3 Delay Offset 0.0mS-50mS 0-127 table#2

4

5

6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz-2.0kHz 8-40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz-16.0kHz 28-58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W - D=W - D<W63 1-127 ●

11

12

13

14

15

16

ROTARY SPEAKER (variation block)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz-39.7Hz 0-127 table#1 ●

2 LFO Depth 0-127 0-127

3

4

5

6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz-2.0kHz 8-40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz-16.0kHz 28-58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W - D=W - D<W63 1-127

11

12

13

14

15

16

TREMOLO (variation block)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz-39.7Hz 0-127 table#1 ●

2 AM Depth 0-127 0-127

3 PM Depth 0-127 0-127

4

5

6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz-2.0kHz 8-40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz-16.0kHz 28-58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

10

11

12

13

14 LFO Phase Difference -180-+180deg (resolution=3deg.) 4-124

15 Input Mode mono/stereo 0-1

16

AUTO PAN (variation block)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz-39.7Hz 0-127 table#1 ●

2 L/R Depth 0-127 0-127

3 F/R Depth 0-127 0-127

4 PAN Direction L<->R,L->R,L<-R,Lturn,Rturn,L/R 0-5

5

6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz-2.0kHz 8-40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz-16.0kHz 28-58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

MIDI Data Format

156

149

MIDI Data Format

2BAND EQ(STEREO) (variation block)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz-2.0kHz 8-40 table#3

2 EQ Low Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

3 EQ High Frequency 500Hz-16.0kHz 28-58 table#3

4 EQ High Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

AUTO WAH (variation block)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz-39.7Hz 0-127 table#1

2 LFO Depth 0-127 0-127

3 Cutoff Frequency Offset 0-127 0-127 ●

4 Resonance 1.0-12.0 10-120

5

6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz-2.0kHz 8-40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz-16.0kHz 28-58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12-+12dB 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W - D=W - D<W63 1-127

11

12

13

14

15

16

NO EFFECT (reverb, chorus, variation block), THRU (variation block)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

157

150

< Table 1-9 > Effect Data Value Assign Table

MIDI Data Format

Table#1

LFO Frequency

Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value

0 0.00 32 1.35 64 2.69 96 8.41

1 0.04 33 1.39 65 2.78 97 8.75

2 0.08 34 1.43 66 2.86 98 9.08

3 0.13 35 1.47 67 2.94 99 9.42

4 0.17 36 1.51 68 3.03 100 9.76

5 0.21 37 1.56 69 3.11 101 10.1

6 0.25 38 1.60 70 3.20 102 10.8

7 0.29 39 1.64 71 3.28 103 11.4

8 0.34 40 1.68 72 3.37 104 12.1

9 0.38 41 1.72 73 3.45 105 12.8

10 0.42 42 1.77 74 3.53 106 13.5

11 0.46 43 1.81 75 3.62 107 14.1

12 0.51 44 1.85 76 3.70 108 14.8

13 0.55 45 1.89 77 3.87 109 15.5

14 0.59 46 1.94 78 4.04 110 16.2

15 0.63 47 1.98 79 4.21 111 16.8

16 0.67 48 2.02 80 4.37 112 17.5

17 0.72 49 2.06 81 4.54 113 18.2

18 0.76 50 2.10 82 4.71 114 19.5

19 0.80 51 2.15 83 4.88 115 20.9

20 0.84 52 2.19 84 5.05 116 22.2

21 0.88 53 2.23 85 5.22 117 23.6

22 0.93 54 2.27 86 5.38 118 24.9

23 0.97 55 2.31 87 5.55 119 26.2

24 1.01 56 2.36 88 5.72 120 27.6

25 1.05 57 2.40 89 6.06 121 28.9

26 1.09 58 2.44 90 6.39 122 30.3

27 1.14 59 2.48 91 6.73 123 31.6

28 1.18 60 2.52 92 7.07 124 33.0

29 1.22 61 2.57 93 7.40 125 34.3

30 1.26 62 2.61 94 7.74 126 37.0

31 1.30 63 2.65 95 8.08 127 39.7

Table#2

Modulation Delay Offset

Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value

0 0.0 32 3.2 64 6.4 96 9.6

1 0.1 33 3.3 65 6.5 97 9.7

2 0.2 34 3.4 66 6.6 98 9.8

3 0.3 35 3.5 67 6.7 99 9.9

4 0.4 36 3.6 68 6.8 100 10.0

5 0.5 37 3.7 69 6.9 101 11.1

6 0.6 38 3.8 70 7.0 102 12.2

7 0.7 39 3.9 71 7.1 103 13.3

8 0.8 40 4.0 72 7.2 104 14.4

9 0.9 41 4.1 73 7.3 105 15.5

10 1.0 42 4.2 74 7.4 106 17.1

11 1.1 43 4.3 75 7.5 107 18.6

12 1.2 44 4.4 76 7.6 108 20.2

13 1.3 45 4.5 77 7.7 109 21.8

14 1.4 46 4.6 78 7.8 110 23.3

15 1.5 47 4.7 79 7.9 111 24.9

16 1.6 48 4.8 80 8.0 112 26.5

17 1.7 49 4.9 81 8.1 113 28.0

18 1.8 50 5.0 82 8.2 114 29.6

19 1.9 51 5.1 83 8.3 115 31.2

20 2.0 52 5.2 84 8.4 116 32.8

21 2.1 53 5.3 85 8.5 117 34.3

22 2.2 54 5.4 86 8.6 118 35.9

23 2.3 55 5.5 87 8.7 119 37.5

24 2.4 56 5.6 88 8.8 120 39.0

25 2.5 57 5.7 89 8.9 121 40.6

26 2.6 58 5.8 90 9.0 122 42.2

27 2.7 59 5.9 91 9.1 123 43.7

28 2.8 60 6.0 92 9.2 124 45.3

29 2.9 61 6.1 93 9.3 125 46.9

30 3.0 62 6.2 94 9.4 126 48.4

31 3.1 63 6.3 95 9.5 127 50.0

Table#3

EQ Frequency

Data Value Data Value

0 THRU(0) 32 800

1 22 33 900

2 25 34 1.0k

3 28 35 1.1k

4 32 36 1.2k

5 36 37 1.4k

6 40 38 1.6k

7 45 39 1.8k

8 50 40 2.0k

9 56 41 2.2k

10 63 42 2.5k

11 70 43 2.8k

12 80 44 3.2k

13 90 45 3.6k

14 100 46 4.0k

15 110 47 4.5k

16 125 48 5.0k

17 140 49 5.6k

18 160 50 6.3k

19 180 51 7.0k

20 200 52 8.0k

21 225 53 9.0k

22 250 54 10.0k

23 280 55 11.0k

24 315 56 12.0k

25 355 57 14.0k

26 400 58 16.0k

27 450 59 18.0k

28 500 60 THRU(20.0k)

29 560

30 630

31 700

Table#4

Reverb time

Data Value Data Value Data Value

0 0.3 32 3.5 64 17.0

1 0.4 33 3.6 65 18.0

2 0.5 34 3.7 66 19.0

3 0.6 35 3.8 67 20.0

4 0.7 36 3.9 68 25.0

5 0.8 37 4.0 69 30.0

6 0.9 38 4.1

7 1.0 39 4.2

8 1.1 40 4.3

9 1.2 41 4.4

10 1.3 42 4.5

11 1.4 43 4.6

12 1.5 44 4.7

13 1.6 45 4.8

14 1.7 46 4.9

15 1.8 47 5.0

16 1.9 48 5.5

17 2.0 49 6.0

18 2.1 50 6.5

19 2.2 51 7.0

20 2.3 52 7.5

21 2.4 53 8.0

22 2.5 54 8.5

23 2.6 55 9.0

24 2.7 56 9.5

25 2.8 57 10.0

26 2.9 58 11.0

27 3.0 59 12.0

28 3.1 60 13.0

29 3.2 61 14.0

30 3.3 62 15.0

31 3.4 63 16.0

Table#5

Delay Time(200.0ms)

Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value

0 0.1 32 50.5 64 100.8 96 151.2

1 1.7 33 52.0 65 102.4 97 152.8

2 3.2 34 53.6 66 104.0 98 154.4

3 4.8 35 55.2 67 105.6 99 155.9

4 6.4 36 56.8 68 107.1 100 157.5

5 8.0 37 58.3 69 108.7 101 159.1

6 9.5 38 59.9 70 110.3 102 160.6

7 11.1 39 61.5 71 111.9 103 162.2

8 12.7 40 63.1 72 113.4 104 163.8

9 14.3 41 64.6 73 115.0 105 165.4

10 15.8 42 66.2 74 116.6 106 166.9

11 17.4 43 67.8 75 118.2 107 168.5

12 19.0 44 69.4 76 119.7 108 170.1

13 20.6 45 70.9 77 121.3 109 171.7

14 22.1 46 72.5 78 122.9 110 173.2

15 23.7 47 74.1 79 124.4 111 174.8

16 25.3 48 75.7 80 126.0 112 176.4

17 26.9 49 77.2 81 127.6 113 178.0

18 28.4 50 78.8 82 129.2 114 179.5

19 30.0 51 80.4 83 130.7 115 181.1

20 31.6 52 81.9 84 132.3 116 182.7

21 33.2 53 83.5 85 133.9 117 184.3

22 34.7 54 85.1 86 135.5 118 185.8

23 36.3 55 86.7 87 137.0 119 187.4

24 37.9 56 88.2 88 138.6 120 189.0

25 39.5 57 89.8 89 140.2 121 190.6

26 41.0 58 91.4 90 141.8 122 192.1

27 42.6 59 93.0 91 143.3 123 193.7

28 44.2 60 94.5 92 144.9 124 195.3

29 45.7 61 96.1 93 146.5 125 196.9

30 47.3 62 97.7 94 148.1 126 198.4

31 48.9 63 99.3 95 149.6 127 200.0

Table#6

Room Size

Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value

0 0.1 32 5.1 64 10.1 96 15.1

1 0.3 33 5.3 65 10.3 97 15.3

2 0.4 34 5.4 66 10.4 98 15.5

3 0.6 35 5.6 67 10.6 99 15.6

4 0.7 36 5.7 68 10.8 100 15.8

5 0.9 37 5.9 69 10.9 101 15.9

6 1.0 38 6.1 70 11.1 102 16.1

7 1.2 39 6.2 71 11.2 103 16.2

8 1.4 40 6.4 72 11.4 104 16.4

9 1.5 41 6.5 73 11.5 105 16.6

10 1.7 42 6.7 74 11.7 106 16.7

11 1.8 43 6.8 75 11.9 107 16.9

12 2.0 44 7.0 76 12.0 108 17.0

13 2.1 45 7.2 77 12.2 109 17.2

14 2.3 46 7.3 78 12.3 110 17.3

15 2.5 47 7.5 79 12.5 111 17.5

16 2.6 48 7.6 80 12.6 112 17.6

17 2.8 49 7.8 81 12.8 113 17.8

18 2.9 50 7.9 82 12.9 114 18.0

19 3.1 51 8.1 83 13.1 115 18.1

20 3.2 52 8.2 84 13.3 116 18.3

21 3.4 53 8.4 85 13.4 117 18.4

22 3.5 54 8.6 86 13.6 118 18.6

23 3.7 55 8.7 87 13.7 119 18.7

24 3.9 56 8.9 88 13.9 120 18.9

25 4.0 57 9.0 89 14.0 121 19.1

26 4.2 58 9.2 90 14.2 122 19.2

27 4.3 59 9.3 91 14.4 123 19.4

28 4.5 60 9.5 92 14.5 124 19.5

29 4.6 61 9.7 93 14.7 125 19.7

30 4.8 62 9.8 94 14.8 126 19.8

31 5.0 63 10.0 95 15.0 127 20.0

Table#7

Delay Time(400.0ms)

Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value

0 0.1 32 100.9 64 201.6 96 302.4

1 3.2 33 104.0 65 204.8 97 305.5

2 6.4 34 107.2 66 207.9 98 308.7

3 9.5 35 110.3 67 211.1 99 311.8

4 12.7 36 113.5 68 214.2 100 315.0

5 15.8 37 116.6 69 217.4 101 318.1

6 19.0 38 119.8 70 220.5 102 321.3

7 22.1 39 122.9 71 223.7 103 324.4

8 25.3 40 126.1 72 226.8 104 327.6

9 28.4 41 129.2 73 230.0 105 330.7

10 31.6 42 132.4 74 233.1 106 333.9

11 34.7 43 135.5 75 236.3 107 337.0

12 37.9 44 138.6 76 239.4 108 340.2

13 41.0 45 141.8 77 242.6 109 343.3

14 44.2 46 144.9 78 245.7 110 346.5

15 47.3 47 148.1 79 248.9 111 349.6

16 50.5 48 151.2 80 252.0 112 352.8

17 53.6 49 154.4 81 255.2 113 355.9

18 56.8 50 157.5 82 258.3 114 359.1

19 59.9 51 160.7 83 261.5 115 362.2

20 63.1 52 163.8 84 264.6 116 365.4

21 66.2 53 167.0 85 267.7 117 368.5

22 69.4 54 170.1 86 270.9 118 371.7

23 72.5 55 173.3 87 274.0 119 374.8

24 75.7 56 176.4 88 277.2 120 378.0

25 78.8 57 179.6 89 280.3 121 381.1

26 82.0 58 182.7 90 283.5 122 384.3

27 85.1 59 185.9 91 286.6 123 387.4

28 88.3 60 189.0 92 289.8 124 390.6

29 91.4 61 192.2 93 292.9 125 393.7

30 94.6 62 195.3 94 296.1 126 396.9

31 97.7 63 198.5 95 299.2 127 400.0

Table#8

Reverb Width;Depth;Height

Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value

0 0.5 32 8.8 64 17.6 96 27.5

1 0.8 33 9.1 65 17.9 97 27.8

2 1.0 34 9.4 66 18.2 98 28.1

3 1.3 35 9.6 67 18.5 99 28.5

4 1.5 36 9.9 68 18.8 100 28.8

5 1.8 37 10.2 69 19.1 101 29.2

6 2.0 38 10.4 70 19.4 102 29.5

7 2.3 39 10.7 71 19.7 103 29.9

8 2.6 40 11.0 72 20.0 104 30.2

9 2.8 41 11.2 73 20.2

10 3.1 42 11.5 74 20.5

11 3.3 43 11.8 75 20.8

12 3.6 44 12.1 76 21.1

13 3.9 45 12.3 77 21.4

14 4.1 46 12.6 78 21.7

15 4.4 47 12.9 79 22.0

16 4.6 48 13.1 80 22.4

17 4.9 49 13.4 81 22.7

18 5.2 50 13.7 82 23.0

19 5.4 51 14.0 83 23.3

20 5.7 52 14.2 84 23.6

21 5.9 53 14.5 85 23.9

22 6.2 54 14.8 86 24.2

23 6.5 55 15.1 87 24.5

24 6.7 56 15.4 88 24.9

25 7.0 57 15.6 89 25.2

26 7.2 58 15.9 90 25.5

27 7.5 59 16.2 91 25.8

28 7.8 60 16.5 92 26.1

29 8.0 61 16.8 93 26.5

30 8.3 62 17.1 94 26.8

31 8.6 63 17.3 95 27.1

158

151

MIDI Implementation Chart

[Portable Keyboard] Date : 30-NOV-2000

Model : PSR-550 MIDI Implementation Chart Version : 1.0

Function... Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Basic Default 1 - 16 *1 1 - 16 *2

Channel Changed 1 - 16 *1 1 - 16 *2

Default 3 3

Mode Messages x x

Altered ************** x

Note 0 - 127 0 - 127

Number : True voice ************** 0 - 127

Velocity Note ON o 9nH,v=1-127 o 9nH,v=1-127

Note OFF x 9nH,v=0 x

After Key’sx x

Touch Ch’sx o

Pitch Bend o o

0,32 o o Bank Select

1,5,11 x o

7,10 o o

6,38 o o Data Entry

Control 64,66-67 o o

65 x o Portamento

Change 72 o o Sound Controller

71,73-74 x o Sound Controller

84 x o Portament Cntrl

91,93-94 o o Effect SendLevel

96-97 x o Data Inc,Dec

98-99 x o NRPN LSB,MSB

100-101 o o RPN LSB,MSB

Prog o 0 - 127 o 0 - 127

Change : True # **************

System Exclusive o o

: Song Pos. x x

Common : Song Sel. x x

: Tune x x

System : Clock o o

Real Time : Commands o o

: All Sound Off x o

Aux :

Reset All Cntrls

xo

: Local ON/OFF x x

Mes- : All Notes OFF x o (123-127)

sages : Active Senseo o

: Reset x x

Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO o : Yes

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO x : No

159

152

MIDI Implementation Chart

*1 The tracks for each channel can be selected on the panel.

See page 114 for more information.

*2 Incoming MIDI messages control the PSR-550 as 16 channel

multi timbral tone generator when initially shipped (factory set).

The MIDI messages don’t affect the panel controls including the

Panel Voice selection since they are directly sent to the tone

generator of the PSR-550.

However, the following MIDI messages affects the panel controls

such as Panel Voice, Style, Multi Pad and Song settings:

•MIDI MASTER TUNE, MASTER TUNE (XG System Param-

eter).

•TRANSPOSE (XG System Parameter).

•System Exclusive Messages related to the REVERB, CHO-

RUS and DSP EFFECT settings.

Also, the MIDI messages affect the panel settings when one of

the folowing MIDI reception modes is selected.

These modes can be selected on the panel (see page 115).

Keyboard : The Note On/Off messages received at the desig-

nated Keyboard (receive) channel are processed the

same as the notes normally played on the keyboard.

In this mode, only the following channel messages

will be recognized:

• Note On/Off

• Control Changes

Bank Select (R1 voice only)

Modulation

Volume(R1 voice only)

Data entry

Pan (R1 voice only)

Expression

Sustain

Sostenuto

Soft Pedal

Harmonic Content

Release time

Brightness

Reverb send level (R1 voice only)

Chorus send level (R1 voice only)

Variation send level (R1 voice only)

RPN(Pich bend sensitivity)

All Notes Off

• Program Change (R1 voice only)

• Pitch Bend

Root : The note on/off messages received at the channel(s)

set to “Root” are recognized as the bass notes in the

accompaniment section.

The bass notes will be detected regardless of the

accompaniment on/off the PSR-550.

However, the following MIDI messages affects and

split point settings on the PSR-550 panel.

Chord : The note on/off messages received at the channel(s)

set to “Chord” are recognized as the fingerings in the

accompaniment section.

The chords to be detected depend on the fingering

mode on the PSR-550.

The chords will be detected regardless of the ac-

companiment on/off and split point settings on the

PSR-550 panel.

Off : The MIDI channel messages will not be received at

the designated channel.

160

153

Index

A

AC adaptor......................................................................12

Accompaniment..............................................................32

Accompaniment style .....................................................32

Accompaniment track.....................................................37

Accompaniment volume.................................................37

ACMP .............................................................................33

Assignable ....................................................................122

Auto Accompaniment .....................................................32

Auto Accompaniment on/off ....................................25, 33

Auto Accompaniment section...................................33, 34

Auto Fill..........................................................................34

B

BACK .............................................................................17

Backlight.......................................................................122

Backup ..........................................................................136

Bank..........................................................................44, 56

BASS ........................................................................37, 96

Bass Hold......................................................................121

Batteries ..........................................................................12

Beat indicator..................................................................16

Break.............................................................................121

C

Chord ..................................................................16, 33, 38

Chord Fingerings ............................................................38

Chord Match .............................................................43, 94

CHORD1 ..................................................................37, 96

CHORD2 ..................................................................37, 96

Chorus.............................................................................48

Clear .................................................................91, 95, 104

Clock............................................................................. 116

Control Change.............................................................107

Copy ...............................................................................64

D

Data dial..........................................................................20

DC IN 10-12V jack.........................................................12

Default ............................................................................20

Delete........................................................................21, 67

Demo song ......................................................................13

Digital effect ...........................................................46, 132

Direct Access ............................................................21, 24

DISK IN USE .................................................................58

Disk drive .......................................................................58

Disk mode.......................................................................25

Display............................................................................16

DOC....................................................................9, 68, 109

Drum Cancel...................................................................99

Drum Kit.........................................................................31

Drum Kit List ...............................................................128

DSP .................................................................................49

E

Easy Navigator .........................................................16, 18

Echo ........................................................................51, 134

Edit .......................................................86, 88, 91, 94, 102

Ending.............................................................................34

ESEQ ............................................................................109

EXIT ...............................................................................17

External......................................................................... 116

F

FAST...................................................................16, 46, 49

Fingered1 ..................................................................38, 39

Fingered2 ..................................................................38, 40

Fingering...................................................................17, 38

Floppy disk .....................................................................58

Footswitch ..............................................................10, 121

Format.............................................................................60

Freeze .............................................................................55

Full Keyboard ...........................................................38, 40

Function ..........................................................17, 106, 118

Function tree ...................................................................22

G

GM (General MIDI) ...........................................9, 68, 109

H

Harmony ...................................................................16, 50

Harmony Volume ............................................................52

Harmony/Echo Type List..............................................134

Headphone ......................................................................10

HOST SELECT .................................................... 110, 111

I

Included Data Disk .........................................................59

Initial send .................................................................... 117

Initialization..................................................................136

Insertion effect ........................................................50, 132

Internal..........................................................................116

Intro ................................................................................34

K

Keyboard ........................................................................29

Keyboard Percussion ......................................................31

L

Left .................................................................................29

Load ................................................................................62

Local Control ................................................................ 116

Loop recording ...............................................................97

Lower............................................................................112

161

154

Index

M

Main ................................................................................34

Master Tuning ............................................................... 119

Master Volume ................................................................15

Maximum Polyphony ...................................................123

Measure ..............................................................16, 71, 84

Menu .........................................................................16, 17

Metronome ...................................................................118

MIDI .............................................................................106

MIDI Data Format ........................................................139

MIDI Implementation Chart .........................................151

MIDI terminals .............................................................107

Mixer ..................................................................17, 74, 76

Mode ...............................................................................25

Multi Finger ..............................................................38, 40

Multi Pad ..................................................................43, 92

Multi Track Recording .......................................78, 79, 82

Music Database ..............................................................14

Music Database List .....................................................131

Music stand.......................................................................9

N

Name...............................................21, 56, 65, 90, 94, 104

NEXT .............................................................................17

Note on/off....................................................................106

Number buttons ..............................................................20

O

Octave .........................................................74, 77, 88, 119

One Touch Setting ..........................................................42

Overddub ........................................................................97

P

Packing List ......................................................................4

Pan ......................................................................74, 77, 88

Panel voice....................................................................123

PART ON/OFF ...................................................27, 28, 29

Pitch Bend ......................................................................30

Pitch Bend Range .........................................................122

Polarity .........................................................................121

Program Change ...........................................................107

Punch In/Out...................................................................84

Q

Quantize..................................................................86, 102

Quick Recording.................................................78, 79, 80

R

Receive .........................................................................115

Record...........................................................17, 78, 92, 96

Record mode ...................................................................25

Regist +.........................................................................121

Regist -..........................................................................121

Registration Memory ......................................................54

Rehearsal mode ..............................................................25

Repeat .................................................................45, 69, 72

Return Level .......................................................47, 48, 49

Reverb.............................................................................46

RHYTHM MAIN .....................................................37, 96

RHYTHM SUB ........................................................37, 96

Right ...............................................................................29

Ritardando ......................................................................35

Root ..............................................................................115

S

Save ................................................................................60

Scale Tuning .................................................................119

Section ............................................................................34

Send Level ..........................................................47, 48, 49

Setting up ........................................................................12

Shift ................................................................................21

Single Finger ..................................................................38

SLOW .................................................................16, 46, 49

Soft ...............................................................................121

Song Copy ......................................................................64

Song Menu......................................................................72

Song mode ......................................................................25

Song Play mode ..............................................................69

Song volume ...................................................................70

Sostenuto ......................................................................121

Specification .................................................................156

Split Point .........................................................29, 40, 120

Standard MIDI ..............................................................109

STANDBY switch ..........................................................15

Start Measure ..................................................................71

START/STOP .............................25, 32, 69, 81, 83, 93, 99

Style ..........................................................................32, 96

Style File.............................................................9, 57, 109

Style List.......................................................................130

Style mode ......................................................................25

Sustain ....................................................................16, 121

SYNC START ..........................................................25, 33

SYNC STOP...................................................................41

Synchro Start ............................................................25, 33

Synchro Stop ..........................................................41, 121

Synchronized Start standby ............................................25

System effect ..........................................................50, 132

162

155

Index

T

Tap ..........................................................................36, 121

Tempo .............................................................................36

Time signature ................................................................80

TO HOST .....................................................................107

TOUCH ..................................................................16, 120

Touch Sensitivity ..........................................................120

Track ...................................................................37, 70, 82

Transmit ........................................................................ 114

Transpose ............................................................16, 30, 73

Tremolo ..................................................................51, 134

Trill .........................................................................51, 134

Troubleshooting ............................................................135

U

Upper ............................................................................112

Upper Octave ................................................................ 119

User Pad..........................................................................92

User Song .......................................................................78

User Style .......................................................................96

Utility....................................................17, 60, 64, 67, 118

V

Velocity .........................................................................106

Voice ...............................................................................26

Voice Change ......................................................17, 74, 75

Voice L ......................................................................28, 29

Voice List ......................................................................123

Voice R1 .............................................................26, 27, 29

Voice R2 ...................................................................27, 29

Voice Set .......................................................................120

Volume ..............................................26, 37, 70, 74, 88, 89

W

Write-protect tab .............................................................58

X

XG ......................................................................9, 68, 109

XG/GM ......................................................................... 115

163

156

Specifications

Keyboards

•61 standard-size keys (C1 — C6) with

touch response.

Display

•Large multi-function LCD display

Setup

•STANDBY/ON

•Master Volume : MIN — MAX

Demo

•9 Songs

Realtime Controls

•Pitch Bend wheel

Control & Number Buttons

•SONG

•STYLE

•MUSIC DATABASE

•VOICE L

•VOICE R1

•VOICE R2

•VOICE CHANGE

•MIXER

•NEXT/BACK

•DIRECT ACCESS

•EXIT

•Data dial, [1] — [0], [+/YES], [-/NO]

Overall Controls

•Tempo : 32 — 280

•Transpose

Voice

•219 Panel Voices +14 Drum Kits + 480

XG Voices

•Polyphony : 32

•Voice Set

•R1/R2/L Voices

•Part on/off (R1/R2/L)

•Voice Change : Voice number

•Mixer : Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb

Depth, Chorus Depth, DSP Depth

Auto Accompaniment

•112 Styles

•Accompaniment Track : RHYTHM SUB/

MAIN, BASS, CHORD 1/2, PAD,

PHRASE1/2

•Accompaniment Track Settings : ON/OFF

•Accompaniment Control : ACMP ON/OFF,

SYNC START, SYNC STOP, START/

STOP, INTRO, MAIN A/B (AUTO FILL),

ENDING/rit

•Beat Indicator

•Accompaniment Volume

•Voice Change : Voice number

•Mixer : Volume, Pan, Reverb depth,

Chorus depth, DSP depth

•One Touch Setting

•Fingering Mode : Multi Finger/Single

Finger/Fingered 1/Fingered 2/Full

Keyboard

Music Database

•220

Multi Pads

•40 Multi Pad Banks

•4 Pads + STOP

•Chord Match

•Naming

Digital Effects

•Reverb : 24 types

•Chorus : 16 types

•DSP (system/insertion) : 74 types

•Harmony/Echo : 22 types

Registration Memory

•32 Registration Banks : 1 — 4

•Naming

•Accompaniment Freeze

Disk Operations

•Song playback/recording

•Load

(Style/Multi Pad/Registration Memory)

•Save

(Style/Multi Pad/Registration Memory)

•Utility : Format, Song Copy, Delete File

Song

•Song Volume

•Song Track Settings : ON/OFF

•Repeat Play

•Song Transpose

Song Recording

•Quick Record, Multi Record

•Recording Tracks: 1 — 16

•Punch In/Punch Out

•Quantize

•Naming

•Clear

•Setup Data : Volume, Octave, Pan,

Reverb depth, Chorus depth, DSP depth

Multi Pad Recording

•User Pad Bank : 4 (41 — 44)

•Naming

•Clear

•Chord Match

Style Recording

•User Styles : 3 (113 — 115)

•Recording Tracks : 6 Sections x 8 tracks

•Drum Cancel

•Quantize

•Naming

•Clear

MIDI

•Transmit settings

•Receive settings

•Local Control

•Clock

•Initial Data Send

•MIDI template

Other functions

•Metronome

•Upper Octave

•Master Tuning

•Scale Tuning

•Split Point

•Touch Sensitivity

•Voice Set

•Footswitch function

•Pitch Bend Range

Auxiliary Jacks

•DC IN 10-12V, PHONES/OUTPUT,

SUSTAIN, MIDI IN/OUT, TO HOST

Amplifiers

•6W + 6W (when using PA-6 power

adaptor)

•4.5W + 4.5W (when using batteries)

Speakers

•12 cm (4-3/4") x 2, 3 cm (1-3/16") x 2

Power Consumption

•22W (when using PA-6 power adaptor)

Power Supply

•Adaptor : Yamaha PA-6 AC power adaptor

Rated Voltage DC 10-12V

Rated Current 2A

•Batteries : Six “D” size, R20P (LR20) or

equivalent batteries

Dimensions (W x D x H)

•952 x 387 x 169 (mm)

(37-1/2" x 15-1/4" x 6-5/8")

Weight

•8.7 Kg (19.2 lbs.) excluding batteries

Supplied Accessories

•Data Disk

•Music Stand

•Owner’s Manual

Optional Accessories

•Headphones : HPE-150

•AC Power Adaptor : PA-6

•Foot Switch : FC4, FC5

•Keyboard Stand : L-6, L-7

* Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s

manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha

Corp. reserves the right to change or modify

products or specifications at any time without prior

notice. Since specifications, equipment or options

may not be the same in every locale, please check

with your Yamaha dealer.

164

Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands)

Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien

oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei

einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben

werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune.

(battery)

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con-

tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not

expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted

by the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/

or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s

supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation

instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC

authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with

the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B”

digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a

reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a

residential environment will not result in harmful interference with

other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio

frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instruc-

tions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful

to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC

regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in

all installations. If this product is found to be the source of inter-

ference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and

“ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the

following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by

the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker

or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the an-

tenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the

lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,

please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type

of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please

contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Divi-

sion, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed

by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

OBSERVERA!

Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) sá länge som

den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har

stängts av.

ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt,

sálæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — ogsá

selvom der or slukket pá apparatets afbryder.

VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita

koko laitetta verkosta.

(standby)

165

166

Limited Warranty

90 DAYS LABOR 1 YEAR PARTS

Yamaha Corporation of America, hereafter referred to as Yamaha, warrants to the original consumer of a product included in the categories listed below,

that the product will be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for the periods indicated. This warranty is applicable to all models included in

the following series of products:

PSR SERIES OF PORTATONE ELECTRONIC KEYBOARDS

If during the first 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date, your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to have a defect in

material and/or workmanship, Yamaha and/or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for parts or labor.

If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date, Yamaha will, subject to

the terms of this warranty, supply these parts without charge. However, charges for labor, and/or any miscellaneous expenses incurred are the consumers

responsibility. Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products and/or to use reconditioned units as warranty

replacements.

THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE PRODUCTS.

ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY IS

LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY

EVENT FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.

Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and/or the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages. Therefore, these

limitations and exclusions may not apply to you.

This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state.

CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES

If warranty service should be required, it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities:

1. Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product, or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product for assistance.

You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below.

2. Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to: the retailer selling the product, an authorized service center, or to Yamaha with an explanation of

the problem. Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date (sales receipt, credit card copy, etc.) when requesting service and/or parts under

warranty.

3. Shipping and/or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility.* Units shipped for service should be packed securely.

*Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the first 90 days.

IMPORTANT: Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization. A Return Authorization (RA) will be issued that has a

tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if needed.

4. Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions. It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this manual and to

follow all safety precautions.

EXCLUSIONS

This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name, trademark, and/or ID numbers have been altered, defaced, exchanged removed, or to failures

and/or damages that may occur as a result of:

1. Neglect, abuse, abnormal strain, modification or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity.

2. Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product, an

authorized service center, or an authorized service representative of Yamaha.

3. This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U.S.A., the District of Columbia, and

Puerto Rico. This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U.S.A. or in any other country.

Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below.

Model___________________________ Serial #________________________________ Sales Slip #________________________________

Purchased from____________________________________________________________ Date______________________________________

(Retailer)

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA

Electronic Service Division

6600 Orangethorpe Avenue

Buena Park, CA 90620

KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS. DO NOT MAIL!

HEAD OFFICE

Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-3273

[PK] 20

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the

authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou

au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana

o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V.,

Departamento de ventas

Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del

Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F.

Tel: 686-00-33

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA.

Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil

Tel: 011-853-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Argentina S.A.

Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 1-4371-7021

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha de Panama S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: 507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM

Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

IRELAND

Danfay Ltd.

61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin

Tel: 01-2859177

GERMANY/SWITZERLAND

Yamaha Europa GmbH.

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,

F.R. of Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

THE NETHERLANDS

Yamaha Music Nederland

Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands

Tel: 030-2828411

BELGIUM

Yamaha Music Belgium

Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium

Tel: 02-7258220

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France,

Division Claviers

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.,

Home Keyboard Division

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid) Spain

Tel: 91-201-0700

GREECE

Philippe Nakas S.A.

Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-364-7111

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1

Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Office

Generatorvej 8B

DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1

N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120

IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Europa GmbH.

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,

F.R. of Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2312

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Europa GmbH.

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,

F.R. of Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone

P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.

Tel: 971-4-881-5868

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Cosmos Corporation

1461-9, Seocho Dong, Seocho Gu, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 02-3486-0011

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 3-703-0900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building,

Singapore

Tel: 65-747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad,

Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2713-8999

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor,

Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng,

Bangkok 10320, Thailand

Tel: 02-641-2951

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2317

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria

3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.

146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,

Auckland, New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2312

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

© 2001 Yamaha Corporation

??????? 1??PO????-01A0 Printed in China

Yamaha PK CLUB (Portable Keyboard Home Page, English only)

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/pk

Yamaha Manual Library (English versions only)

http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/